JP2020138084A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine further enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: variable control means for varying first opening/closing means and second opening/closing means in a predetermined opening pattern, based on satisfaction of specific conditions; and determination means for determining an opening pattern varied by the variable control means from a plurality of different opening patterns. An advantageous pattern where game balls that do not enter first ball entry means when the first ball entry means is in a closed state can enter a specific area, and a disadvantageous pattern where ball entry into the specific area is more difficult than the advantageous pattern, are at least set to the opening pattern determined by the determination means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed.

Further, as a privilege game, a game machine has been proposed that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-265765

By the way, the above-mentioned game machine only controls to switch the entrance opening which is opened as a privilege game, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having further improved the interest of the game in the above-mentioned game machine.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a first variable that can be changed into an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the open state. An entry means, a second variable entry means arranged on the downstream side of the first variable entry means, a specific area in which a game ball entered into the second variable entry means can enter, and a specific area. The first variable entry as a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the specific condition. It has a variable control means for varying the ball means and the second variable ball entry means in a predetermined variable pattern, and a determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. Then, in the variable pattern determined by the determination means, the game ball that did not enter the first variable entry means when the first variable entry means is in the closed state is placed in the specific region. At least an advantageous pattern that enables the ball to enter and a disadvantage pattern that makes it more difficult to enter the specific region than the advantageous pattern are set.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are the second variable ball-entry after the first variable ball-entry means is changed to the closed state. The period until the means is changed to the open state is set to be at least different.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 enters the first variable ball-entry means between the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means in the game machine according to claim 1 or 2. A guiding means for guiding the unballed game ball to the second variable ball-entry means over a predetermined period or longer is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is obtained after the first variable ball-entry means is changed to the closed state. The second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state and then changed to the closed state in a period shorter than the predetermined period.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on an operation of a player in the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, and a gaming ball launched from the launching means. The first determination is made based on the first ball entry means capable of entering the ball, the second entry means different from the first entry means, and the game ball entering the first entry means. The first discriminating means to be executed, the second discriminating means for executing the second discriminating based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and the first discriminating means by the first discriminating means. A display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the 1 discrimination result and the second identification information indicating the second discrimination result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means at the same time, and the specific said A privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game when the first identification information indicating the first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the display means, and a privilege game executing means thereof. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, the game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states and the game state set by the game state setting means are supported. It has a ratio variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern.

According to the first variable ball-entry means according to claim 1, the first variable ball-entry means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the open state. A second variable ball entry means arranged on the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means, a specific area in which a game ball entered into the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the specific area for gaming. The first variable ball entry means and the first variable ball entry means and the first variable ball entry means are used as a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the passage of the ball and a privilege game which is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition. 2. The determination means includes a variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means in a predetermined variable pattern, and a determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. In the variable pattern determined by, game balls that did not enter the first variable entry means when the first variable entry means is in the closed state can enter the specific area. At least an advantageous pattern and a disadvantage pattern that makes it more difficult to enter the specific region than the advantageous pattern are set. As a result, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player can be interested in the variable pattern, and the game can be played. It has the effect of improving the interest of.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern are such that the period from when the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state to when the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state is at least different. It is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means is transferred to the second variable ball entry means for a predetermined period of time. The guidance means for guiding over the above is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is that the second variable ball entry means is introduced in a period shorter than the predetermined period after the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state. After changing to the open state, it is changed to the closed state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines according to claims 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the launching means capable of launching the game ball based on the operation of the player, the first ball entering means capable of launching the game ball launched from the launching means, and the first ball entering means different from the first ball entering means. (2) The first discriminating means for executing the first discrimination based on the ball entering the first ball entering means and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. Based on the above, the second discrimination means for executing the second discrimination, the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination by the second discrimination means. 2 A display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the discrimination result at the same time, and the first identification information indicating the specific first discrimination result or the second identification information showing the specific second discrimination result. When the second identification information is displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, one from a plurality of different game states. The game state setting means for setting the game state of the above, and the rate variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern according to the game state set by the game state setting means. To have. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device having a La-La cross section, (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device. (A) to (b) are the rear view of a part of the variable winning apparatus. (A) is a flow chart showing the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment, and (b) is the case where the jackpot type selected in each gaming state in the first embodiment and the jackpot type are selected. It is a schematic diagram which showed the game state which shifts to. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes in the probabilistic gaming state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes in the probabilistic gaming state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a frame button in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a selection switch in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the contents of ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the first hit random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the small hit random number table in the first embodiment. c) is a diagram schematically showing a second random number table in the first embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views showing an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the general drawing variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the RAM of the main control device 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM 223 schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 deviation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 detachment stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notification processing which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the notification lottery process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes in the normal game state or the latent probability change game state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of the display mode in the latent probabilistic game state or the probabilistic game state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is an enlarged view of a part of the front surface of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a flow figure which showed the transition of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the jackpot game in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. This is an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. This is an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the first hit random number table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the small hit random number table in the second embodiment. c) is a diagram schematically showing a second random number table in the second embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views showing an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the general drawing variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the special electric accessory operation table set in ROM. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, and (b) is the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM schematically. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change stop process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation stop processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow figure which showed the transition of the game state in the 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow figure which showed the transition of the game state in the 2nd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is an enlarged view of a part of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd modification of the 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 58, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and starting ports 630, 631, 640, 67 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 (FIG. 11 (a)) and a selection switch 600 (see FIG. 11 (b)) are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when the effect or background displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2), which will be described later, is changed.

As shown in FIG. 11B, the selection switch 600 includes a determination switch (a) for determining selection of effects and the like, a left switch 600b for instructing leftward selection, and an upward selection. It is composed of an upper switch 600c, a right switch 600d for instructing a rightward selection, and a lower switch 600e for instructing a downward selection.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launch unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push-button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is not limited to the above, but the configuration is such that the main control device 110 and other control devices detect the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a, and the solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a. May be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a first starting port 63a, and a first. 2 The starting port 63b, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, the second starting port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a wood screw or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a starting port or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down). In addition, the game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 and the winning port.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

On the right side of the game board 13, a first normal symbol start port 67a and a second normal symbol start port 67b are provided below the first normal symbol start port 67b. The first normal symbol start port 67a and the second normal symbol start port 67b are configured to have the same shape, and are configured by a gate type start port having a sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. There is. When the game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, a lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery conducted for the passing of the game ball through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit.

When the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and "○" and "×" are displayed. After the symbols of No. 1 are alternately lit for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (a symbol of “◯” or “×” in the present embodiment) indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed (lit). If a ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67 or the second normal symbol start port 67b while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes thereof is the same as that of the first normal symbol start port 67a. It is held up to 4 times in total at the 2nd ordinary symbol start port 67b. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. When the variation display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol start port 67 (first normal symbol start port 67b or second normal symbol start port 67b) remains, the next A lottery for ordinary symbols is performed, and a variable display according to the lottery is started.

When it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with "○", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol was a win. When the winning symbol is displayed, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is activated. The first ordinary electric accessory 632 has a left guide member 632a and a right guide member 632b, and the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are spaced apart from each other so that one game ball can pass to the left and right. Normally, it is maintained in an upright position. A predetermined angle (in this embodiment, the left guide member 632a is 40 degrees counterclockwise and the right guide member 632b is 40 degrees clockwise) from the state where the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are substantially vertically upright. The game ball moves (that is, is changed to the open state), and the left guide member 632a and the right guide member guide the game ball to the second start port 640, so that the game ball enters the second start port 640. It becomes an easy state (special state). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of order, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with "x", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol was out of order. At this time, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is not operated, and the next variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed.

A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). The device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are balls that have won prizes in the first starting port 630, the right starting port 631, the second starting port 640, the first ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67a, and the second ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67b. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation display has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error display are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. The 7-segment LED on the left has a variable display (dynamic) of the first special symbol showing the judgment (lottery) result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as the first lottery game) based on the winning of the first starting port 630 or the right starting port 631. Is displayed. Specifically, the variable display (7 segments in the present embodiment) is determined until the variable time (dynamic display time) elapses, which is determined based on the winning of the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631. After the central segment blinks), it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the judgment result. If the determination result is off, the central 1 segment is lit and a symbol "-" indicating the off is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the deviation such as the symbols "3" and "7" corresponding to the hit is displayed.

On the 7-segment LED on the right side, a second special symbol (dynamic display) indicating the determination (lottery) result of the lottery (second lottery game) based on the winning of the second starting port 640 is displayed. Specifically, it is displayed until the fluctuation time determined based on the winning of the second starting port 640 elapses, and is configured in the same manner as the first lottery game. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

The first special symbol indicating the determination (lottery) result of the first lottery game and the second special symbol indicating the determination (lottery) result of the second lottery game are the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later. See also). As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can perform various variable displays as compared with the 7-segment display 37b, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, the fluctuation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, but the fluctuation time is set for each fluctuation mode, and corresponds to the dynamic display mode related to time information. Further, the fluctuation pattern can be divided into a long-term fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time and a short-time fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time, depending on the fluctuation pattern that becomes reach and the fluctuation pattern that does not reach. In this way, even when the time is roughly sorted by a fixed time standard (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), the time information is dynamic. Corresponds to the display mode.

Further, as will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time is reached also corresponds to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the time information of the above-mentioned rough fluctuation pattern (for example, is it a long-time fluctuation pattern? Information on time information determined based on (whether or not, etc.) (for example, the number of long-term fluctuation patterns performed before the start of fluctuation) is also applicable.

In this pachinko machine 10, is it a big hit in the lottery (first lottery game, second lottery game) performed for winning prizes in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640? In addition to making a pass / fail judgment (big hit lottery), the jackpot type is also judged. As the jackpot type determined here, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), jackpot A (15R jackpot probability variation jackpot), jackpot B (15R normal jackpot), jackpot E (15R normal jackpot (electric support)) (Yes))) are set (see FIGS. 16A to 16C). Here, the presence of electric support of the jackpot E indicates that the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is easily set to a special state (open state). In the jackpot E, after the jackpot game of 15 rounds, the electric support state is set until the total number of times of the first lottery game and the second lottery game reaches 100 times.

As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), two types of jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot (with electric support)) and jackpot D (15R probability variation jackpot (without electric support)) are set (FIG. 16). (A)-(c)).

Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the variable winning devices 65 are arranged as the winning devices that are operated in the open state during the jackpot game. The variable winning device 65 is operated so that the first specific winning opening 65a is opened 15 times for a predetermined period or until a predetermined number (10 balls in the present embodiment) of game balls are entered for the jackpots A to E. ..

The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b to form a variable winning device 65. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to light the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It has an arranged LED substrate 65d, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED substrate 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for opening / closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. The opening / closing unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the game that protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i locked with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and the back surface of the back cover body 65j. It is composed of a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the side and operates the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m that covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. There is.

FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a sectional view taken along line Lb-Lb of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5 (b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 6B.

As shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which the game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 composed of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side and the ball cannot be entered. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the right first starting port 631 side. It is configured as follows. Therefore, even during the time-saving game (including during the probabilistic game), it is possible to put the game ball into the second starting port 640 while hitting right, and the game method is changed to left hit immediately after the big hit game. You can reduce the trouble of changing. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 5B. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. .. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. ..

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to the high probability gaming state (probability variation) by passing the above-mentioned probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. It is set to the game state). That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for imparting a probability change game state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to divide the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state ST1) or a probabilistic gaming state.

In this way, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that has won the first specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, so that the player's interest can be improved even during the jackpot game. Can be done. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. .. The operation timing and operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A, jackpot C, and jackpot D are won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds according to the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round. Has been done. Further, when the jackpot B and the jackpot E are won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round.

Therefore, in the jackpot A, the game ball winning the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is not possible to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Has been done. Therefore, the probability variation grant ratio can be controlled according to the jackpot type, and it can be configured so that excessive advantages and disadvantages do not occur.

A case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge port 65e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 6B. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution flow path is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. Thereby, it can be determined by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability change switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls entered in the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball that was won before the 14th round is won in the 14th round and the probability change switch 65e3 is won even if the jackpot is B.

In this way, the game ball that has won the first specific winning opening 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the prize ball (one ball winning in this embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. 15 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery for whether or not to give the probability change game state can be executed. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the probabilistic gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, various gaming states in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a flow in which various gaming states are set. FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a jackpot type that occurs for each special symbol and a gaming state that shifts after the jackpot occurs in various gaming states.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, the following four gaming states are set as gaming states. The first is the normal gaming state ST1.2 in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low (normal) and there is no electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is unlikely to be in the special state (open state)). The second is a game state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low (normal) as in the normal game state ST1, but there is electric support (the first normal electric accessory 632 tends to be in the special state (open state)). Time saving game state ST1h. Third, the probability of a big hit of a special symbol is high, and there is no electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is unlikely to be in a special state (open state)). Latent probability change game state) ST2. The fourth is in the game state where the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high and there is electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 tends to be in the special state (open state)). A certain probabilistic transformation support game state (so-called probabilistic game state) ST3.

In the present embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time. However, in each game state, one of the special symbols is substantially changed (also referred to as a substantial change target). Specifically, it is configured so that the fluctuation time of a special symbol that is not a substantial fluctuation target is longer than the fluctuation time of a special symbol that is a substantial fluctuation target. In addition, the game ball is difficult to enter into the starting port for drawing a special symbol that is not subject to substantial fluctuation, or the game ball enters the starting port for drawing a special symbol that is subject to substantial fluctuation. It is configured so that the game is easy to play. As a result, it is possible to substantially not generate a jackpot of a special symbol that is not a substantial fluctuation target (make it difficult to generate), and to substantially generate a jackpot of a special symbol that is a substantial fluctuation target (make it easy to occur).

The method of subjecting one of the special symbols to the actual fluctuation target is not limited to the method described above. For example, ordinary electric accessories are provided at the starting port that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol and the starting port that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, in each game state, it is conceivable to make only the ordinary electric accessory of the starting port corresponding to the special symbol to be substantially changed movable (or easy to move). As a result, the game ball does not enter the starting port corresponding to the special symbol that is the target of the actual fluctuation, and the game ball does not enter the starting port corresponding to the special symbol that is not the target of the actual fluctuation (it is difficult to enter the ball). Can be done. In this case, a lottery for moving the ordinary electric accessory provided at each starting port may be performed separately. For example, a lottery for moving one ordinary electric accessory is performed based on the entry (passing) into the first ordinary symbol start port (referred to as the lottery for the first ordinary symbol), and the other ordinary electric accessory is movable. The lottery for the second ordinary symbol may be performed by entering (passing) the ball into the second ordinary symbol starting port (referred to as a lottery for the second ordinary symbol). Further, the lottery of the first ordinary symbol and the lottery of the second ordinary symbol may be executed at the same time, and like the lottery of the special symbol in the present embodiment, when one of the ordinary symbols is a big hit, , The lottery of the other ordinary symbol may be missed. As a result, the variation of the gaming state can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the first special symbol and the jackpot based on the second special symbol have different probabilities of selecting a jackpot that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. That is, the probabilities of being able to shift (loop) to a high probability gaming state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) are different. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 16, the jackpot based on the first special symbol has a low probability of being able to shift (loop) to a high probability gaming state (latent probability changing gaming state ST2 or probability changing gaming state ST3) ( 34%), that is, there is a high probability (66%) of shifting (falling) to a low probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or time-saving gaming state ST1h). On the other hand, the jackpot based on the second special symbol has a high probability (100%) of being able to shift (loop) to a high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3). In addition, in explaining the flow in which various game states are set, a jackpot that enables a transition to a high-probability game state (a game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3) is selected (generated) for convenience. In this case, it will be described as shifting to the high-probability gaming state (the gaming ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3).

By setting a special symbol that is a target of substantial fluctuation in each game state, it is possible to adjust (set) whether it is easy to shift to a high-probability gaming state (loop) or to a low-probability state (fall). As a result, in each game state, in addition to two types (high probability and low probability) of the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit, two types (probability) of transitioning (looping) to the high probability game state after the big hit (probability). It is possible to set a state (high probability, low probability) of transition to a high probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the gaming state and improve the interest of the player.

Specifically, in the probability-changing gaming state ST3, which is a high-probability gaming state, by setting the actual fluctuation target in Special Figure 1, the gaming state is easily shifted (falling) to the low-probability state, which is also the high-probability gaming state. In the latent probability change game state ST2, by setting the actual fluctuation target in the special figure 2, it is possible to make the game state easy to shift (loop) to the high probability game state. That is, even if the game is in the same high-probability state (or low-probability state), the distribution of the game state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game can be changed by changing the special symbol that is the target of the actual fluctuation. It is possible to increase the variation in which the game state shifts, and improve the interest of the player.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. First, in the state in which the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (the state in which the RAM clear switch is pressed and the power is turned on), the normal game state ST1 is set. In the normal game state ST1, the first special symbol is substantially subject to change. That is, it is a gaming state in which the probability (probability variation rate) of a jackpot that shifts to a high-probability gaming state is low (34%). Specifically, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1), a fluctuation time of 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30,000 ms (30 seconds) is selected (see FIG. 17). Then, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, the jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot) that shifts to the high probability gaming state is selected as the jackpot type with a probability of 34%, and the jackpot B (15R normal jackpot) that remains in the low probability state. Is selected with a probability of 66% (see FIG. 7B, FIG. 16).

On the other hand, in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (special diagram 2), which is not a substantial variation target, is set to be long. Specifically, when the result of the winning / failing determination (lottery) is incorrect, 64800000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (see FIG. 17). Therefore, it is possible to execute the lottery 2160 to 8200 times in the first special symbol while the deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed once. Since the jackpot probability in the normal game state ST1 (low probability state) is 1/400, the jackpot in the first special symbol is reached by the time the second special symbol that is out of the normal game ends changing once. It is configured to occur. In addition, since the business hours of the amusement store are mainly about 15 hours from 9 am to 11 pm, they are set to be longer than that. Therefore, even if the second lottery game is executed in the normal game state ST1, the deviation fluctuation of the special figure 2 does not end within the business hours. With this configuration, in the normal game state ST1, a jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1), which is a substantial fluctuation target, is generated (easily).

If the second lottery game is executed and the result of the winning / failing determination is not deviated and the result is a hit, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is selected to be 600,000 ms (10 minutes) (see FIG. 17). This will be described in detail later, but when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts to fluctuate based on the jackpot, the fluctuation based on the other special symbol is removed. This is because it is controlled so as to be. If the hit / fail determination result of the special figure 2 is a hit and 6480000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the fluctuation time, the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the special figure 2 does not end within the business hours. Therefore, there arises a problem that all fluctuations (first lottery game) based on the special figure 1 executed during business hours are controlled so as to be out of order (not a big hit). Therefore, the fluctuation based on the jackpot in Special Figure 2 is set to the time (10 minutes) that can be completed within the business hours. Thereby, the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

However, when the fluctuation based on the jackpot of Special Figure 2 is short (for example, 500 ms (0.5 seconds)), the player can judge the result of the hit / fail judgment of Special Figure 2 in a short time, so that the next fraud There is a risk that the act will be carried out. For example, a game ball is inserted into the second starting port 640, and it is determined that the hit / fail determination result of the special figure 2 based on the entry is incorrect (the variation display of the special figure 2 is executed longer than 0.5 seconds). In that case, there is a risk that a fraudulent act (so-called reset goto) of resetting (initializing) the pachinko machine 10 will be executed. As described above, when the RAM clear switch of the pachinko machine 10 is pressed and the power is turned on (reset), the normal game state ST1 is set, and the fluctuation of each special symbol is also initialized (that is, the fluctuation is stopped). Will be). Therefore, by repeating the above fraudulent act (reset goto), it is possible to generate a big hit based on the special figure 2 which is not a target of substantial fluctuation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variation based on the jackpot of the special figure 2 is set to 10 minutes so that the player cannot determine the result of the hit / fail judgment (lottery) of the special figure 2 in a short time. As a result, a period of at least 10 minutes is required to execute the fraudulent act (reset goto), so that the feasible frequency of the cheating act (reset goto) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally generate the jackpot of Special Figure 2 by the above-mentioned fraudulent act (reset goto).

The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not limited to that described above, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, in a game machine in which the second lottery game cannot be executed unless the game ball is intentionally launched (for example, a right-handed game), a right-handed game is performed in the normal game state ST1 (for example, a second lottery game is performed). As a penalty, the fluctuation time based on the jackpot in FIG. 2 may be set to a time longer than 600,000 ms (10 minutes) (for example, 1 hour). Further, in this case, it may be notified that a fraudulent act (right-handed game in the normal game state ST1) is being executed (or has been executed).

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the second starting port 640 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Therefore, in order to insert the game ball into the second starting port 640 (perform the second lottery game), it is necessary to perform the game (right-handed game) of passing the game ball through the right side of the variable display unit 80. In the normal game state ST1, the electric accessory 632 provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 is difficult to be set in the special state (open state) (that is, it is difficult to enter the right first starting port 631). Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in the normal game state ST1, it is difficult to execute the first lottery game according to the special figure 1 which is a substantial fluctuation target, and it is easy to execute the second lottery game according to the special figure 2 which is not a substantial fluctuation target. become. That is, the right-handed game in the normal game state ST1 is set to be more disadvantageous to the player than playing the game (left-handed game) by passing the game ball through the left side of the variable display unit 80. Therefore, in the normal game state ST1, the player plays a left-handed game. When a left-handed game is performed in the normal game state ST1, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 640, but the game ball enters the first starting port 630. As a result, the game state in which the jackpot of the second special symbol does not occur (difficult) and the jackpot of the first special symbol occurs (easily) (that is, the game state in which it is difficult to shift to the high-probability gaming state) is set. Can be done.

In the normal game state ST1, the jackpot B is generated, and after the jackpot game of the jackpot B is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to). On the other hand, after the jackpot A is generated and the jackpot game is executed, the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set (shifted to) (see FIG. 7B). However, if the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 after the jackpot game based on the jackpot A is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to).

The latent probability change game state ST2 is a game state in which the jackpot probability is set to be 10 times higher (high probability game state) than the normal game state ST1, and the second special symbol is a game state in which the second special symbol is substantially changed. That is, it is a gaming state in which the probability (probability variation rate) that a jackpot that can continue the high probability gaming state occurs is high. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). As a result, in the latent probability change game state ST2, the second lottery game can be efficiently performed by performing the right-handed game. Then, in the jackpot of the second special symbol, as the jackpot type, the jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) in which the latent probability variation game state ST2 is continued (looped) is selected with a probability of 66%, and the jackpot shifts to the probability variation game state ST3. D (15R probability variation jackpot) is selected with a 34% probability.

On the other hand, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the variation time of the first special symbol, which is not a substantial variation target, is set long. Specifically, if the result of the winning / failing determination (lottery) of the first special symbol is incorrect, the fluctuation time is selected to be 18000000 ms (30 minutes) (see FIG. 18A). Therefore, it is possible to execute the lottery up to 3600 times in the second special symbol while the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol is performed once. Since the jackpot probability during the probability change (high probability gaming state) is 1/40, the jackpot will be a jackpot with the second special symbol by the time the first special symbol, which is out of the ordinary game, has changed once. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is a hit, the fluctuation time is selected to be 500 ms (0.5 seconds) (see FIG. 18 (a)). In the latent probability change game state ST2, when the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), it shifts to the normal game state ST1, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent act (reset goto) cannot be executed. Therefore, when the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time is set as short as 500 ms (0.5 seconds). As a result, even if a big hit occurs in the first special symbol in the latent probability change game state ST2, the game can be continued without reducing the efficiency (turnover rate) of the game.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the latent probability change game state ST2, the lottery result of the second special symbol is configured to be a small hit with a probability of 8/400. In the small hit in the latent probability change game state ST2, about 3 game balls can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. Since the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry into the specific winning opening 65a is 15, about 45 balls are paid out to the player for each small hit game. As a result, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the right-handed game can be executed in a state that is more advantageous than the normal game state ST1 (a state in which the consumption of the possessed ball is suppressed).

In the latent probability variable game state ST2, the jackpot of the second special symbol is obtained, and when the jackpot D (15R probability variable jackpot) is selected, the latent probability variable game state ST2 is set (looped) again. On the other hand, when the jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) is selected, the gaming state with the probability transformation support (probability variation gaming state ST3) is set thereafter.

The probabilistic game state ST3 is a game state in which the lottery probability of the special symbol is set 10 times higher (set to the high probability game state), and the first special symbol is a game state in which the first special symbol is substantially changed. Further, the lottery probability of the normal symbol is set to be 40 times higher, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is also short, so that the fluctuation time can be easily selected (see FIG. 19). Further, the time (opening time) in which the electric accessory 632 is maintained in the special state (open state) is also set longer than in the normal gaming state ST1 and the latent probability changing gaming state ST2. Therefore, when the player hits the right side, the right first starting port 631 can be easily won. In the present embodiment, 95% of the right-handed game balls are configured to win the right first starting port 631. Therefore, 85% of the remaining 5% of the game balls win the second starting port 640, and the remaining 5% is consumed as an out ball. Therefore, in the probabilistic game state, about 99% of the right-handed game balls win a prize in the right first start port 631 or the second start port 640, and 99% of the right-handed game balls play as prize balls. Will be paid out to the person. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of balls held by the player and perform the game.

In the probabilistic game state ST3, the lottery result of the second special symbol is configured to be a small hit with a probability of 5/400. In the small hit in this probabilistic gaming state ST3, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from becoming too advantageous in the probabilistic gaming state ST3. Not limited to this, a game ball may be allowed to enter the specific winning opening 65a (for example, one ball). As a result, it is possible to increase the benefits for the player and improve the interest of the player.

In the probabilistic gaming state ST3, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, which is not a substantial fluctuation target, is set to be long, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, which is a substantial fluctuation target, is set to be short. Specifically, 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol regardless of the result of the winning / failing determination (lottery) (see FIG. 18B). On the other hand, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, if the result of the winning / failing determination (lottery) is wrong, the fluctuation time is selected to be 18000000 ms (30 minutes) (see FIG. 18 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to execute the lottery up to 3600 times in the first special symbol while the deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed once. Since the jackpot probability during the probability change (high probability game state) is 1/40, the jackpot is made with the first special symbol by the time the second special symbol, which is out of the ordinary game, has changed once. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, if the result of the winning / failing determination (lottery) of the first special symbol is a hit, the fluctuation time is selected to be 5000 ms (5 seconds) (see FIG. 18 (b)). As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), it shifts to the normal game state ST1, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent act (reset goto) cannot be executed. Therefore, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probabilistic game state ST3, the fluctuation time is set as short as 5000 ms (5 seconds). As a result, even if a big hit occurs in the second special symbol in the probabilistic game state ST3, it is possible to make the game machine capable of continuing the game without lowering the efficiency (turnover rate) of the game.

Further, as described above, in the probabilistic gaming state ST3, 95% of the launched game balls win the right first starting port 631. Therefore, since it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 640 and the second lottery game is difficult to be executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a big hit of the second special symbol which is not a substantially variable target.

When the jackpot of the first special symbol is reached in the probability variation game state ST3, the jackpot A is selected at a rate of 34%. After the jackpot game based on the jackpot A, the latent probability change game state ST2 is set (shifted to). Therefore, the latent probability change game state ST2 is selected (shifted to) with a probability of 34%, and the game can be played with a high probability until at least two big hits are won again. On the other hand, if the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 66%, the normal gaming state ST1 is set (so-called falling) after the jackpot game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set, the player has a high probability of favoring the player until the jackpot is executed twice while the consumption of the possessed ball is suppressed. 2 The lottery game (or the first lottery game) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player can perform two jackpot games in a short period of time as compared with the normal game state, and there is an effect that the player can be provided with a sense of superiority.

Furthermore, by displaying so that the player can grasp that the lottery game will be executed with a high probability in favor of the player until the jackpot is executed twice, the player is given at least two jackpots. It has the effect of making you feel guaranteed and providing a sense of security.

In the present embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, when the jackpot B of the first special symbol is reached, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to). That is, it is not possible to obtain two big hits. In the latent probability change game state ST2, as described above, the right-handed game in which the first lottery game is difficult to be executed is performed, and the second lottery is performed during the fluctuation of the deviation of the first special symbol, which fluctuates for a long time. The game is executed a plurality of times, and the jackpot of the second special symbol is generated (easily) (substantially, the jackpot of the first special symbol is not obtained). However, there is a case where the first special symbol becomes a big hit due to the reserved ball of the first special symbol stored in the latent probability change game state ST2. For example, when a big hit is obtained in the first second lottery game in which the latent probability change game state ST2 is set (probability of 1/40). Therefore, in this case, in the latent probability change game state ST2, the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot of the first special symbol with a probability of 34%, and the jackpot E is selected with a probability of 66% (). 7 (b) and 16 (b)). If the jackpot A is selected, the game shifts to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, which is a high-probability gaming state, so that it is possible to obtain two jackpots. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is selected, it is not possible to obtain two jackpots, and the situation shifts to a low probability state. In this case, 100 times of time saving games are given after the big hit game is completed. As a result, a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 is given. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the player is discouraged and the motivation for the game is significantly reduced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37. A third symbol display device 81 is provided, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variations of the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol).

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114, so that the first display is as shown in FIG. 4A. Left (left side display area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2), and right showing the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2), which is one of the third symbols, in the area Dm. Three symbol rows of (right side display area Dm3) are displayed. The type of the third symbol (whether it is special figure 1 or special figure 2) displayed in the first display area (Dm) is determined and displayed according to the game state.

In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state ST1 (low probability gaming state) and the gaming state with probabilistic transformation support (probability transformation gaming state), the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the probabilistic transformation support. In the case of the none game state (latent probability change game state ST2), the second special symbol is set to be displayed in the first display area Dm.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the type of the special symbol displayed in the first display area Dm is set to be switched, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same special symbol may always be displayed. Good.

Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variablely displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. It is designed to be (dynamically displayed).

The third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of 10 types of special symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". .. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variation display is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over.

Specifically, in the first display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Further, in the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, a second display area Dn and a second sub-display area Dt are formed below the second display area Dn at the upper right of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol string indicating a first special symbol or a second special symbol (depending on the game state) is displayed. Further, in the second sub-display area Dt, a symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the gaming state) displayed in the second display area Dn is displayed. Details will be described later, but in the case of the probability variation game state ST3, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, the treasure box symbol is the second display area as the third symbol indicating the second special symbol. It is displayed in Dn. Then, when the change of the second special symbol is started, a blinking display is executed in which the state of FIG. 9A and the state of FIG. 9B are alternately displayed in a short cycle (for example, 1 second). .. Then, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, when the fluctuation time elapses, the display is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 9A. On the other hand, when the lottery result is a hit, it is configured to be stopped and displayed in the state shown in FIG. 9B when the fluctuation time elapses.

Further, a third display area Du is formed on the upper left of the first display area Dm. In this third display area Du, two types of symbol rows of "○" and "×" as shown in FIG. 8B are displayed in parallel in two rows, and the symbol on the left side is a lottery for the first special symbol. The result is shown, and the symbol on the right side is configured to show the lottery result of the second special symbol. The lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be shown depending on other aspects. For example, when two types of symbols "○" and "×" are displayed in two rows in parallel and two "○" symbols are displayed in the left and right columns, the first special symbol or the second special symbol (game). It may be configured to notify that a hit (depending on the state) was hit. Further, the third display area Du and the second display area Dn may be shared. For example, in the normal game state ST1, two types of symbol strings "○" and "×" are displayed in parallel in the second display area, and in the probabilistic game state ST3, FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (b) are displayed. ), The symbol of the treasure box may be displayed in the second display area Dn as the third symbol indicating the second special symbol. In this case, the display area may be switched based on the change of the game state after the big hit game. As a result, the display area of the first display area Dm can be widened, so that the effect of the effect displayed in the first display area Dm can be enhanced. Further, when the variation based on the second special symbol is not executed (when there is no hold of the special figure 2), the second display area Dn and the second sub-display area Dt may not be displayed. As a result, the display area of the first display area Dm can be widened.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit (or a small hit), the change of the other special symbol that is changing is also forcibly changed. It is configured to be stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a disconnection.

Here, in the big hit, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed 15 times (referred to as 15 rounds), whereas in the small hit, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed. It is executed twice (for example, two rounds). Further, one round of the jackpot game is executed until 30 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have won the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, one round of the small hit game in the latent probability variable game state ST2 is set until 1.8 seconds elapse or 10 game balls win the variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hit game in the latent probability change game state ST2, about 3 game balls can be entered. Further, one round of the small hit game in the probabilistic game state ST3 is set until 0.5 seconds elapse or 10 game balls win the variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hit game in the probabilistic game state ST3, it is almost impossible to put the game ball into the variable winning device 65, and it is difficult to obtain the prize ball.

Even in the probabilistic game state ST3, as described above, when the lottery result indicating a small hit in the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the changing second special symbol is forcibly removed (FIG. 9). (See (a)) is displayed as a stop. In this case, the deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol, which is a fluctuation for a long time (10 minutes) and is not a real fluctuation target, is stopped, and after the small hit game of the special figure 1 is completed, the new fluctuation of the special figure 1 is formed. At the same time, the second lottery game is executed based on the new hold (next hold) ball of the second special symbol. That is, there is a possibility that a big hit based on the second special symbol will occur. In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the second lottery game with the second special symbol, the big hit C (15R probability variation big hit) that can shift to the high probability game state is always selected (100%). It is configured (see FIG. 16C), which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, when the fluctuation is started based on the new hold (next hold) of the second special symbol, the first special is set in the second display area Dn as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B. The variation of the symbol is displayed, and the variation of the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. Similarly, the symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the second sub-display area Dt, and the symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is varied so as to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. .. The variable mode is not limited to this, and the display area of the second display area Dn where the variation of the second special symbol is displayed is enlarged, and the variation of the first special symbol is displayed in the first display. The area Dm may be reduced.

When the variation of the second special symbol is changed so as to be displayed in the first display area Dm, the display mode in which the treasure box is opened is executed, and if the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect, as shown in FIG. 10 (a). The word "Sorry" is displayed from inside the treasure box, and the player is informed that the lottery result was out of order. On the other hand, when the winning / failing judgment result is a hit, the characters "Congratulations" are displayed from inside the treasure box as shown in FIG. 10B, and the player is informed that the lottery result was a win. To.

In this way, when the first special symbol wins a small hit in the probability variation game state ST3, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation of the new second special symbol is started. 2 The chances of the lottery game being executed can be increased. Further, in that case, as shown in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (b), the variation based on the second special symbol is emphasized and displayed, so that the player is expected to win the jackpot with the second special symbol. Can be made to.

In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is a decorative display according to the situation. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 8A, sub-display regions Ds are formed below the first display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 8B, the reserved symbol "black circle" corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. On the other hand, a second sub-display region Dt is formed below the second display region Dn. As shown in FIG. 9A, the reserved symbol "black triangle mark" corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the second sub-display area Dt. In the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four, so that a maximum of four reserved symbols "black circles" are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds. In the second sub-display area Dt, a maximum of four reserved symbols "black triangle marks" are displayed.

In the present embodiment, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed by a "black circle" and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is displayed by a "black triangle mark". Not limited to this, the reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be the same. By using the same reserved symbol for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the capacity of the symbol data can be reduced. Further, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. For example, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol may be displayed in the left area of the sub-display area Ds, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the right area, or the fluctuation starts from the left side of the display area. The reserved symbols may be displayed in order.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of two of the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three, four, or more lottery games and the corresponding start-up. Of course, it is also possible to provide each mouth and simultaneously configure the variable display of each lottery result.

When a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start port 640, the first start port switch or the second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is activated. Turns on. It should be noted that the first start port 630 and the right first start port 631 are formed on the back side of the game board 13 with a common guide path for guiding the game ball that has entered the ball to the first start port switch. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first start port switch and the second start port switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 are also one of the winning ports in which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when a ball wins a prize.

When either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the jackpot, the variation display based on the other special symbol is forcibly terminated. In the present embodiment, when one of the special symbols starts to fluctuate so that the winning / failing judgment result becomes a big hit, the special symbol that starts to fluctuate after the other is forcibly changed as a lottery result. Is configured to start. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the jackpot game is started continuously or the jackpot game is started at the same time.

In the present embodiment, when the winning lottery game is executed by one special symbol, the lottery game that is out of the game is forcibly executed by the other, but the other is not limited to this. The lottery game may be executed according to the lottery result so that the jackpot game can be started continuously. In addition, if one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted in the other special symbol, and the remaining fluctuation display is continued after the big hit. May be good. In this case, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be blinked and displayed in a predetermined display mode "for example, h of the alphabet" in a predetermined cycle. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended).

Further, a special symbol that preferentially executes the variable display in each game state may be specified, and the variable display of the special symbol may be preferentially executed. For example, in the normal game state ST1, the variation of the first special symbol is preferentially executed. In this case, the change of the second special symbol may be temporarily stopped (or forcibly stopped) based on the start of execution of the change of the first special symbol. As a result, if the first special symbol does not change, the change of the second special symbol can be executed, but when the change of the first special symbol starts, the change of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (or). Forcibly stopped). Therefore, the variation of the first special symbol can be preferentially executed in the normal game state ST1.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not win in any of the winning openings are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be returned to the initial state.

<About the configuration>
The characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, a left flow path PA1 on which the game ball flows down on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and a right flow path PA2 on which the game ball flows down on the right side of the variable display unit 80 are formed. A first starting port 630 is arranged below the center of the variable display unit 80. As described above, the game balls flowing down the right flow path PA2 are configured by the nail groups T2 and T3 so that 85% of the flowing game balls enter the second starting port 640. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path PA1 is more easily entered into the first start port 630 than the game ball that has flowed down the right side flow path PA2.

The first normal symbol start port 67a is arranged in the right flow path PA2, the variable winning device 65 is arranged below it, the right first start port 631 is arranged below it, and the second normal is on the right side thereof. The symbol start port 67b is arranged. A second starting port 640 is arranged below the right first starting port 631. A plurality of nails T for changing the rolling direction of the game ball are arranged on the game board 13.

The game ball launched into the right flow path is the right th when the electric accessory 632 is in the normal state (the state where the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are upright) due to the nail group T4 (composed of three nails). 1 It is configured so that a game ball does not enter the starting port 631. When the electric accessory 632 is in the normal state, 85% of the game balls flowing down the right flow path are configured to flow down the left side of the right first starting port 631. The ratio of the game balls flowing down the left side and the right side of the right first starting port 631 can be changed by adjusting the angle (inclination) of the nail T1. By inclining the angle of the nail T1 toward the variable winning device 65 side (opposite side to the nail group T4), the width between the nail T1 and the nail group T4 becomes wider, and the nail T1 flows down between the nail group T4. That is, the ratio of the game ball flowing down on the right side of the right first starting port 631 increases. On the other hand, by inclining the nail T1 toward the right first starting port 631 side (nail group T4 side), the width between the nail T1 and the nail group T4 becomes narrower, and the game ball flows down on the right side of the right first starting port 631. By reducing the ratio of playing balls, the ratio of game balls flowing down the left side of the right first starting port 631 can be increased.

The game ball that has flowed down the left side of the right first starting port 631 is configured to be guided to the second starting port 640 by the nail group T3 (composed of five nails). In the nail group T3, the width of each nail is arranged to be narrower than that of one game ball, and the game ball cannot pass between them (width). The game balls guided by the nail group T3 are prevented from flowing down the second starting port 640 by the nail group T2 (composed of three nails), and all of them enter the second starting port 640. It is configured. Not limited to this, it is natural that some game balls may flow downward from the nail group T3 side (or the nail group T2 side, or both).

Here, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 640, one prize ball is set to be paid out to the player. Since 85% of the game balls launched into the right channel PA2 are configured to win a prize at the second starting port 640 (when the electric accessory 632 is in the normal state), the game balls launched by the player. Of these, 85% are configured to be refunded as prize balls. Therefore, by launching the game ball into the right flow path PA2, the player can suppress the consumption (decrease) of the game ball as a holding ball as compared with launching the game ball into the left flow path. In this embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the right first starting port 631 does not win a prize in the second starting port 640 due to the nail group T2. Thereby, by adjusting the nail T1, the ratio of the game balls entering the second starting port 640, that is, the ratio of the game balls refunded as prize balls in the right-handed game can be adjusted.

Next, in the special state (the state in which the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are rotated until they are substantially horizontal, the open state), the electric accessory 632 is left side of the right first starting port 631 by the left guide member 632a. It is configured so that the flow path flowing down the water is closed. As a result, when the electric accessory 632 is in the special state (open state), the game ball flowing down the right flow path is prevented from winning the second starting port 640. Therefore, in the time-saving game state ST1h or the probability variation game state ST3, the winning of the right first starting port 631 increases, the winning of the second starting port 640 decreases, and the first lottery game with the first special symbol It is configured to increase the number of executions (execution frequency). Further, in the time-saving game state ST1h and the probability variation game state ST3, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set longer, the number of executions (execution frequency) of the second lottery game can be further reduced (lowered).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol which is advantageous to the player is set to be short, the game is performed so as to launch the game ball into the right flow path. As already mentioned, since the ratio of the game balls that win the second starting port 640 is set to 85% of the game balls that flow down the right flow path, the number of balls held by the player decreases. However, in the present embodiment, in the latent probability change game state ST2, the probability of winning a small hit with the second special symbol is set high. Further, the small hit game executed during the latent probability change game state ST2 is set so that the opening time of one round of the one variable winning device 65 is 1.8 seconds or 10 balls are won, and the opening time per round is set to other. Since it is extended from the small hit in the game state of, the prize ball can be obtained by the small hit. In the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit during the latent probability change is set to be 15% of the amount consumed by flowing down the right flow path, and is configured to compensate for the decrease in the number of balls held by the player. Has been done. Therefore, even in the latent probability change game state ST2, the player can play the game by suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held.

In the present embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, it is prohibited to play a game in a right-handed game (a game in which a game ball is launched into the right flow path PA2), and the second start port is in the normal game state ST1. When the game ball wins a prize in 640, an abnormality process is executed, an alarm display "Please play left-handed" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a similar warning is also notified by voice. Further, in the normal game state ST1, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 640, the jackpot may be controlled to be invalid, or an abnormal signal may be output to a hall computer or the like. You may.

In the present embodiment, the game method (left-handed game or right-handed game) is changed in each game state, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. It may be configured so that either a left-handed game or a right-handed game may be performed in all game states, or either a left-handed game or a right-handed game may be performed in a specific game state. You may. For example, a start port for the first special symbol and a start port for the second special symbol are provided at the lower center of the game board 13. Then, the game ball that flows down the left flow path PA1 by performing the left-handed game and the game ball that flows down the right flow path PA2 by performing the right-handed game are the starting port of the first special symbol and the second. It may be configured so that the ball can enter the starting port of the special symbol. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish between a left-handed game and a right-handed game in all game states or a specific game state, so that the game burden on the player can be reduced.

<Electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

The jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation type counter C3 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and some counters are not in the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45). It is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 wins the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second starting port 640 in which the counter values are stored for the winning of the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631. A second special symbol holding ball storage 203b is provided in which each counter value is stored. In the present embodiment, the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 are provided with a maximum of four holding balls, and the second starting port 640 is provided with a maximum of four holding balls, respectively. A maximum of eight reserved balls are memorable. Therefore, the game ball is moved to the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game. When a prize is won, each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball wins in the second starting port 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. .. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the first special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed). Various settings and control processing for this are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is moved to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and various types for variable display of the second special symbol. Settings and control processing are executed.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is at the first starting port 630 or When the right first starting port 631 and the second starting port 640 are won, if the number of holdings for the winning starting port is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning start port. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning start port is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and a prize ball (in this embodiment, one game ball). ) Is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is 4 in total for the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631, and 4 for the second starting port 640, but is limited to this. Instead, each of them may be four, or the upper limit may not be set.

Each counter shown in FIG. 9 will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first random number counter C1 is commonly acquired for each ball entering the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45).

The value of the random number counter C1 per first is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the spheres are the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start port. At the timing when the 640 is won (starting prize), it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning start port of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 14) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a (in this embodiment, "7" at the low probability and "0-9" at the high probability), it is determined to be the jackpot.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first hit random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (hits) that are big hits is 1 at low probability, the value "7" is 10, and the value "0-9" is 10. It is stored in the first random number table 202a.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment). ) Is reached and then returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the spheres are the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start. At the timing when the mouth 640 is won (starting prize), it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning start opening. The timing at which the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired is actually the timing at which the game ball is detected by the first start port switch (not shown) or the second start port switch (not shown). That is.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, a random number that is out of order. If there is, the variation pattern in the variation display effect and the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of deviation. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203b is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect or The stop type is the one at the time of big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16) stored in the ROM 202.

As the jackpot type, as described above, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot E are set as jackpot types dedicated to the first special symbol, and jackpot C and jackpot D are set as jackpot types dedicated to the second special symbol. Has been done. The jackpot A to jackpot E are each composed of 15 rounds of jackpot games. Further, in the jackpot A, jackpot C, and jackpot D, the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is rotated for 5 seconds at the start of the 14th round, so that the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. When the game ball is detected by the probability change switch 65e3, the game state after the big hit game is set to the probability change game state ST3 or the latent probability change game state ST2, which is the high probability game state.

The method for making the game ball pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, a V variable winning device 651 in which a game ball that has entered can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (provided with a probability change switch 65e3) and a game ball that has entered cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (probability change switch 65e3). (Not provided) A non-V variable winning device 652 is provided. Then, in the jackpot that makes it possible to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to the high-probability gaming state, the V variable winning device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game cannot be shifted to the high-probability gaming state. In the jackpot, the V variable winning device 651 is not opened and closed, and the non-V variable winning device 652 is controlled to be opened and closed. Further, the V variable winning device 651 may be provided with a switching member 65h as in the present embodiment. Then, by moving the switching member 65h at a specific timing (for example, at the start of the 14th round), the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Then, in the jackpot that makes it possible to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to the high-probability gaming state, the V variable winning device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed in the 14th round, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to the high-probability gaming state. In the jackpot that makes it impossible to shift to, the non-V variable winning device 652 is controlled to be opened and closed in the 14th round. As a result, it is not necessary to change the control of the probability change switch 65e3 for each jackpot type, so that the design cost and the program capacity can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot B and the jackpot E, the switching member 65h is rotated only for 0.5 seconds at the start of the 14th round. It takes 0.5 seconds or more for the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 to reach the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, if the jackpot is B or the jackpot E, the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. It is configured so that it is impossible to play, and the gaming state after the big hit is not set to the gaming state with a high probability. In the case of the jackpot B and the jackpot E, which do not shift to the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot game, the switching member 65h may not be rotated. As a result, in the jackpot B and the jackpot E, it is possible to surely prevent the game ball from passing through the probability change switch 65e3, and since it is not necessary to rotate the switching member 65h, the power consumption can be reduced.

Therefore, even if the jackpot game is started, it is determined for the player whether or not the probability change is given during the subsequent jackpot game, so that the expectation for the probability change can be continuously held for a long time. Further, since the ratio of the probability variation given is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player can play the game by changing the degree of expectation that the probability variation is given depending on the difference in the special symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the jackpot type selection table 202d is composed of three types of tables, the jackpot type selection tables A to C. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table A. This jackpot type selection table A is used to determine the jackpot type based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 when a jackpot occurs in the normal gaming state ST1 (including the time-saving gaming state ST1h). It is a selection table. As shown in FIG. 16A, jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot) and jackpot B (15R normal jackpot) are set as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). For jackpot A, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set as a determination value, and for jackpot B, the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "34 to 99" is the determination value. Is set as. As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), one type of jackpot C is set, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99" is set as a determination value. That is, in the normal game state ST1, the jackpot A is selected with a probability of 34% and the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 66% when a jackpot is achieved in the special figure 1. On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in Special Figure 2, the big hit C is selected with a 100% probability.

As shown in FIG. 16A, in the jackpot A, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the operating time of the electric accessory 632 is also set long (electricity). This is a jackpot in which a V-winning open pattern is set, in which a support state) is not given and an open pattern in which a game ball can win is given to the probability change switch 65e3 of the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, the jackpot B is a jackpot in which the electric support state is not given and the V prize opening pattern is not set. The jackpot C is set to a jackpot in which an electric support state is given and a V prize opening pattern is set.

In this way, in the normal game state ST1, by setting only jackpot C as the jackpot type of the second special symbol that should not normally be played (variable), it is assumed that a jackpot occurs in the second special symbol due to fraud or the like. However, the latent probability change game state ST2 is not given, and the problem that at least two big hits are illegally given in the high probability game state can be suppressed.

Next, FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table B. The jackpot type selection table B is a table for determining the jackpot type when a jackpot is established in the latent probability variation game state ST2. In this jackpot type selection table B, jackpot A and jackpot E are set as jackpot types in Special Figure 1, and jackpot C and jackpot D are set as jackpot types in Special Figure 2, respectively.

The jackpot E is a 15-round time-saving jackpot, and the electric support state is given until the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to fluctuate 100 times after the jackpot game is completed. The jackpot probability in this case is set to a low probability state. In addition, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is set to be long when the transition to the latent probability variation game state ST2 is made, the big hit is the change of the first special symbol that has transitioned to the latent probability variation game state ST2. Is generally considered. In that case, with the intention of relieving the player, the jackpot E, which is not normally selected in the game state ST1, is set to be selected instead of the jackpot B. Therefore, the disappointment of the player can be suppressed, and the problem that the motivation for the game is significantly reduced can be suppressed.

When a big hit is made in Special Figure 2, a big hit C and a big hit D are set respectively. The jackpot D is composed of jackpots in which a latent probability change of 15 rounds is set. Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability change game state ST2 is set, there is a high possibility that the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to the high probability game state until at least two big hit games are executed. ing. Therefore, for the player, the jackpot D is set to a more advantageous jackpot type than the jackpot C in which the probability variation game state ST3 is set.

In the jackpot type selection table B, the jackpot C is set to "0 to 65" as a determination value, and the jackpot D is set to "66 to 99" as a determination value. Therefore, the jackpot C is set to be selected with a probability of 66% when the second special symbol is hit, and the jackpot D is set to be selected with a probability of 34%. Therefore, the player plays the game with the expectation that the jackpot D will be selected when the jackpot is hit with the second special symbol during the latent probability variation game state ST2.

FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table C. The jackpot type selection table C is a selection table used to determine the jackpot type when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3. In the jackpot type selection table C, jackpot A and jackpot B are set as jackpot types of the first special symbol, and only jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. The percentage of jackpot A selected is set to 34% (judgment value "0 to 33"), and the percentage of jackpot B selected is set to 66% (judgment value "34 to 99"). ).

In this way, when the probability variation game state ST3 is set, the jackpot D is always selected when the jackpot is reached in the second special symbol, so that the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set, and at least 2 is set for the player. It is configured so that the high-probability gaming state can be continuously set until the jackpot is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation game state ST3, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, and further, the electric accessory 632 is easily set to be in the special state (open state) (electric support). ), The number of balls entering the second starting port 640 is suppressed. As will be described later, in the probabilistic gaming state ST3, 3000 ms is selected at a rate of 191/199 and 30,000 ms is selected at a rate of 8/199 by lottery (see FIG. 19). Therefore, it is configured so that the fluctuation time of 30,000 ms, which has a long fluctuation time, is selected with a low probability.

Until the fluctuation time of 30,000 ms elapses, the electric accessory 632 is not operated in the special state (open state), and during that time, the game ball is likely to win the second starting port 640 (right-handed). Since 85% of the game balls are entered), the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be increased. On the other hand, during the probabilistic game state ST3, in the case of deviation as shown in FIG. It is configured so that a new lottery is not efficiently executed even when the reserved ball is stored. However, since the small hit probability of the first special symbol is set to 1/80 during the probability variation game state ST3 (see FIG. 15 (b)), every time a small hit is won in the first special symbol, The fluctuation executed by the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and then the fluctuation of the stored ball is started. That is, by winning a small hit with the first special symbol, the lottery opportunity with the second special symbol increases, and the lottery that is advantageous to the player is easily executed. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that he will win a small hit with the first special symbol, and can increase the expectations of the player other than the big hit. The lottery probability for small hits may be set to an appropriate value.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description of various counters will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0.

The value of the variable type counter CS1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball is moved to the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640. At the timing of winning (starting winning), the RAM 203 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

In the present embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired at the timing when the start winning is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the value may be acquired at the timing when the variation starts. Of course, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 may also be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 (a) to 18 (b), the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 17) for selecting a variation pattern in a low-probability gaming state, and a latent probability variation game. Fluctuation pattern selection table B for selecting a variation pattern in the state ST2 (see FIG. 18A), variation pattern selection table C for selecting a variation pattern in the probability variation game state ST3 or the time saving game state ST1h (FIG. 18 (FIG. 18). b) Refer to) are set respectively.

In each fluctuation pattern selection table, the type of fluctuation pattern is set according to the number of reserved balls when the fluctuation starts, the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1, and the hit / fail determination result. The type of fluctuation pattern determined by the main control device 110 is a rough content of the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation time and the rough fluctuation type (non-reach, various types of reach) are mainly determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 114 is configured to determine the content of a more detailed fluctuation pattern. With such a configuration, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal game state ST1, the hit / fail judgment result is deviated as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and an extremely long fluctuation time (dynamic display time) is determined regardless of the hit. Has been done. Specifically, 64800000 ms is selected and 18 hours is set. Since the business hours of a game store are usually long from 9:00 am to 11:00 pm, the business hours are 15 hours, which is longer than that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing with the second special symbol in the normal game state ST1 and making a big hit. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time is long even in the case of a big hit. In this case, by outputting to the hall computer or the like that the game is being played with the second special symbol, the game store can monitor the illegal game and give guidance in the correct game method.

In the present embodiment, the hit case has a long fluctuation time in the second special symbol, but the hit case may have a short fluctuation time such as 500 ms. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that the second special symbol executes an extremely long hit variation and the first special symbol does not execute the hit variation during that period.

As shown in FIG. 18A, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the case of being off is configured to be 180,000 ms, which is set extremely long. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, which is a hit, is configured to be 500 ms and is set short. With this configuration, even if the player shifts to the latent probability variable game state ST2 and the first special symbol of the first variation becomes a jackpot E, it is difficult to understand that the transition to the latent probability variable game state ST2 has occurred. it can. Furthermore, the jackpot game can be continuously executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 18B, in the probabilistic gaming state ST3, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol coming off is configured to be 180,000 ms, which is set extremely long. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the hit is configured to be 5000 ms, and is set according to the period in which the effect of the treasure box described later is executed.

In the present embodiment, the variable display that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured so as not to fluctuate at the same time, but the variation display that becomes a big hit can be performed at the same time. When configured, the fluctuation display time that is the jackpot of the second special symbol is shorter than the first special symbol (for example, 5 seconds) or extremely short fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 second), and the first special The fluctuation time that becomes the jackpot of the symbol may be configured so that a fluctuation time longer than the second special symbol (for example, 60 seconds) or an extremely long fluctuation time (for example, 5 minutes) is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to postpone the jackpot with the second special symbol, which may determine the jackpot B, which is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, and in the meantime, the second special. A jackpot C can be given to the player by making a jackpot with a symbol. In this case, if a big hit is started with one special symbol, the lottery game that is changing in the other special symbol may be invalidated. With this configuration, the jackpot C, which is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, is given, and the probability variation game state ST3 is determined immediately after the probability variation game state ST3 is set, and the probability variation game state ST3 ends in a short period of time. Problems can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-described configuration in which the fluctuation display in which the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time, the hit / fail judgment result in the first special symbol is a deviation. By setting the display time long (for example, 100 seconds) and setting the fluctuation time of the hit / fail judgment result in the second special symbol to be short (for example, 1 second), the first special symbol can be used during the time-saving game. The number of times the lottery result is displayed can be reduced (the number of times the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner) can be reduced, and the number of times the lottery for the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player, can be increased. If the number of time reductions is until the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates 100 times, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is changed 100 times in succession due to the deviation of the second special symbol. The number of times the second special symbol is variablely displayed during the time-saving game can be effectively reduced by configuring the time longer than the time when the variable display is performed.

Returning to FIG. 13, the description of various counters will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the ordinary symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is the hit of the normal symbol when it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 15 (c)).

Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the sphere is the first normal symbol start port 67a (through gate) or the second normal symbol start port 67b (see FIG. 22). It is acquired when it is detected that it has passed through the through gate). The number of random number values to be won is 5 in the normal game state ST1, and the range is "5 to 9". Further, in the high-probability gaming state, it is 200, and the range is "5 to 204". That is, in the normal game state ST1, it is determined that the player has won when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-9", and in the high probability gaming state, the acquired second random number counter When the value of C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and the symbol "○" is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory is displayed. The left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b of the 632 are opened once for a predetermined time (1.2 s in the present embodiment) in the normal gaming state ST1, and in the high probability gaming state, the predetermined time (this implementation). In the embodiment, the opening operation of 1s) is performed twice. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 41).

When the game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not displayed, and each counter based on the hold ball is stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c. When the value is not stored, the random number value is acquired from the second hit random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is variablely displayed or the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the number of times of holding (normal symbol holding 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the second random number counter C4. When a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to on, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on the random value is stopped or the hold is exhausted. If the data is shifted to the previous hold area, it is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the newly shifted and stored holding area is set to on. Judgment as to whether or not data is stored in the hold area or whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is executed depending on which hold area or whether or not the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

In the present embodiment, the lottery between the first lottery game and the second lottery game is configured to select various common counter values, but the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery By setting various counters dedicated to each game (second special symbol) and changing the update triggers and initial values of various counters between the first lottery game and the second lottery game, they are updated with different values. Of course, it may be composed of the counter values to be generated.

By configuring in this way, in the lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter values are acquired at the same opportunity, the counter values of different values can be acquired. It is possible to suppress a variation pattern selected between the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, and a problem that the result of determining whether or not the result is synchronized.

In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are selected from the common fluctuation pattern table, the trouble that the selected fluctuation patterns are synchronized is suppressed, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, the stored data in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (a RAM having a small storage area or the like is used) can be obtained.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 44) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 43) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e. , Ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability change flag 203g, probability change setting flag 203h, probability change passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203o, probability change effective flag 203p, discharge number counter 203s, time saving medium counter 203t, jackpot flag 203u, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, look-ahead hold ball storage area 203x, small hit flag 203y, time saving flag 203a2, other memory It has at least area 203z.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning a prize in the first starting port 630 up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). is there. Further, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the game ball winning the second starting port 640 up to the upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment). It is a storage area for.

The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops the variable display, the first special symbol is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the storage area. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. For details, see the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). (Not shown) is the same.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) are started. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) with the detection of winning is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the counter buffers of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. The value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting port 640, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer as in the case of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the corresponding values are obtained. Each area (not shown) is similarly stored.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, the MPU 201 executes the above-mentioned first process such as a jackpot lottery and a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Corresponds to one start prize among the data (counters C1 to C2, CS1 values) stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. The data is shifted to the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. In addition, the shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) when the start winning of the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b is detected. It is a storage area to be stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), The value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Set the normal symbol flag (not shown) to on and store (store) it. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that data (counter C4 value, normal symbol flag (not shown)) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. have. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing (starting prize) to the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b is digested in the holding area where the data is empty. The reserved areas are stored in order from the earliest reserved area.

In addition, when it is detected that the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning prize, each counter value is stored and the winning lottery of the normal symbol is performed. It is a memory for storing data (value of counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes a winning lottery, a display setting of the second symbol display device 83 or the second symbol display device 88, and the like. In addition, among the data corresponding to each start winning prize (value of the random number counter C4 per second) stored in the above-mentioned normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data corresponding to one start winning is reserved for this normal symbol. Shift to the ball execution area (not shown). In addition, the shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are the first start detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning of the mouth 630 or the second starting port 640, the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined. Each is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process (FIG. 44, S1514) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is the first special symbol reserved based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631. When the counter value is stored in the ball storage area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1. Is.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is a counter value in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 640. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol hold ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

In the MPU 201, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) are respectively. When stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is stored in the first special symbol change start processing (figure). 23, S203) or the second special symbol change start processing (FIG. 23, S206), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the change pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variation display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed (hereinafter referred to as “starting prize”), the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the second symbol display device 83 and the second symbol of the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display effect performed by the display device 88 up to 4 times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process (FIG. 44, S1514) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed (see FIGS. 41 and S1205).

The normal symbol flag (not shown) is a flag indicating that the data of the random number counter C4 per second is stored and is held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. is there. When the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, it is set to ON. Further, when the value of the second counter C4 is shifted to the next hold area (the hold area corresponding to the hold number in which the hold is exhausted and the hold number is reduced by one), the hold area before the shift is performed. The normal symbol flag (not shown) of is set to off, while the normal symbol flag (not shown) of the shifted and stored holding area is set to on. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is processed to stop the fluctuation, the normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to off.

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3). When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the game state is in a high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3), and when it is off, it indicates a low probability game state (including the time saving game state ST1h). ). In the present embodiment, when the probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to on at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (see S11682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started. In the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power outage occurs, the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3) after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3) is determined by the probability-changing switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. It is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is set to off based on the on. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

If the probability change setting flag is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch 65e3 has passed, the probability change setting flag 203h May be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 has been passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability change passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by determining fraud such that only the probability change setting flag 203h is turned on and the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. it can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this embodiment). It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the total of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation pass counter 203i is incremented and updated by 1 when passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1681 in FIG. 50). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1711 in FIG. 51). The probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, the game ball is added and updated one by one (S1673 in FIG. 50). .. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (total value of the discharge number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set to be on (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, in jackpot A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to on for 5 seconds based on the start of 14 rounds, and in jackpot B and jackpot E, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to 0.5 based on the start of 14 rounds. Set to on for seconds. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of 14 rounds in the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the jackpot B (S1642 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, in the process of S1679 of the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted and updated one by one. Further, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning of the probability change switch 65e3 according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in the present embodiment, a voice saying "look at the liquid crystal") for attracting the attention of the player. In the present embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 balls are won in the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). The notification counter 203m is decremented and updated one by one by the processing of S1664 of the notification processing (FIG. 49, S1631) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. When this command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the process for outputting the above-mentioned voice.

With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the 14th round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can use the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Gaze at 81. Here, in the thirteenth round of the jackpot game, the character of a girl is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the character "attention", which is a notification prompting the player to see the third symbol display device 81, is displayed. It is displayed. In the 14th round, the flow path solenoid 65k is activated, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the type of jackpot being executed will be determined. In order to keep the player expecting that the probabilistic game state ST3 is given until the end of the jackpot game, the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6A) is made difficult for the player to see. Notification effect is being executed. However, when the 13th round is completed, the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so during the interval period, the player is notified by voice to watch the third symbol display device 81. The notification effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, the player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display content, and the player's attention can be distracted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In the present embodiment, the player is configured to distract the player's attention from the switching member 65h by notifying the player to show the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable prize is won before the start of the 14th round. By notifying the device 65 so as to hold the player's hand over it, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Further, the device is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured to distract the player's attention by notifying the player to see the decorative lamp 34 or the like. Further, during the 13th round, the player may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like and giving a notification prompting the player to read it with a mobile phone. In the present embodiment, the maximum time (5 seconds from the start of 14 rounds) until the operation of the switching member 65h is completed is set as the effect of distracting attention. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the jackpot A, the jackpot C, the jackpot D, the jackpot B, and the jackpot E are determined by the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one (see S1632 in FIG. 50). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter of.

The remaining ball timer 203o is the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one round set in advance is completed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o. Is set as. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o (3 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected pieces match (3 seconds). S1707 of FIG. 51). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the 14th round, the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual one, and the jackpot B and the jackpot E are reached. Even so, it is possible to suppress fraudulent passage of the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3.

If the number of winnings and the number of discharged items do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probabilistic gaming state ST3 from being illegally given.

The probability change effective flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability change effective flag 203p is set to ON, the game ball flowing into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is the probability change switch 65e3 based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON. It shows that it is less than the time required to pass through. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The probability change effective timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability change effective flag 203p is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability change effective timer 203r, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability change effective timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability change switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to be passed.

As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not illegally guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the ball is allowed to enter the special discharge port 65e2 and the game ball is passed through the probability change switch 65h, or the game is played with a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65h. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up a ball to pass it or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect it as passing by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S1711 in FIG. 51).

The time saving medium counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of changes of the remaining special symbols in the time saving gaming state ST1h. At this time, the time reduction / medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, if the probabilistic game state ST3 is not set after the jackpot game, the game shifts to the time-saving game state ST1h 100 times.

The jackpot flag 203u indicates that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on winning the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640 is a hit at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag that is set to on when it is determined. In addition, it is set to off when the jackpot game is completed. In addition, it is composed of a flag that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the jackpot. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, and "10" sets the jackpot flag 203u on for the first special symbol, and "01" sets the jackpot flag 203u for the second special symbol. At "00", the jackpot flag 203u is set as off.

Here, since the jackpot flag 203u is commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to be on at the start of fluctuation. If so, even if the other lottery result is a big hit, the big hit flag 203u is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same manner as a loss. As a result, it is possible to process the first special symbol and the second special symbol so that the variable display that becomes a big hit is not executed at the same time.

That is, when the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit is started in one of the special symbols, the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit is not started in the other, and only the deviation mode is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured, but the present invention is not limited to this, and independent jackpot flags are set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to execute the variable display that becomes a big hit at the same time. With such a configuration, even if the fluctuation display of the jackpot B and the jackpot E is started in the first special symbol during the probability variation game state ST3, the fluctuation time is set long and the second special By configuring the symbols to be easily drawn in a short fluctuation time, it is possible to easily configure the second special symbol to win the jackpot before the jackpot B starts. Therefore, the effect of notifying the player of the time until the jackpot B starts (that is, the period until the probability variation game state ST3 ends) is executed, and the player is hurriedly hit the jackpot with the second special symbol. You can perform a production that lets you play a game in an attempt to win. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is a flag indicating that the jackpot game of the second special symbol is started to be executed while the first special symbol is variablely displayed. It is set to ON in S1004 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 36, S207) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Further, it is set to off in the process of S611 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204).

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variablely displayed. It is set to ON in S605 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S204) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Further, it is set to off in the process of S1011 in the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 36, S207).

The look-ahead hold storage area 203x stores determination information such as a hit / fail judgment result, a jackpot type, and a variation type for the hold ball stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. It is a storage area to be stored.

The small hit flag 203y is a flag indicating that the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. This small hit flag is configured to be able to identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the small hit. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as not to be a small hit at the same time (if one is a small hit, the other is a miss). Therefore, the small hit flag 203y does not have a value indicating that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are small hits.

The time saving flag 203a2 is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol (electric support state, high probability gaming state of the normal symbol). If the value of the time saving flag 203a2 is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state (electric support state) of the special symbol, and if the value of the time saving flag 203a2 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol. Indicates a state (a low-probability state of a normal symbol). The initial value of the time saving flag 203a2 is set to off, and is set to on at the end of the jackpot type jackpot game with electric support in the ending process (see FIG. 48) executed at the end of the jackpot game. (See S1655 in FIG. 48). Then, in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 41), it is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving (electric support) state (see S1208 and S1214 in FIG. 41), and the next jackpot game is started. (S607 in FIG. 29, S1007 in FIG. 36), or when the number of lottery of special symbols in the time saving (electric support) state reaches a predetermined number (see S628 in FIG. 30), it is set to off.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description continues. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a, and an electric accessory. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving the above is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is connected. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variable display effect (a variable display effect). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a vibration sensor 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it displays in the order of winning displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The voice output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed so that the reserved symbol display being displayed is rearranged and displayed in the variable display start order.

A vibration sensor (not shown) is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since winning a prize at the starting port is an important factor for determining the game state, it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration to prevent the winning hole from being intentionally won. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 has been vibrated by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113>
Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. At least the variation pattern selection table 222a is set in the ROM 222.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the detailed contents of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a has a plurality of types of fluctuation contents (for example, fluctuations) corresponding to the fluctuation time and the rough fluctuation pattern (reach, non-reach, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110. One variation content is determined from the reach variation patterns of different display contents of reach A to D, which are composed of the same time and the same determination result.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (b). FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f. , Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, effect counter 223j, slave state setting area 223k, and other memory area 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. More specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The prize information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and each of these areas has. Stores the winning information respectively. From the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (variation) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. (Display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631, or in the main control device 110, in a special symbol. When the fluctuation display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. , Special symbol 1 Stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b, and holds the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223b, a display reservation ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is based on a reserved ball number command in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main controller 110 to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Since it is different only in that it is memorized, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, selecting an addition time from the addition time selection table 222b, and the like. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. It should be noted that each time the main process is executed, one is added and updated.

In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main control device 110 is set. The current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223h. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3). It has a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided with. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

In the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) is pressed when the power is turned on (power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)). In this case, it is a circuit for outputting the RAM erasing signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects the winning of a special symbol or a normal symbol, and executes control processing such as various lottery such as selection of a winning or fluctuating pattern for the winning. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably control the pachinko machine 10, the lottery for whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is sub-controlled as in the present embodiment. The control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced by performing the operation by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device.

The control board of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 is covered with a box (box) composed of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member called a board box. The substrate box is crimped by a member for preventing fraud called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted to each other, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (or By doing so, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member unless there is a method that leaves an opening mark, such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. There is.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the model having exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

In the following, the MPU 231 and the ROM 234 and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. Further, the ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 at any time, and controls the display of the third symbol display device 81.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured to enable variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, among the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the 7-segment LED on the left side executes the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol, and the 7 on the right side. In the segment LED, the variation display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 51. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) of the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b is executed. The through-gate passage process associated with the passage of the sphere in is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) and the through gate passage processing (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, a special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 23, S104) makes various determinations and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and displays the determined variation by predetermined control. In the embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously control the variable display, or control the stop display in the display mode showing the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 23, S104) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 23, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). When it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display elapses, the processing of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Will be done. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), the second special symbol is variable-stopped with a symbol indicating a big hit (or small hit), and the big hit game (or small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed. In this case, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol during the variable display is executed. When the second special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the variation display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the variation display (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start processing is executed (S203). In the first special symbol change start processing (S203), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a, the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection based on the hold data The process is executed. Further, in the first special symbol change start processing (S203), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. As a result, during execution of the variation display based on the big hit (or small hit) of the first special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol is controlled to be an out-of-order variation display. The first special symbol change start processing (S203) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. When the second special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), if the fluctuation of the first special symbol being displayed is interrupted (temporarily stopped), it is interrupted (temporarily stopped). It may be configured to perform the process of restarting the variable display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped).

After the first special symbol variation start process (S203) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is in the variation display (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variation display (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing (S207) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) will be described in detail later, but similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed. , The process of stopping the variable display is executed with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped fluctuating with a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit) and the big hit game (or small hit game) of the first lottery game is executed, the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is changed. The process of forcibly stopping is executed. When the first special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the variation display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). The details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in the variation display (S205: No), the second special symbol variation start processing is executed (S206). In the second special symbol change start process (S206), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold ball number storage area 203b, the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection based on the hold data The process is executed. Further, in the second special symbol change start processing (S206), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. As a result, during the execution of the variation display based on the big hit (or small hit) of the second special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is controlled to be an out-of-order variation display. The second special symbol change start processing (S206) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 31 to 35. When the first special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), if the fluctuation of the second special symbol being displayed is interrupted (temporarily stopped), it is interrupted (temporarily stopped). It may be configured to perform the process of restarting the variable display of the second special symbol that has been temporarily stopped).

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S203).

In the first special symbol change start processing (FIG. 24, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S303). .. A process is performed in which the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S305). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 24, S305) will be described in detail later, but based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Based on the set game state, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306) will be described in detail later, but the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S203), will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state ST3 (during probabilistic change) (S402). Whether or not the game state is the probability change game state ST3 is determined by whether or not the probability change flag 203g is set to ON. When it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (that is, the game state is the probability change game state ST3 (during probability change)) (S402: Yes), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) is displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for high probability, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (not during probability variation)) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a (FIG. 15A). Based on (see), it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for low probability, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

When the processing of S403 or S404 is completed, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on (S405). Here, when the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is set to ON, it indicates that the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit is started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, by using the jackpot flag 203u (and the small hit flag 203y) in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can simultaneously receive a jackpot. It is configured so that the fluctuation is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that big hits (or small hits) are continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the amusement store side becomes excessively large. If the second special symbol has started to be a big hit or a small hit, the first special symbol is selected without drawing the first special symbol (skipping the processing from S402 to S404). The variation display based on the deviation (Special Figure 1 deviation variation processing (S410)) may be executed. As a result, the lottery process (processes S402 to S404) can be skipped, so that the processing load can be reduced.

In S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off, that is, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit has not been started in the second special symbol (S405: No). ), It is determined whether the lottery result executed in the process of S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S406: Yes), the big hit flag 203u is set to on for the first special symbol (S407). After that, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery result) is set as a jackpot (S408), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set as the value of the jackpot type counter C1. It is set based on the game state (S409). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y for the second special symbol is on (S405: Yes), or in the processing of S406, it is determined that the lottery result is out of order. In the case (S406: No), the special figure 1 deviation processing is executed (S410). The special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S410) will be described with reference to FIG. 26, but the setting of the deviation symbol when the lottery result of the first special symbol is deviation is executed.

In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the first random number C1 actually acquired is a big hit, the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is already set to on, that is, the first 2 When a fluctuation that becomes a big hit or a small hit is started by the special symbol, the setting that is forcibly removed is executed in the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuations that become big hits (or small hits) are not executed at the same time, and the big hits (or small hits) are continuously obtained in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress the problem that the fluctuation is started and the damage on the game store side becomes excessive. Further, since the big hit (or small hit) is executed simultaneously or continuously, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the fluctuation that becomes a big hit is not executed at the same time, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to be executed at the same time. In this case, a dedicated jackpot flag may be set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, when the jackpot game is executed with the other special symbol, the measurement of the fluctuation time is temporarily stopped for the fluctuation of one special symbol, and the special symbol is pseudo-variated. , It is conceivable to configure it to temporarily stop.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a special figure 1 deviation change process (S410), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 24, S203), will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 1 deviation processing (S410). In the special figure 1 deviation variation processing (FIG. 26, S410), first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on for the second special symbol (S412). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on (S412: Yes), the first special symbol display device 37 is set to the off symbol of the first special symbol (S416). After that, this process ends. In this way, when a big hit or a small hit is set in the second special symbol, the off symbol is forcibly set in the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to fluctuations that are big hits or small hits at the same time.

On the other hand, in the process of S411, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off for the second special symbol (S411: No), it is currently determined whether the lottery result is a small hit. The determination is made based on the game state of the above and the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) (S412). If it is determined that the hit is not a small hit in the process of S412 (S412: No), the lottery result is out of order, so the process of S416 is executed and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S412, when it is determined that it is a small hit (S412: Yes), the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S413). The lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a small hit (S414), and the small hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S415). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203u is set to ON in the process of S407 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 25).

When it is determined in the process of S501 that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the current gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, latent probability changing gaming state ST2, probability changing gaming state ST3, The variation pattern selection table 202e according to any of the time-saving game states ST1h) is set (S502). The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 16A to 16C) corresponding to the set gaming state and the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2. (S503). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern selection table 203e set in the process of S502 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S504). A special figure 1 variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S504 (S505). After that, the process of S507 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the jackpot flag 203u for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the special figure 1 is out. The variation pattern selection process is executed (S506).

Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the special drawing 1 deviation pattern selection process (S506) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process (S506). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S506), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S511). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S511). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is on (S511: Yes), the small hit fluctuation pattern is set (S512). In the case of a small hit, one type of fluctuation pattern is set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Specifically, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) is set. When the processing of S512 is completed, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating the small hit is set (S513). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is a miss) (S511: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. 17 and FIG. 18) are set (S514). From the set variation pattern selection table, the deviation pattern is selected based on the hit / fail determination result (disappearance) and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 (S515). The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected deviation pattern (S516). After that, this process ends.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 27. After executing the process of S505 or the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process (FIGS. 28, S506), the process of S507 is executed. In the process of S507, a state command indicating the current gaming state is set (S507). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 22, S104), will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S204), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601). In the process of S601, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: Yes), the jackpot flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is determined whether or not it is set to (S602). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (S602: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S603). Although not shown, when the process of S603 is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is turned on is set.

When the processing of S603 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (S604). Then, the start of the jackpot game based on the selected jackpot type is set (S605). After that, the time saving medium counter 203t is reset to the initial value 0 (S606), and the time saving flag 203a2 is set to off (S607). Next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S608). A process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S609), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: No), then whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is turned on. Determine (S610). If it is determined in the process of S610 that the fluctuation stop flag 203y of FIG. 1 is off (S610: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S610 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is on (S610 in FIG. 29), it means that the second special symbol is stopped by a big hit or a small hit. The processes of S611 and S612 are executed in order to stop the fluctuation based on the first special symbol. In the process of S611, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to off, and the process proceeds to the process of S612.

In S612, the special figure 1 disengagement stop process for displaying the first special symbol in a disengaged manner is executed. In the process of S602 described above, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is off for the special figure 1 (S602: No), similarly, the special figure for stopping and displaying the first special symbol in an out-of-order manner. 1 Disengagement stop processing is executed (S612). When the processing of S612 is completed, the main processing is completed.

In this way, in the first special symbol stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the variation display has elapsed (S601: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is used. The process of stopping the variation display (S603 to S609 or S612) is executed. Further, when the second special symbol is stopped fluctuating with a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit) and the big hit game (or small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed (S610: Yes), the fluctuation display is displayed. The process (S612) of forcibly stopping the first special symbol is executed. When the first special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit) (S610: Yes), the fluctuation of the second special symbol being displayed is interrupted (temporarily stopped). You may.

Here, with reference to FIG. 30, the special drawing 1 disengagement stop process (S612) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 1 disengagement stop process (S612). In the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S612), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S621). Special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S622). Then, a special 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (indicating that the special figure 2 is forcibly stopped fluctuating) is set (S623). The start of the small hit game is set (S624). After that, the process of S625 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S621, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is off for the first special symbol (S621: No), the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order, so S622. Skips the process of S624 and shifts to the process of S625. In the process of S625, it is determined whether or not the time saving / medium counter 203t is a value larger than 0 (S625). In the process of S625, when it is determined that the time saving medium counter 203t is larger than 0 (S625: Yes), the time saving medium counter 203t is subtracted by 1 and updated (S626), and the time saving medium counter 203t after the subtraction is 0. It is determined whether or not it is (S627). In the process of S627, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S627: Yes), it means that the time saving game state ST1h ends. Therefore, the time saving flag 203a2 is set to off (S628). The process proceeds to S629.

On the other hand, in the processing of S627, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203t after subtraction is not 0 (greater than 0) (S627; No), the time saving gaming state ST1h continues, so the processing of S628 is performed. The process is skipped and the process proceeds to S629.

In the process of S629, the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S629). A process of stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed) on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S630). After that, this process is executed. Here, after returning to FIG. 29 and executing the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S608), this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time, but when the first special symbol is changed and stopped by the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit, the second special symbol is displayed. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to on so as to execute the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol. On the other hand, as will be described later, when the second special symbol is stopped to fluctuate due to the lottery result of a big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol is stopped by setting the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v to ON. It is forcibly executed. As a result, simultaneous fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be efficiently executed.

In addition, if one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has already started a fluctuation that becomes a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly removed as a result of determining whether or not it is wrong. The variable display is started. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the continuous forced execution of big hits and small hits, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the gambling becomes too high.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S206).

In the second special symbol change start process (FIG. 31, S206), the number of first special symbol hold balls in each process from S301 to S306 is compared with the above-mentioned first special symbol change start process (FIGS. 24 and S203). The counter 203d, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306) In each process from S701 to S706, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process. (S705) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) are the same except that they are changed, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705).

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 32, S705) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305) in the following points. In the processing of S801 corresponding to the processing of S401, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and in the processing of S408. In the corresponding processing of S808, the special figure 1 (first special symbol) is changed to the special drawing 2 (second special symbol), and in the processing of S809 and S810 corresponding to the processing of S409 and S410, the first They differ in that the special symbol is changed to the second special symbol. Since the other points are the same, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S810 and FIG. 33 in FIG. 32) executed in the second special symbol jackpot discrimination process (see FIG. 32) is also the above-mentioned special figure 1 deviation variation processing (see FIG. 26). Since the same processing as in the above is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 34, S706) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306) in the following points. In the process of S901 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S506 to S507. In each process of S906 to S907 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) differs from the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIGS. 29, S204) described above in the following points. In the process of S1002 corresponding to the process of S602, "for special figure 1" is changed to "for special figure 2", and in the process of S1003 corresponding to the process of S603, special figure 2 The point that the variable stop flag is changed to the special figure 1 variable stop flag, the point that the special figure 1 stop type command is changed to the special figure 2 stop type command in the processing of S1004 corresponding to the processing of S604, and S609 and In the processing of S1009 and S1010 corresponding to the processing of S610, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag, and in the processing of S1011 corresponding to S611, the special figure 1 deviation stop processing is special. FIG. 2 is different in that it is changed to the off-stop processing. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1011, FIG. 37 in FIG. 36) executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 36) is also the above-mentioned special figure 1 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 30). Since the same processing as in the above is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously variablely displayed. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

In this embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a stop display for a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can know that you haven't done so, and you can play the jackpot game with confidence.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) determines whether the game ball has won a prize in any of the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640, and if a winning ball is won, it is held. Up to the maximum number (up to 4 for each of the 1st start port 630, the right 1st start port 631, and the 2nd start port 640), each of the acquired counter values is set to the 1st special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the 2nd special symbol. This is a process of storing each in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a Alternatively, a process of predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described.

In the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 which is the first starting port (S1101). Here, winning a prize in the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 (there was a starting prize) (S1101: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set. Acquired (S1102). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103). It is determined whether this is less than four, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved pieces for the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 (that is, whether the number of reserved pieces is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1104). A hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of hold balls is set (S1105). Each value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 which are various counter values is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203a of the RAM 203 is read. Each is held (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls (S1106).

Next, the first look-ahead process is executed (S1107). The first look-ahead process (S1107) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 39, but the hit / fail determination result and the fluctuation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a , The process of determining the stop type, etc. is executed.

Next, with respect to each process from S1108 to S1114, the winning of the game ball to the first start port (first start port 630 and right first start port 631) executed in each process from S110 to S1107. Since the same process as the process performed in the above process is different only in that the process is executed for the second starting port 640, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the first look-ahead process (S1107), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first look-ahead process (S1107).

In the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 39, S1107), first, various counter values are obtained from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a, that is, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2. , Each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read out (S1121). The read data is stored in the area with the smallest winning order among the vacant storage areas of the look-ahead hold storage area 203x (S1122).

The hit / fail determination result is determined based on the data stored in the read-ahead hold storage area 203x. It should be noted that the hit / fail judgment result determined here is determined in the case of winning in the normal game state ST1. Since the fluctuation time is variably set according to the number of holdings, the timing at which the fluctuation starts cannot be determined between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that it is not possible to accurately determine the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, the hit / fail determination result can be accurately determined only when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 which has the same jackpot determination value in both the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state is "7". Therefore, in the process of S1123, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a hit during the normal game state ST1.

In the process of S1123, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S1123: Yes), the first special symbol is a big hit, and the first winning command indicating the big hit type is set. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1123 that the winning / failing determination result is incorrect (S1123: No), the first winning command indicating that the pre-reading lottery result of the first special symbol is incorrect is set (S1125). .. After that, this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port (first starting port 630 or right first starting port 631) and is newly held and stored, the information held and stored is used. Based on this, the hit / fail determination result is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the display mode of the hold ball can be changed (for example, the color of the hold ball can be changed to a different color from the usual one) based on the hold-stored hit / fail judgment result, or before the fluctuation starts. It is possible to display a notice symbol or the like to perform an effect of suggesting a winning / failing judgment result to the player.

In the present embodiment, in the case of pre-reading, the hit / fail determination is determined as the normal game state ST1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state at the start of the fluctuation is accurately determined, and the hit / fail determination is made based on the game state. It may be configured to run. In this case, the selection of the fluctuation pattern is not variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by configuring so that a constant fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the fluctuation order until the reserved ball starts to fluctuate based on the information stored on hold.

Next, the second look-ahead process (S1114), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this second look-ahead process (S1114).

The second look-ahead process (FIG. 40, S1114) is based on the above-mentioned first look-ahead process (FIG. 39, S1107) winning a prize in the first start port (first start port 630 or right first start port 631). In contrast to the process of pre-reading the hold data in advance and making various judgments, the process is to pre-read the hold data based on winning the second start port 640 and perform various judgments. Since the same processing is executed only for differences, detailed description will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed at the same time. When a variable display that becomes a big hit or a small hit is executed in one special symbol, the variable display that is out of order is forcibly executed in the other special symbol. Therefore, in the first look-ahead process or the second look-ahead process described above, when the lottery result is read ahead, it may be configured to determine whether or not the lottery result is forcibly deviated. In this way, for example, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is pre-read, the period (time) during which the dynamic display of the pre-read lottery result is executed is calculated. Then, it may be determined whether or not the fluctuation that becomes the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol is executed during the period when the dynamic display is executed. If the lottery result is out of order, it will be out of order regardless of the execution state of the second special symbol, so it may not be determined. As a result, the processing load due to the above-mentioned determination can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display mounting unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 632, and the like.

In this ordinary symbol variation processing (FIG. 41, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting the ordinary symbol (second symbol). (S1201). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the period from the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83 to the middle of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 632. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S1201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S1202). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S1202: Yes). S1222). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S1220 and the processing of S1221, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display mounting unit 88.

In the process of S1222, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1222: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1222, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be variablely displayed has elapsed (S1222: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1223). .. In the process of S1223, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S1213, the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode at the time of the miss is set by the process of S1218, the "x" symbol is displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S1223, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S1213 and the process of S1218. 2 A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S1224). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1224: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 632 is set (S1225). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out of order (S1224: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1202: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired. (S1203).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S1204). If it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S1204: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S1205).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). In the process of S1206, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1207).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203a2 is on, that is, whether or not the time saving gaming state ST1h or the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set (S1208). When it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is off in the processing of S1208 (S1208: No), based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) for the low probability time, The hit / fail determination result is acquired (S1211). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is on (S1208: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1209). If it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1209: Yes), the process of S1211 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1209: No), the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c (FIG. 15 (c)) for high probability. The hit / fail determination result is acquired based on (S1210).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1212). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a hit (that is, it is a miss) (S1212: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of the miss is set. (S1218). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is determined to be a hit (that is, a win) (S1212: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode at the time of hit, is displayed. It is set (S1213).

It is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203a2 is on, that is, whether or not the time saving game state ST1h or the probability variation game state ST3 is set (S1214). If it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is off in the processing of S1214 (S1214: No), the processing of S1217 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is on (S1214: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1215). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot, the process of S1216 is executed.

In the process of S1216, the opening time of the guiding members (left guiding member 632a and right guiding member 632b) of the electric accessory 632 is set to 1 s and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1216). On the other hand, in the processing of S1215, when it is determined that the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (that is, it is in a low probability gaming state) (S1215: Yes), the electric accessory 632 The blade opening time is set to 0.2 s and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1217).

It is determined whether the gaming state is during the time-saving gaming state ST1h (including the probabilistic gaming state ST3) (S1219). When it is determined that the time is shortened (S1219: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is acquired by the value of the normal diagram fluctuation type counter CS2, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (figure). The fluctuation time is determined from (see 19) (S1220). After that, this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal map is determined from the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 19) based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2. As shown in FIG. 19, in the normal figure variation pattern selection table 202f, a variation pattern of a normal symbol is set corresponding to each gaming state. Except for the probabilistic game state ST3 (probability change: with electric support), there is only one type of fluctuation pattern, and the same fluctuation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected normal map fluctuation type counter CS2. On the other hand, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state ST3, the determination value "0 to 190" determines the fluctuation time of 3000 ms, and the determination value "191 to 198" determines the fluctuation time of 30,000 ms.

As a result, in the probabilistic gaming state ST3, a longer fluctuation time than in other cases is selected with a probability of 8/199. If this long fluctuation time is selected, the electric accessory 632 will not be operated until the fluctuation time elapses. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the second starting port 640 is arranged below the electric accessory 632, and when the electric accessory 632 operates, the left guiding member 632a can win a prize in the second starting port 640. The flow path is blocked. Therefore, in the meantime, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 640 is regulated.

Here, as described above, if a long fluctuation time (30000 ms) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 632 does not operate during that time, so that the game is hit right during that time. About 85% of the balls will win the second starting port 640. Therefore, by selecting a long fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the probability variation game state ST3, the number of winnings to the second starting port 640 can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 16C, during the probabilistic gaming state ST3, the jackpot D is always selected when the second special symbol hits, which is more advantageous than the jackpot with the first special symbol. Is selected. Therefore, in the probabilistic gaming state ST3, the lottery with the second special symbol can be more advantageous to the player when the big hit is obtained than the lottery with the first special symbol. Therefore, by increasing the winning of the second starting port 640 during the probabilistic gaming state ST3, it is possible to give the player an advantageous period.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and determines whether the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. , This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 when the game ball has passed.

In the through-gate passage process (FIG. 42, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301). Here, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal gaming state (S1302). .. In the process of S1302, if it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state (S1302: Yes), it means that the right-handed game is executed even though the gaming state is the normal gaming state. The indicated notification command is set, and the process proceeds to S1304. If a notification command indicating a firing abnormality is set, this process may be terminated as it is, and the lottery for normal symbols may not be performed.

On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the normal gaming state (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1304. In the process of S1304, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S1304). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1305).

Whether the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: No), or the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. Even if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S1305: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1305). : Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S1306). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the free hold areas (normal symbol hold 1 to normal symbol hold 4) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203f of the RAM 203. Store in the area (S1307). In the process of S1307, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203 g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol hold 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of normal symbol hold 2 is set, if the value is 2, the area of normal symbol hold 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the area of normal symbol hold 4 is set first. Area.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1401) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 44), first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1501). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1502). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1503).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1504), and if it is turned on (S1504: Yes), the process shifts to S1512. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1504: No), it is further determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505), and if it is not stored. (S1505: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1512 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1506), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1507: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1512 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 are correctly saved.

In the process of S1512, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1512). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1513, S1514) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1513, S1514) is executed.

Further, the initialization process (S1513, S1514) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1513, S1514), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1513), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1514). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1510.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1504: No), the power outage occurrence information is stored (S1505: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is stored. If it is normal (S1507: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1508). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1509), and the process proceeds to S1510. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1510). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1511). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (S1600) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1600). In this main process (S1600), the counter update process and the power off time process are roughly classified.

In the main processing (FIG. 45, S1600), first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is input to each of the sub sides. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603) and executed. After the process of S1253 is executed, the probability variation setting process is executed (S1254). This probability variation setting process (S1254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but when the jackpot A or jackpot C is executed, the game ball enters the second specific entry port (not shown). When it is determined whether or not the ball has been hit and the ball is entered, a process of setting the data indicating that the game state after the big hit game is set in the probability change game state ST3 is executed in the state setting area after the big hit.

When the probability change setting process (S1254) is executed, the jackpot control process is executed (S1255). The jackpot control process (S1255) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43, but a process of setting the operation of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the jackpot game process (S1255) is executed, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S1256). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S1256), the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 632 is executed. After that, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1257).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1258). Briefly, on condition that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is used. The second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessory 632 is released for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1260). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1260: Yes), the process is shifted to S1251 and each process after S1251 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1260: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1261, S1262).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1261). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1252 (S1262).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1251 to S1258 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1256, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S1263 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1263), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1264). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1265), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1266), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1259 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1251 to S1258, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1261 and S1262 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1251. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1251 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1301) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1251 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (FIG. 45, S1600), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) of is executed (S1601). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 23) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 38) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 46) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1604). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 632 attached to the right first starting port 630 is executed (S1605). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1225 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S1216, the processing of S1217, and the processing of S1220 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1606). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), it corresponds to the variation pattern. The variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31) ends. , The variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 65). ) Is stopped and displayed (lit) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1607). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1220 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1223 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S1212 or the process of S1223 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41). ).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1609). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1609: Yes), the process is shifted to S1601, and each process after S1601 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1609: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1610, S1611).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1610). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1602 (S1611).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1601 to S1607 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1608, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 43 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S1612 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1612), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1613). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1614), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1615), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1608 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1601 to S1607, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1610 and S1611 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1601. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1601 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1501) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1601 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1604) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1604). This jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 45), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a jackpot or a small hit of a special symbol is started (S1621). Specifically, S606 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 29), S1006 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 36), or S624 of the special figure 1 deviation stop processing (see FIG. 30). If the process of S1024 of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 37) is executed and the start of the big hit or small hit of the special symbol is set, the big hit or small hit of the special symbol is started. judge. In the process of S1621, when a big hit or a small hit of a special symbol is started (S1621: Yes), an opening command is set (S1622), and this process is terminated.

The opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) and transmitted according to the game state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated regularly (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the jackpot or small hit of the special symbol is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpot A and 5000 for jackpot B). If this happens, the opening command should be sent. By doing so, for example, in the case of a big hit in a left-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is lengthened, and in the case of a big hit in the right-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is increased. Can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during the left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to the right-handed game as the big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, it is possible to secure a sufficient time to switch to a right-handed game (big hit game). As a result, the operational burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S1621, when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S1621: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is in the big hit or the small hit (S1623). As for the big hit or small hit of the special symbol, it is said that the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). , During the predetermined time after the jackpot game of the special symbol is completed. In the process of S1623, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1623: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is a big hit or a small hit of a special symbol, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1624). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1624: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1625). The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1625) will be described with reference to FIG. 47, but the open setting to the variable winning device 65 and the probabilistic solenoid in each round corresponding to the jackpot type is executed.

The jackpot operation setting process (S1625), which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 46, S1604), will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1625). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 47, S1625), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is set is read (S1641). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S1641 (S1642). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 4) of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1641. After that, this process ends.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, in the case of the small hit game, the operation of the probabilistic solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 is set. The small hit is composed of two rounds, and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for one second in each round.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S1624, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1624: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability solenoid) 65k (S1626). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1626: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1627). After that, the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1628). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1626, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1626: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1629). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball ejection time, has elapsed. To determine as. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1630). After that, this process ends.

Here, the details of this ending process (S1630) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 48, S1630). In the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S1651). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON (S1652). If it is determined in the process of S1652 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1652), the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (S1653), and the process proceeds to the process of S1654. Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to on.

In the process of S1654, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a type with electric support (big hit C) (S1654). In the process of S1654, if it is determined that the jackpot type is a type with electric support (S1654: Yes), the time saving flag 203a2 is set to ON (S1655), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1654, if it is determined that the jackpot type is not the type with electric support (big hit C) (S1654: No), the process of S1655 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

When it is determined in the process of S1652 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1652: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot E (S1656). If it is determined in the process of S1656 that the jackpot type is jackpot E (S1656: Yes), 100 is set in the time saving / medium counter 203t (S1657), the process of S1655 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1656, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot E, the processes of S1657 and S1655 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the probability change switch 65e3 and set the high probability game state. Therefore, it is possible to keep expecting the player to shift to the high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3) until the jackpot game is completed. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a high probability gaming state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is given after the jackpot game, so that even during the jackpot game The game can be played with an interest in whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1629 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: No), the notification process is executed (S1631). Here, the details of the notification process (S1631) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1631).

In the notification process (S1631), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1631). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1631: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 13th round (S1632). The end timing of the 13th round is determined depending on whether it is detected that 10 balls have been won or that 30 seconds have passed in the 13th round. When it is determined that the end timing of the 13th round is reached (S1632: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1632, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the 13th round (S1632: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting a 2-second counter in S1633, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball ejection time after the 13th round is completed, and the voice of looking at the liquid crystal is heard. It is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 14th round, but the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 13th round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is identified. It is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the probabilistic game state ST3 will be given until the end of the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203 m, the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the 14th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but the effect is not limited to this, and from the 13th round. It may be executed continuously.

On the other hand, in the process of S1221, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1661: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1664). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665: Yes), the notification command is set (S1666). After that, this process ends. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the setting of the voice output "Look at the liquid crystal".

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 49, S1631) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1632). Here, the winning process (S1632) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1632).

In the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1671). The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1671: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1671: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1672: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1673). After that, the process of S1674 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not passed (S1672: No), the process of S1674 is executed.

In the process of S1674, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674: Yes), the closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1676). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1677). After that, the process of S1678 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being ejected after the opening / closing door 203n is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1674, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1675). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1675: Yes), the process of S1676 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1675: No), the process of S1678 is executed.

In the process of S1678, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1678). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1678: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by -1 and updated (S1679). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1680). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S1680: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1681). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on (S1682). After that, the process of S1683 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1680, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1680: No), the process of S1683 is executed. In the process of S1683, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1683). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S1684). The probability variation valid flag 203p is set to on (S1685). After that, this process ends. Here, by setting the probability change effective flag 203p to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change game Can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1678, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1678: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203p is ON (S1686). If the probabilistic valid flag 203p is off (S1686: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation effective flag 203p is on (S1686: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation effective timer 203r to update (S1687). It is determined whether the value of the probabilistic valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S1688). When it is determined that the probability change effective timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1688: Yes), the probability change effective flag 203p is set to off (S1689). The probability variation effective timer 203r is reset to the initial value 0 (S1690). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1688, when it is determined that the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1688: No), the process of S1680 is executed.

As a result, if the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation game state ST3 can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for determining the validity, it is possible to prevent the probability change game state ST3 from being illegally passed through the probability change switch 65e3.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1633). After that, this process ends. Here, the details of this exception handling (S1633) will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1633). In the abnormality processing (S1633), a processing for monitoring whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality handling (FIG. 51, S1633), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1701). If it is outside the round validity period (S1701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1703). After that, the process of S1704 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702: No), the process of S1704 is executed.

In the process of S1704, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1704: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated (S1705) because it is in the period of the ball brushing time. The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1706). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1706: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1706: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the number of discharges counter 203s) and the number of prizes (the value of the number of prizes counter 203j) match. (S1707).

If it is determined that they match (S1707: Yes), the process of S1709 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1707: No), an error command is set (S1708). After that, the process of S1709 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 even if the jackpot is B.

In the process of S1709, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S1709), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to the initial value 0 (S1710). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to the initial values (S1711), and then this process ends.

<About the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 61, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S2116 (see FIG. 53) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see FIGS. 53 and S2113), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2116. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S2116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S2116 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S2116, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2116 is executed (see FIGS. 53 and S2115). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2116 is executed, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S2116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S2011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S2008 via the processes of S2004 to S2006 This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process is shifted to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

Note that the clearing process of S2009 is skipped because when the processing of S2008 is reached via the processing of S2004 to S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S2101 was executed (S2101), 1 millisecond. If the above has not passed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the process of S2101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S2102 to S2110 determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2111 and the variation display setting process of S2112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2101: Yes). S2102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S2105 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, and the setting is used as a command for the display control device. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). After that, the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After that, the command determination process (S2111) that performs the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2112. The details of this command determination process (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

In the process of S2112, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is generated by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

When the processing of S2112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2115), and the power-off process is executed (S2116). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S2117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to the process of S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2111). This command determination process (S2111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. The details of the command determination process (S2111) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the main control device 110 Further, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for variablely displaying the first special symbol. Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is executed in order to display the first special symbol in a variable manner (S2202). The special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55, but the setting required for variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Is executed.

Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2202), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (S2241), and the fluctuation pattern type is selected from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command. Extract (S2242). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiablely stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIGS. 61, S2112) described later. It is used when setting a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

When the process of S2242 is executed, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent probabilistic gaming state ST2 (gaming state without probabilistic transformation support) (S2243). When it is determined that the game state is other than the latent probability change game state ST2 (S2243: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the latent probability change game state is ST2 (S2243: Yes), the lottery result of the change of the first special symbol that starts to change is a change of jackpot E (15R normal jackpot: 100 times of electric support). (S2244). If it is determined that the fluctuation does not result in a jackpot E (S2244: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation is a jackpot E (S2244: Yes), the characters indicating the chance zone (see FIGS. 63A to 63B) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2245). ). After that, this process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player because the fluctuation time is set to be long, is set to be short. On the other hand, in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that was mainly executing the game is set to be long. As a result, when the player shifts to the latent probability change game state ST2, the player strikes right and plays the game so that the game ball wins the second special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to start changing at the same time. Here, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, in the second special symbol, a high probability game (probability variation) is always given when a big hit is made, but in the first special symbol, when a jackpot is reached, a normal probability game (low probability game) is given. Is configured to be awarded by lottery. Therefore, even if a jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot: no electric support) is given in the normal game state ST1 as a jackpot with the first special symbol, the fluctuation started with the first special symbol after the jackpot game is the jackpot E. Then, it will immediately shift to the normal game state ST1.

As described above, normally, after shifting to the latent probability variation game state ST2 in which the game is mainly performed by the second special symbol, the third symbol is displayed based on the start of the fluctuation of the jackpot E in the first special symbol. A chance zone (a notification mode indicating the time saving game state ST1h or the probability variation game state ST3) is displayed on the device 81. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the player displays the heaven zone (notification mode indicating that the latent probability changing game state ST2 is in the latent probability changing game state ST2) on the third symbol display device 81, and thereafter, the player has two big hit games. Recognizes that the high-probability gaming state (probability change) is maintained (highly likely) until is executed. However, in the chance zone, the player is not sure (high expectation) that the probabilistic game state ST3 will be granted even after the next big hit, and there is a possibility that the player is in the time-saving game state ST1h (low probability state). The game will be played while recognizing it.

Therefore, for example, if the player shifts to the latent probability change game state ST2 and the first change of the first special symbol is a big hit E, the heaven zone is normally displayed, but the chance zone is displayed. The Rukoto. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is discouraged in a short period of time.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the process of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2202) is executed, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2203). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner. Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2203: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) is executed. The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG. 56.

Here, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (S2301), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (S2301). S2302). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiablely stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIGS. 61, S2112) described later. It is used when setting a variation pattern command for displaying a second special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

When the process of S2302 is executed, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state ST3 (the gaming state with the probabilistic transformation support) (S2203). If the game state is other than the probabilistic game state ST3 (S2303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state ST3 (S2303: Yes), it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol that starts to fluctuate is a big hit (S2304). Here, the determination is executed by determining whether the variation pattern is a jackpot from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command.

In the process of S2304, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol that starts to fluctuate is a big hit (S2304: Yes), a treasure chest hit notice effect command is set for the display control device 114 (S2305). .. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail determination is incorrect, the treasure box detachment notice effect command is set for the display control device 114 (S2306).

Here, the treasure chest hit notice effect command is a command instructing the third symbol display device 81 to display the display mode shown in FIG. 10A. In the present embodiment, when the state shifts to the probabilistic gaming state ST3, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol is displayed. In the 2 display area Dn, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. Here, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed in the second display area Dn is the symbol of the treasure box, and the display mode shown in FIG. 9 (a) and the display mode shown in FIG. 9 (b). Is repeatedly displayed in a short cycle (for example, every 0.5 seconds), so that it can be displayed as if it is blinking.

Here, when the probability variation game state ST3 is set, the long deviation variation pattern C (18000000ms) is selected if the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol is incorrect. Therefore, the frequency at which the second special symbol starts to fluctuate becomes extremely low. However, if a small hit is won with the first special symbol, the change of the second special symbol that is changing is also forcibly stopped and displayed based on the stop of the change, and is newly stored after the small hit game. The fluctuation of the holding ball of the second special symbol is started. In this case, the player expects that the second special symbol, which is easier to select a jackpot that is more advantageous than the first special symbol, starts to change to become a jackpot.

When the second special symbol starts to change, as shown in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (b), the treasure box showing the change of the second special symbol is enlarged and displayed in the first display area Dm. .. On the other hand, the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn. After that, after the treasure box is displayed in a display mode that vibrates for about 2 seconds, if the treasure box opens and the winning / failing judgment result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. Character is displayed, and it is notified that the second special symbol has become a big hit. Then, a notification mode indicating that the probabilistic gaming state ST3 "continue chance!" Is continuously executed is displayed.

When the jackpot D is selected when the jackpot in the special figure 2 is reached in the probability variation game state ST3 (that is, when the probability variation game state ST2 is configured to shift to the latent probability variation game state ST2) It suffices to display the notification mode (for example, the characters "Entering the heaven zone!") Indicates that the game state ST2 is entered. In this case, it should be configured to display a notification mode instructing to stop the firing of the game ball, such as "Stop firing!". Here, in the probabilistic game state ST3, the game is mainly executed by the first special symbol, but in the latent probabilistic game state ST2, the game is mainly executed by the second special symbol. Is set to. Therefore, when the game ball enters the right first starting port 631 and the reserved ball of the first special symbol is memorized, it triggers a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, so stop firing. By instructing, the defect can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, as shown in FIG. 10A, the display that the treasure box is opened is executed as in the case where the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, and then the hit / fail is displayed from the inside of the treasure box. The characters "Sorry" indicating that the judgment result is incorrect are displayed. After that, when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the display mode is switched to the display modes shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, and the blinking display is executed until the fluctuation time set in the second special symbol elapses. Will be done.

As a result, the player pays attention to the second special symbol only for a certain period at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time. Can pay attention to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Therefore, the game becomes easy to understand, and the player can play the game comfortably.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), this process ends. When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2205). If it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S2205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S2206). This stop type command reception process (S2206) will be described with reference to FIG. 57.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type command reception process (S2206). In the stop type command reception process (S2206), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received according to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on. When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on. (S2311). The stop type (big hit A to big hit E, missed, missed reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S2312). The extracted stop type is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is of the second special symbol. Each is identifiable as a stop type.

It is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (S2313). If the gaming state is a gaming state other than the normal gaming state ST1, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (S2313: Yes), it is determined whether the stop type is jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot: no electric support) (S2314). If it is determined that the stop type is other than the jackpot A (S2314: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type is jackpot A (S2314: Yes), the area with the earliest digestion order of the hold 1 (first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a) of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The hit / fail determination result of the reserved ball stored in) is determined to be a jackpot E (15 rounds normal jackpot: 100 electric support) (S2315). Here, the jackpot random value of the corresponding reserved ball notified by the winning command is read from the winning information storage area 223b and determined. Although not shown, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a first random number table 202a (FIG. 15A) and a jackpot type selection table 202d (FIG. 15) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. 16 (a) to (c)) are stored, and based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type counter C2 given to the winning command output from the main control device 110. The sound lamp control device 113 can determine the result of the hit / miss determination in the probability change state.

In the process of S2315, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is a determination result other than the jackpot E (S2315: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is the jackpot E (S2315: Yes), the characters "Chance zone entry" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the ending of the jackpot game. A display command to be instructed is set for the display control device 114 (S2316). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is not the jackpot E (S2315: No), as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the heaven zone (latent probability variation game state ST2) is entered at the ending of the jackpot game. A display command for displaying the characters "Entering the heaven zone !!" indicating the transition to the third symbol display device 81 is output to the display control device 114 (S2317). After that, this process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is entered, the probability variation game is likely to be continuously set until the jackpot game is executed at least twice. Therefore, the player can recognize that at least two jackpots have been promised when the characters of the heaven zone are displayed. In addition, since it is configured to be displayed at the ending, which is the end of the jackpot game, the player can play until the end of the jackpot game with the expectation of transition to the latent probability change game state ST2, improving the interest of the game. it can.

Further, even if the jackpot A is won in the normal game state ST1, if it is determined that the jackpot E is won in the latent probability variation game state ST2 in the hold 1 of the first special symbol, in the ending of the jackpot A, the time saving game state ST1h or Since the characters "Chance zone entry !!" indicating that the game is in the probabilistic game state ST3 are displayed, the player does not recognize that the jackpot game has been confirmed to occur at least twice, and the time-saving game state ST1h It is possible to recognize that the game is in the probabilistic game state ST3 and play the game. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the transition to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 has occurred, and the disappointment of shifting to the time-saving gaming state ST1h in a short time can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the stop type command reception process (FIG. 57, S2206) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has not been received (S2305: No), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2207). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S2207: Yes), the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command is included. The value of the number counter e (that is, the number of reserved balls for the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is extracted, and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is the voice lamp. The number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the control device 113, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d (S2208).

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640. Whenever there is a start prize, the values of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 are set to the values of the first special symbol of the main control device 110 by the processing of S2207. It can be adjusted to the values of the holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 becomes the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. Or, even if the value deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning is detected. Then, it can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

If it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received (S2209). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (S2209: Yes), the winning command processing is executed (S2210). The details of this winning command processing (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG. 58.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the winning command processing (S2210). In the winning command processing (S2210), first, the received winning command information is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S2401). Here, the winning information command is configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be distinguished, and the holding order (number of held balls) and the winning / failing determination result in the normal game state ST1 can be discriminated. ing. Furthermore, the values of various counters acquired at the time of starting winning are also composed of commands that can be discriminated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state (S2402). If it is determined in the process of S2402 that the gaming state is not the low-probability gaming state (S2402: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2405. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state (that is, the probability change is not in progress) (S2402: Yes), whether or not there is information on the probability change jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b provided in the RAM 223. (S2403). In the process of S2403, if it is determined that there is no information on the probability variation jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: No), the processes of S2403 and S2404 are not executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2405 as it is. On the contrary, when it is determined that the winning information storage area 223b has the information of the probability variation jackpot (S2403: Yes), the notification lottery process (S2404) is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2405. The notification lottery process of S2404 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. In the process of S2405, other processes are executed (S2405), and the winning command process is terminated.

Next, this notification lottery process (S2404) will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this notification lottery process (S2404). In the notification lottery process (S2405), first, the value of the effect counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 is acquired (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223j is a determination value (S2502). If it is determined in the process of S2502 that the value of the effect counter 223j is not the determination value (S2502: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j (counter in the range of 0 to 198) is a determination value (any of "0 to 50" in this embodiment) (S2502: Yes), the third A stop display mode command for displaying the characters "Stop firing !!", which notifies the symbol display device 81 to stop firing the game ball, is set for the display control device 114 (S2503), and this process is performed. To finish.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the winning information that is the probability variation jackpot, that is, the jackpot A is received in the normal game state ST1, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to notify the player to stop firing. Here, when shifting from the normal game state ST1 to the latent probability change game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set short, and the game in the second special symbol is the main game method (the second special symbol is the target of substantial fluctuation). ). However, if the jackpot A is won in the normal game state ST1 and the reserved ball for the first special symbol is stored, a lottery disadvantageous to the player is executed in the first special symbol even during the latent probability change game state ST2. Will be done. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the hold for winning the jackpot A is stored in the normal game state ST1, the notification to stop the firing of the game ball is executed by lottery, so that the player can play the game ball at an early timing. It is possible to stop the firing of the first starting port 630 and suppress the winning of the first starting port 630. In addition, the player can recognize that the jackpot A will be obtained at an early stage by being notified to suggest that the firing is stopped, and can diversify the production of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the launch stop notification of the game ball is executed by lottery, but it may be configured to always notify when the reserved ball of the jackpot A is stored.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the winning command process (FIG. 58, S2210), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (S2211). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S2211: Yes), the status command reception process (S2212) is executed. The details of this state command reception process (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

Next, the state command reception process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the state command reception process (S2212).

In the state command reception process (S2212), first, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the game state based on the state command received from the main control device 110 (S2601). Whether or not the game state has been changed is determined by comparing the game state information set in the slave state setting area 223k with the received game state. If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to S2602. In the process of S2602, it is determined whether or not to change the gaming state to the normal gaming state ST1 (that is, the time-saving gaming state ST1h) (S2602). When it is determined that the game state is changed to the normal game state ST1 (that is, the time-saving game state ST1h) (S2602: Yes), the main display area setting command corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is set (S2603). Here, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (“○ ×” in the present embodiment) is displayed in the second display area Dn. A display command instructing the display control device 114 is set. A display command is set for the display control device 114 to display the characters of the "lower boundary zone" indicating that the third symbol display device 81 is in the normal game state ST1 (S2604). After that, the process of S2612 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2602, when it is determined that the game state has been changed to other than the normal game state ST1 (S2602: No), the game state is changed to the latent probability change game state ST2 (game state without probability change support). It is determined (S2605). If it is determined in the process of S2605 that the gaming state has been changed to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (S2605: Yes), the main display area setting command corresponding to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 is set (S2606). Here, the display control device 114 is instructed to display the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the first display area Dm and the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the second display area Dn. The display command to be displayed is set. Further, the reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the second sub display area Dt. To.

Next, the hold 1 of the first special symbol determines from the winning information storage area 223b whether or not the hold information for which the jackpot E is determined is stored (S2607). When the hold information in which the hold 1 of the special figure 1 is other than the jackpot E is stored (S2607: No), the character indicating the heaven zone (see FIG. 62 (b)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Set the display command to be displayed (S2608). After that, the process of S2612 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is the jackpot E (S2607: Yes), a display command for displaying the character indicating the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2609). .. After that, the process of S2612 is executed. By the processing of S2607 and S2609, a jackpot E is generated immediately after shifting to the latent probability change state ST2, and when shifting to the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the display indicating the heaven zone can be prevented, so that the player can do so. It is possible to prevent (suppress) excessive disappointment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2605 that the game state has been changed to a game state other than the latent probability change game state ST2 (that is, the probability change game state ST3) (S2605: No), the probability change game state ST3 (game with probability change electric support) The main display area setting command corresponding to the state) is set for the display control device 114 (S2610). Here, the first display area Dm corresponds to the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and the second display area Dn corresponds to the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (in the present embodiment, the treasure box symbol (FIG. 9A). A display command is set to instruct the display control device 114 so that (see (b))) is displayed.

Then, a display command for displaying the characters of the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2611). After that, the process of S2612 is executed. In the process of S2612, the state of the game state indicated by the received state command is set in the slave state setting area 223k (S2612). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 54. After executing the status command reception process (S2212), it is determined whether or not the notification command has been received (S2213). In the process of S2213, when it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2213: Yes), the voice / lamp notification mode indicated by the received command is set (S2214), and the display corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the received command is set. A command is set (S2215) to end this process. By the processing of S2214, for example, based on the notification command indicating the firing abnormality set and transmitted in the above-mentioned through gate passage processing (see FIG. 42), the notification sound indicating the firing abnormality (“Please hit left!” And voice) is output. In addition, by the processing of S2215, for example, based on the notification command indicating the firing abnormality set and transmitted in the above-mentioned through gate passing processing (see FIG. 42), the display indicating the firing abnormality (“Please hit left! ”) Is output to the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined in the process of S2213 that the notification command has not been received (S2213: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2219), and this process ends.

Next, the variation display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2112). This variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is one process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of generating a display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit E), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 59, S2112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so that the process of S2705 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702).

Next, in the process of S2703, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111) is displayed in the other memory area of the RAM 223. Acquired from 223z, a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is generated (S2703). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to.

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S2703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

Along with the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S2704) in accordance with the setting of the display).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2705). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is not on (that is, off) (S2705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S2709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S2705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S2706). In the process of S2302 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2205), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Then, a variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is generated (S2707).

The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S2707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 has a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

Along with the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the second special symbol). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2708) in accordance with (the display has been set).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S2709). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i are not set on (that is, off) (S2709: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on (S2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is on. The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to off, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to off (S2710). ).

In the process of S2206 of the command determination process (FIGS. 54 and S2111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S2711). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the stop type (whether it is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot) is given to the display control device 114 based on the stop type. A special display 1 stop type command for notification is generated. If the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, whether the stop type (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) is applied to the display control device 114 based on the stop type. ) Is generated for display special figure 2 stop type command (S2712). The special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and notifies even when the determination result is incorrect. Will be done. If the determination result is out of order, the out-of-order symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114 so that both the first special symbol and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are variablely displayed at the same time. Can be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can play the game by switching the special symbol that sets a long fluctuation time with the fluctuation time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the transition of the gaming state. It is configured to control the special symbols that are possible. Then, in the latent probability variation state ST2, only the jackpot in the high probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is set to be drawn by the second special symbol given at the time of the jackpot. Even after the jackpot is executed, the high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3) is set again. Therefore, for the player, when shifting to the latent probability change game state ST2, the probability change state can be set until the jackpot is executed at least twice. Therefore, the player can recognize that two jackpots are guaranteed in the latent probability change game state ST2.

Further, in the present embodiment, 85% of the right-handed game balls are configured to win the second starting port 640 when the electric accessory 632 is not operated. Furthermore, in the latent probability change game state ST2, it is set to win a small hit with the second special symbol, and the lottery probability is that about 15% of the right-handed game balls are prize balls for the player. It is set with a probability that it will be paid out at. Therefore, the operation frequency of the electric accessory 632 is set low (non-electric support state), and even in the latent probability variation game, the game is performed in a state where the decrease in the number of balls held by the player is suppressed when the right-handed game is played. be able to.

Furthermore, if a big hit is made from the latent probability variation game state ST2 with the second special symbol, the probability of transition to the probability variation game state ST3 is 66%. Here, in the probability variation game state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long and the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be short. Then, when a big hit is made with the first special symbol, either a big hit that shifts to the probabilistic gaming state ST3 again or a big hit that shifts to the normal gaming state ST1 is given by lottery. Therefore, the player can play the game in the hope that he will be able to win the big hit twice again. Further, by providing a case where the probabilistic game state ST3 is changed to the normal game state ST1, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. In the probabilistic game state ST3, the jackpot based on the first special symbol may shift to either the latent probabilistic game state ST2 or the normal game state ST1. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the probability-changing game state ST3 will shift to the latent probability-changing game state ST2, which allows the player to obtain two big hits again, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Furthermore, in the normal game state ST1, the lottery ratio of the jackpot A to which the latent probability variation game state ST2 is given is set lower than the lottery ratio of the jackpot B when the jackpot is mainly played by the first special symbol. , It is possible to increase the difficulty level of transitioning to the latent probability change game state ST2 and suppress the increase in gambling.

In the present embodiment, the game state is switched when the big hit game is executed, but the game state is not limited to this, and the game state can be switched depending on the small hit type even when the small hit game is won. It may be configured as. With this configuration, the small hits can be drawn more easily than the big hits, so that the frequency of switching the game state can be increased. Therefore, even when the gaming state is set to be disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to switch to the advantageous gaming state by winning the small hit, and the player can be expected to win the small hit. Further, even when an advantageous gaming state is set, it is possible to switch to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by making a small hit, and it is possible to suppress gambling.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 86. First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65. FIG. 64 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 65 is an enlarged view of an enlarged right side region of the gaming board 13.

In the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper right side of the front view of the game board 13 and the ball guidance path forming member 70 is provided on the right side region of the front view of the game board 13 with respect to the first embodiment. The point provided in the above, the point provided in the lower right decorative member 71 on the lower right side of the front view of the game board 13, and the second ordinary electric accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 and below the front view of the game board 13. A point provided on the side, a point where the first variable winning device 65 is attached to the lower right decorative member 71, and a normal symbol starting port (through) instead of the first normal symbol starting port 67a and the second normal symbol starting port 67b. The difference is that the gate) 670 is provided on the lower side of the front view of the game board 13 and the right first starting port 631 is deleted. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 64, in addition to the first embodiment, the game board 13 is configured by assembling a ball guiding path forming member 70, a lower right decorative member 71, and the like. The first starting port 630, the second starting port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, points added to the first embodiment with respect to the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 64.

A through gate 670 is provided on the right side of the game board 13. The through gate 670 is a gate type and is composed of a start port having a sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the through gate 670, a lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery conducted for the passing of the game ball to the through gate 670, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit.

When the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 2), and "○" and "○" and " After the symbols of "x" are alternately lit for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the ordinary symbols (symbols of "○" or "x" in this embodiment) indicating the lottery result are stopped and displayed (lit).

When it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with "○", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol was a win. When the winning symbol is displayed, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 operates for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). The second ordinary electric accessory 640a is maintained in a state of standing upward so as to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 640 in the normal state (non-operating state), while the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is maintained. By operating the object 640a, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle (40 degrees in this embodiment), and a state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second starting port 640 (special state). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of order, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with "x", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol was out of order. At this time, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is not operated, and the next variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for entering the balls into the first starting port 630 and the second starting port 640, a winning or not judgment (big hit lottery) of whether or not the game is a big hit is performed, and the type of the big hit is determined. Also do. The details of the jackpot type will be described later with reference to FIG. 74, but as the jackpot type determined here, eight types of jackpot A to jackpot H are used as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is set (see FIG. 74). These eight types of jackpots include the length of the interval time (1 second or 4 seconds), the possibility of V operation, and the presence or absence of electric support after the jackpot game ends (whether the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is easily put into a special state. Whether or not) are combined and set.

Here, the length of the interval time means that the game ball is placed at a predetermined timing (probability change switch) to the first variable winning device 65 provided with the special discharge port (specific area) 65e2 (see FIG. 6) provided with the probability change switch 65e3. It is the length of the interval time set to change whether or not it is possible to guide (whether it is easy or difficult) at the timing (timing when it can pass through 65e3).

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, but in the present embodiment, the interval time between specific rounds during the jackpot game (the round in which the second variable winning device 650 opens and closes (in the present embodiment). Timing of reaching the first variable winning device 65 by changing the interval time provided between 4R) and the round (5R in this embodiment) in which the first variable winning device 65 opens and closes. Whether or not the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 depending on the timing when the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 (easy or difficult). Is configured so that it can be set.

Whether or not the V operation is possible is whether or not the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6) provided in the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6) (easy or difficult). If V operation is possible, the game ball that won the prize in the first variable winning device 65 is set so that it can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, while V operation is not possible. In this case, the game ball that has won a prize in the first variable winning device 65 is set so that it cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (difficult). Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted. However, in the present embodiment, the operation of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6) provided in the first variable winning device 65. By controlling the above, it is possible to set whether or not V operation is possible.

In the present embodiment, the possibility of V operation is set by driving and controlling the switching member 65h, but it is sufficient as long as it is possible to set whether or not the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. A lid member that always opens and closes at regular intervals is provided on the upstream side of the passage having the probability change winning switch 65e3, and a stopper member that retains the game ball is provided further upstream of the lid member. Then, a configuration may be used in which the game ball can pass through the probability variation winning switch 65e3 only when the timing at which the stopper member is released and the timing at which the lid member is opened coincide with each other. By using such a configuration, it is possible to make the player know that the lid member is periodically opened, and the player is made to win the game ball in the first specific winning opening 65. If this is the case, it is possible to make people think that there is a possibility of passing through the probability change switch 65e3, which has the effect of increasing the motivation of the game.

In addition, the opening time (opening timing) of the lower attacker (opening / closing door) 65f1 that opens the first specific winning opening 65a is changed to make it difficult for the game ball to win in the first variable winning device 65. It may be possible to set whether or not the sphere can pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The presence / absence of electric support sets whether or not the second ordinary electric accessory 640a shifts to a state in which it is easy to operate in a special state (electric support state) after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, eight types of jackpot A to jackpot H are set as the jackpot types of the second special symbol (special figure 2) as in the case of the first special symbol (see FIG. 74).

Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged as variable winning devices that are operated in the open state during the jackpot game. The first variable winning device 65 is provided on the lower side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and in the specific round during the jackpot game (fifth round in the present embodiment), the first specific winning opening 65a is set for a predetermined period (see FIG. 64). It is operated so as to be opened until a predetermined number (10 balls in the present embodiment) of game balls (29 seconds in the present embodiment) are inserted (see FIG. 80 (b)).

On the other hand, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and is a round other than the specific round during the jackpot game (1st to 4th rounds and 6th to 7th rounds in this embodiment). In, the second specific winning opening 650a is operated so as to be opened until a predetermined period (30 seconds in the present embodiment) or a predetermined number (10 balls in the present embodiment) of game balls are inserted.

Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. On the right side of the game board 13, a ball guidance path forming member 70 for guiding a game ball launched by a right-handed game is assembled to the surface of the game board 13 with a screw. The ball guidance path forming member 70 has an opening 70a, which is an opening through which the game ball launched by the right-handed game can pass, and a plurality of guides that guide the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a to meander and flow down. A game ball in which the members (first guide member (first guide surface) 70b, second guide member (second guide surface) 70c, third guide member (third guide surface) 70d) and the third guide member 70d flow down. Is assembled and configured as one unit with the discharge unit 70e.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that the positional relationship between the position where the game ball passes (the position of the opening 70a and the discharge part 70e) and the member for guiding the game ball (each guiding member) is deviated. In addition to this, it is possible to suppress a problem that the positional relationship between the guiding members is displaced, and there is an effect that the manufacturing efficiency can be improved in the process of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10.

Below the ball guidance path forming member 70, a lower right decorative member 71 provided with a first variable winning device 65 is assembled to the surface of the game board 13 with screws. The lower right decorative member 71 includes a fourth guide member (fourth guide surface) 71a that receives a game ball that has rolled on the third guide member 70d of the ball guide path forming member 70, a first variable winning device 65, and the like. The decorative portion 71b is assembled and configured as one unit.

The decorative portion 71b is provided with a decorative lamp (light emitting means) (not shown) so that it can be emphasized that the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state during the jackpot game. Has been done. Specifically, the surface of the decorative portion 71b (the surface visible to the player) is composed of a half mirror, and when the decorative lamp is off, it becomes difficult to see the inside of the first variable winning device, and the first identification When the winning opening 65a is opened, the decorative lamp is turned on so that the inside of the first variable winning device can be visually recognized.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily make the player aware that the player is in a gaming state aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a, and also in a non-gaming state or a normal gaming state (during a big hit game). In a gaming state that is not), the structure inside the first variable winning device 65 can be made invisible (difficult), so that a fraudulent act (for example, a dedicated jig in the first specific winning opening 65a) can be made. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the switching member to be deformed by inserting the.

Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. A ball guidance path 72 is formed in the right side region of the game board 13 by the ball guidance region forming member 70 and the fourth guidance member 71a described above. The ball guidance path 72 is configured so that the game ball meanders, and a specific configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 65.

FIG. 65 is an enlarged front view of the right side region of the game board 13. Here, the flow of the game ball in the ball guidance path 72 will be described. First, the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a is received by the first guide member 70b. The first guide member 70b is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower right direction when viewed from the front of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the first guide member 70b in the lower right direction. The lower end of the flow of the first guide member 70b is assembled so as to face the second guide member 70c, and the game ball that has flowed down the first guide member 70b falls onto the second guide member 70c.

The second guide member 70c is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction in the front view of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the second guide member 70c in the lower left direction. The lower end of the flow of the second guide member 70c is assembled so as to face the third guide member 70d, and the game ball that has flowed down the second guide member 70c falls onto the third guide member 70d.

The third guide member 70d is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower right direction when viewed from the front of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the third guide member 70d in the lower right direction. The lower end of the flow of the third guide member 70d is assembled so as to face the fourth guide member 71a, and the game ball flowing down the third guide member 70d passes through the discharge portion 70e and is placed on the fourth guide member 71a. Fall.

The fourth guide member 71a is attached to the game board 13 so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction when viewed from the front of the game board, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the fourth guide member 71a in the lower left direction. ). The lower end of the flow of the fourth guide member 71a is configured to communicate with the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) of the first variable winning device 65, and the fourth guide is in a closed state when the first specific winning opening 65a is closed. The game ball that has flowed down the member 71a flows down (rolls) on the opening / closing door 65f1 and is discharged to the lower area (the area where the through gate 670 and the second starting port 640 are arranged) of the game board 13. It is composed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the game ball meanders on the ball guidance path 72, the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guidance path 72 (guide path passage time) meanders. It is possible to set it longer than when it is not set.

Further, each guiding member constituting the ball guiding path 72 is configured so that the inclination angle becomes gentler in order from the upstream side. Specifically, the first guide member 70b and the second guide member 70c are set to about 20 degrees, the third guide member 70d is set to about 10 degrees, and the fourth guide member 71a is set to about 5 degrees.

With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the flow speed of the game ball on the downstream side of the ball guiding path 72, and open / close communication with the rolling surface of the fourth guiding member 71a and eventually the fourth guiding member 71a. A plurality of game balls can be simultaneously retained (rolled) on the door 65f1.

Therefore, when the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, it is possible to win a plurality of game balls in a short period of time.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the game ball is configured to fall between the guiding members on an inclined surface inclined in a direction opposite to the flow direction, the flow speed of the game ball can be efficiently reduced. It is possible.

In the present embodiment, in order to simultaneously retain (roll) a plurality of game balls on the downstream side of the ball guidance path 72, the inclination angle of the guide member is loosened to reduce the flow speed of the game balls. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, a material having a high coefficient of friction (urethane or the like) may be attached to the rolling surface of the game ball of the guiding member to reduce the flow speed of the game ball. Further, the guiding member (fourth guiding member 71a) provided on the downstream side of the ball guiding path 72 and the game ball rolling surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 are configured to meander in the depth direction (horizontal direction) when viewed from the front of the game board 13. You may. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the fourth guide is provided so that a step does not occur between the guide surface of the fourth guide member 71a and the surface (guide surface) of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. The member 71a is provided on the lower right decorative member 71, which is formed separately from the ball guide path forming member 70. With this configuration, for example, when the ball guidance path configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is adopted for the pachinko machine 10 in which the shape of the first variable winning device 65 is slightly changed, the fourth guidance member 71a Only by changing the shape to correspond to the shape of the first variable winning device 65, the ball-guided path forming member 70 can be diverted. That is, there is an effect that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, the opening 70a of the ball guidance path 72 described above is located below the second variable winning device 650, and the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is open (the attacker 650b is open). In the operating state), the game ball is configured so as not to pass through the opening 70a (difficult).

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but in the present embodiment, the period (opening period, interval period) for closing the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 during the jackpot game. By changing the length, the game ball that has passed through the ball guidance path 72 can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 by the operation of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65, and the first variable winning device It is configured so that it is possible to control whether or not to win a prize in 65.

In the present embodiment, the two variable winning devices are arranged vertically apart from each other, and the ball guiding path 72 is provided between them (between the paths through which the game balls flow down), whereby the upper variable winning device (second variable) is provided. The time it takes for the game ball that passed without winning the winning device 650) to reach the lower variable winning device (first variable winning device 65) is delayed, but it is arranged as two variable winning devices. A configuration other than the above may be used. For example, a plurality of variable winning devices may be provided in the left-right direction, and a ball guidance path 72 may be provided between them.

Further, a plurality of variable winning devices and a ball guidance path 72 between them may be assembled and configured as one unit. With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the assembling work to the game board 13, and there is an effect that the manufacturing efficiency can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the ball guidance path 72, a configuration in which the game ball meanders in the left-right direction of the game board is used, but if the configuration is such that the time for the game ball to pass through the ball guidance path 72 is a predetermined time or longer. Other configurations may be used. For example, the path may meander in the front view depth direction (horizontal direction) of the game board 13, or the game ball may meander in three dimensions using both the left-right direction and the depth direction.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time during which the game ball passes through the right region of the game board 13 (the time during which the game ball flows down between the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65) is the distance at which the game ball flows down. Although it is realized that the game ball is extended for a predetermined time or longer by using a structure for extending the speed or a structure for slowing down the speed at which the game ball flows down, other methods may be used. For example, a regulating member that regulates the flow of the game ball is provided in the ball guiding path 72, and the regulating member is electrically driven at all times or at regular intervals to allow the game ball to pass through the ball guiding path 72. It may be configured to be longer than a predetermined time. By using the restricting member that is electrically driven in this way, it is possible to more reliably set the time for passing through the ball guidance path to a predetermined time or longer.

In the second embodiment, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the first starting port 630 during the right-handed game, but the first starting port is located in the right region of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment described above. 631 may be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a flow in which various gaming states in the present embodiment are set will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flow in which various gaming states are set. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a limit (100 times) on the number of times of giving electric support in the probabilistic game state ST3 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, and various game states are set. Are different. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transition ratio of the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability state after the jackpot game is set to the type of special symbol (two types of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and the gaming state (normal gaming state). It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a total of eight types can be set by combining ST1, the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the latent probability-changing gaming state ST2, and the probability-changing gaming state ST3). The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 74.

First, the flow in which various gaming states are set in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 66. In the normal game state ST1, first, a left-handed game is performed aiming at the first starting port 630 (see FIG. 64) provided in the lower center of the game board 13. During the normal game state ST1, the first special symbol is substantially subject to fluctuation. Specifically, in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol game is 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30,000 ms (30 seconds). The time is selected, and 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 76). With this configuration, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol start to fluctuate at the same time in the normal game state ST1, the first special symbol is before the second special symbol finishes one fluctuation. Since the symbol can be changed a plurality of times (at least 20 times in the present embodiment), the first special symbol can be substantially changed.

Then, during the normal game state ST1, when the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1) becomes a big hit, the big hit B (7R normal big hit: no electric support) and the big hit D (7R normal big hit: with electric support) ), The jackpot E (7R probability variation jackpot: with electric support) and the jackpot H (7R normal hit: without electric support) are selected.

Here, if a big hit is won in the first lottery game during the normal game state ST1, the probability of shifting to the high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3) is set to 50% after the big hit ends. The probability of transitioning to a low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time-saving game state ST1h) is set to 50%, and if the jackpots B, D, and H are won in the first lottery game, after the jackpot game is completed. , The normal game state ST1 is set again, and when the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, the probability variation game state ST3 is set after the jackpot game is completed.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the jackpot probability does not shift to a high probability unless the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game as described above in the first embodiment. Even if the jackpot E is won in the lottery game, the probability variation game state ST3 is not set unless the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, and the probability variation game state ST3 (high probability: with electric support) is a jackpot. It will shift to the time-saving gaming state ST1h (low probability: with electric support) where the probability is low.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the same jackpot type is won, the jackpot game depends on the result of the game during the jackpot game (the result of whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot game). The game states that shift after the end may differ, but when explaining the flow of setting various game states, the game states that can be shifted depending on the jackpot type (shift by playing normally). The game state) will be explained as the transition destination after the jackpot game is completed.

If the second lottery game is performed in the normal game state ST1, it is set to shift to the 100% low probability state without shifting to the high probability game state after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 74). ). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second lottery game from being illegally performed during the normal game state ST1.

Next, the probability variation game state ST3, which shifts with a probability of 50% when a big hit is won in the first lottery game, will be described during the normal game state ST1. In the probabilistic game state ST3, a right-handed game is performed aiming at the second starting port 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the game board 13. During the probabilistic game state ST3, the second special symbol is substantially subject to fluctuation. Specifically, in the probabilistic game state ST3, a fluctuation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol game. It is configured so that 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 78). By lengthening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in this way, it is possible to make the second special symbol a substantial fluctuation target. ..

Then, during the probability variation game state ST3, when a big hit is obtained in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the big hit E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and the big hit F (7R: high probability: Either (without electric support) or jackpot G (7R: low probability: with electric support) is selected.

Here, if a jackpot is won in the second lottery game during the probability variation game state ST3, the probability of shifting to the high probability gaming state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is set to 70% after the jackpot ends. The probability of transitioning to a low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time-saving game state ST1h) is set to 30%, and if the jackpot E is won in the second lottery game, the probability change game state is reached after the jackpot game ends. When ST3 is set again and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability change game state ST2 is set after the jackpot game is completed. Then, when the jackpot G is won in the second lottery game, the time saving game state ST1h is set.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the electric support ends when the total number of fluctuations of the first lottery game and the second lottery game in the probability variation game state ST3 reaches 100 times. Therefore, when the special symbol variation exceeds 100 times in the probabilistic game state ST3, the process shifts to the latent probabilistic game state ST2.

If the first lottery game is performed in the probability variation game state ST3, the rate of transition to the high probability game state after the jackpot game ends is set to 10%, and the rate of transition to the low probability state after the jackpot game ends. Is set to 90% (see FIG. 74).

Next, the latent probability variation game state ST2, which shifts at 10% when the jackpot is won in the second lottery game in the probability variation game state ST3, will be described. In the latent probability change game state ST2, a right-handed game is performed aiming at the second starting port 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the game board 13. During the latent probability changing game state ST2, the second special symbol is substantially subject to fluctuation. Specifically, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, a fluctuation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol game. , 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 78). By lengthening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in this way, it is possible to make the second special symbol a substantial fluctuation target. ..

Then, during the latent probability change game state ST2, when a big hit is obtained in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the big hit E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and the big hit F (7R: high probability) : No electric support) is selected.

Here, if a jackpot is won in the second lottery game during the probability variation game state ST3, the probability of shifting to the high probability gaming state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is set to 100% after the jackpot ends. It is set so that it does not shift to the low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time-saving game state ST1h), and if the jackpot E is won in the second lottery game, the probability change game state is reached after the jackpot game ends. When ST3 is set and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability change game state ST2 is set again after the jackpot game is completed.

Next, the time saving game state ST1h will be described. In the time-saving game state ST1h, a left-handed game is performed aiming at the first starting port 630 (see FIG. 64) provided in the center of the game board 13. During the time-saving game state ST1h, the first special symbol is substantially subject to fluctuation. Specifically, in the time-saving game state ST1h, a fluctuation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol game, and the first It is configured so that 1000 ms (1 second) to 30000 ms (30 seconds) are selected as the fluctuation time of one special symbol (see FIG. 77). By lengthening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in this way, it is possible to make the second special symbol a substantial fluctuation target. ..

Then, during the time-saving game state ST1h, when a big hit is obtained in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the big hit A (7R: low probability: no electric support) and the big hit C (7R: low probability: One of jackpot E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and jackpot F (7R: high probability: without electric support) is selected (see FIG. 75).

Here, if a big hit is won in the first lottery game during the time-saving game state ST1h, the probability of shifting to the high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3) is set to 95% after the big hit ends. The probability of transitioning to a low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time-saving game state ST1h) is set to 5%, and if the jackpots A and C are won in the first lottery game, the normal game is completed after the jackpot game is completed. If the game state ST1 is set and the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, the probability variation game state ST3 is set after the jackpot game is completed, and if the jackpot F is won in the first lottery game, after the jackpot game is completed. , The latent probability change game state ST2 is set.

Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 75, in the gaming state in which the time-saving gaming state ST1h is provided with electric support and the second ordinary electric accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 tends to be in a special state. However, as described above, the first special symbol is substantially subject to fluctuation during the time-saving gaming state ST1h, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol is a long fluctuation. Therefore, the second start port is in the time-saving gaming state ST1h. The game aiming at 640 is a very inefficient game. Further, since the second starting port 640 is set to have one prize ball for the game ball, even if a right-handed game is performed during the time-saving game state ST1h and the game ball is awarded to the second starting port 640. Since the number of balls to be played does not increase, in the time-saving game state ST1h, substantially the same game as the normal game state ST1 (left-handed game) is performed.

The flow of setting various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has been described above, but here, the main game characteristics (transition of various gaming states) of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. To do.

First, in the normal game state ST1, the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game to aim for the probability change game state ST3 (distribution 50%). Next, in the probabilistic game state ST3, while performing the second lottery game, the jackpot F is won and the latent game state ST2 is aimed at (distribution 10%). Alternatively, the player aims to shift to the latent game state ST2 by performing the special symbol game 100 times without making a big hit and ending the electric support.

In the probabilistic game state ST3, the jackpot for which the probabilistic game state ST3 is set again after the jackpot game ends accounts for 60% of the total jackpot, so the player goes to the latent probabilistic game state ST2 while acquiring the balls from the jackpot. We will aim to make the transition.

Further, this probability variation game state ST3 is configured so that a small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the second lottery game, and the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held by performing the small hit game.

Next, in the latent probability variable game state ST2, after the jackpot game is completed, the jackpot in which the latent probability variable game state ST2 is set again accounts for 90% of the total jackpot. This latent probability change game state ST2 is the game state in which the most promising ball output can be expected in the pachinko machine 10. A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, but the latent probability variation game state ST2 is configured to be able to obtain more balls than the probability variation game state ST3 by repeatedly performing the small hit game. .. That is, during the latent probability change game state ST2, it is possible to increase the number of balls to be output in the small hit game and the big hit game, and the same mode is repeated (looped) with a 90% probability after the big hit game is completed. It is configured.

Further, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the high probability game state transition rate of the second lottery game is 100%, and even if the remaining 10% is won instead of the 90% that loops the latent probability changing game state ST2, the probability change. It only shifts to the game state ST3. That is, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the jackpot can be won at least twice (ST2 → ST3, ST3 → ST1h twice) in the high probability game state.

Finally, the time-saving game state ST1h is a game state set when the state shifts (falls) from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment). ), It is a game state in which electric support is given. In this time-saving game state ST1, the rate of transition to the high-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set higher than in the normal gaming state, and if the jackpot is won in the first lottery game during the time-saving gaming state ST1, it is high. The rate of transition to the stochastic gaming state is set to 95% (70% for the probabilistic gaming state ST3 and 25% for the latent gaming state ST2). Then, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the normal game state ST1 is entered.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the game state (normal game state ST1, time-saving game state ST1h, latent probability change game state ST2, probability change game state ST3) are set. Based on this, it is configured so that a plurality of ratios of transitioning to the high-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game can be set, and further, the special symbol to be substantially changed according to the gaming state can be changed. It is possible to extremely reduce the rate of transition to the high-probability gaming state (0% in the present embodiment) when the second lottery game that is not a substantial fluctuation target is performed. With this configuration, even if an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed, it does not shift to a state advantageous for the player (high probability game state), so that the illegal game targeting the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It has the effect of being able to be suppressed.

Further, the actual variable target of the latent probability changing game state ST2, which is a high probability gaming state, is the second lottery game in which the second special symbol fluctuates, and the lottery result of the second lottery game is a big hit only during the latent probability changing game state ST2. Since the configuration is such that 100% shifts to the high-probability gaming state when the probability becomes high, in a part of the high-probability gaming state, the jackpot can be set to the high-probability gaming state at least twice. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine rich in game playability, and there is an effect that the interest of the game machine can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the flow of control of various devices during the jackpot of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a timing chart showing the flow of various devices executed from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game. Of the operation controls of various devices, the same operation control as that of the first embodiment described above will be omitted, and the details of other operation controls will be described later with reference to FIG. 80.

First, when the jackpot game is started, the main control device 110 operates various devices related to the jackpot game (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650) a predetermined number of times at a predetermined timing (see FIG. 80). Then, based on various commands output from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game on the third symbol display device 81.

First, when the jackpot game is started, the attacker (upper attacker) 650b is opened (turned on) in order to open the second specific winning opening 650b of the second variable winning device 650 after the lapse of a predetermined period t1 (opening period). ). Then, the attacker (upper attacker) 650b is closed when either the predetermined period (29 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses or the predetermined number of winnings (10 in the present embodiment) is satisfied. The period t2 in which the second specific winning opening 650b is in the open state is set as one opening period (round), and is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (7 times in this embodiment) in one jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is always open during the opening period t2, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the second specific winning opening is open and closed during the opening period. The upper attacker 650b may be operated so as to repeat the state. Even when such a configuration is used, the opening period t2 is set when either a predetermined period elapses after the second specific winning opening is first opened or a predetermined number of winnings are satisfied. It will be finished.

Then, the next round is started after a predetermined period t3 (interval period) has elapsed since the end of one round. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, a game of opening the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device is executed from the first round to the fourth round, and the fifth round. A game is executed in which the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened.

Next, the flow between the fourth and fifth rounds in which the specific winning opening that is opened during the jackpot game is switched from the second specific winning opening 650a to the first specific winning opening 65a will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a predetermined period t4, which is a specific interval period between the fourth and fifth rounds, can be changed according to the gaming state (see FIG. 80). For example, the jackpots A to D have an interval period of 1 second, and the jackpots E to H have an interval period of 4 seconds.

Here, the influence on the game by changing the specific interval period will be described. First, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball launched by the right-handed game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 passes through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state, and then the ball is guided. By passing through the route 72, it is possible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 64). The ball-guided path 72 is designed so that the ball-guided path passage time is 3 to 4 seconds.

Further, the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 operates in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 at the same time when the first specific winning opening 65a is opened (attacker 65b is on). The opening operation is controlled to be on), the mode (the state in which the V opening operation is on) is continued for a predetermined period t5 (2 seconds in this embodiment), and the game is played after the predetermined period (V opening period) t5 elapses. The sphere is controlled so as to operate (the V opening operation is turned off) in a mode in which it cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (difficult).

That is, in the jackpot game of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3, V is the sum of the specific interval period t4 and the period (2 seconds) t5 in which the V opening operation is on. The effective period t6 needs to be longer than the ball-guided route passage period (up to 4 seconds in this embodiment). Specifically, by setting the specific interval period t4 to 4 seconds, the V effective period t6, which is the sum of the specific interval period t4 (4 seconds) and the V opening period t5 (2 seconds), is set to 6 seconds, and the ball is guided. Make it longer than the route passage period (up to 4 seconds). With this configuration, after the upper attacker 650a in the fourth round is turned off (after the game ball can pass through the ball guidance path 72), the game ball that has passed through the ball guidance path 72 is V effective. It is possible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a within the period t6 and make it possible to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

On the other hand, if the V valid period t6 is set shorter than the ball guidance path passing period, it becomes possible (difficult) to make it impossible (difficult) for the game ball to win the first specific winning opening 65a within the V valid period t6. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, by changing the length of the specific interval period t4 according to the game state, the jackpot game capable of substantially passing V without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65. And V It is possible to provide a jackpot game that cannot pass (difficult). Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the main control device 110 during the jackpot game can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment described above, the operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (switching member 65h) is performed according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol). (Motion control that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 and motion control that cannot pass (difficult)) are set, and the length of the specific interval period t4 is set according to the game state when the jackpot is won. It is configured to be set.

In this embodiment, by changing the operation content of the switching member 65h as described in the first embodiment described above, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easy) operation pattern and non-passage. Although it is configured to set a possible (difficult) operation pattern, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. It may be configured to set an (easy) operation pattern and an impassable (difficult) operation pattern.

Specifically, first, when the round in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened (5 rounds in the present embodiment) is started, the switching member 65h is turned on for 2 seconds. That is, when the game ball wins at the timing when the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the switching member 65h so that the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easily). To drive. Then, the opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 is placed in the first specific winning opening 65a to open the opening / closing door opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that continuously opens for 29 seconds) and the first specific winning opening 65a. The opening / closing door opening pattern in which the game ball cannot win (difficult) (for example, an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.4 seconds is repeated 5 times from the start of 5 rounds and then continuously opened for 27 seconds) can be changed.

With this configuration, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easily) and the game ball does not pass by simply changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1 without changing the operation content of the switching member 65h. Possible (difficult) operation patterns can be set. Therefore, it is possible to substantially set a plurality of ratios of jackpot games that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, and there is an effect that various game characteristics can be provided to the player and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

Further, by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1, a game ball can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and a game ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult). When a configuration that enables setting of a different state is used, the timing at which the switching member 65 is started is not limited to the timing at which the first variable winning device 65 is started, but for example, the pachinko machine 10 The operation may be controlled so that a constant operation is always repeated at the timing when the power is turned on.

Further, by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1, the game ball can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and the game ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult). It is possible to set the period during which the switching member 65h is turned on for longer than 2 seconds by using the configuration that enables the setting of the above state. As a result, the game ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a can be more reliably passed through the probability change switch 65e3.

In the present embodiment, by changing the specific interval period t4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period, but other than that. The configuration of may be adopted. For example, the ball-guided path passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball-guided path 72, may be switched. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V opening period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game is shown. For example, in the first round, the first variable winning device 65 In the case of a jackpot game in which the first specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, the period of change according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1.

With this configuration, for example, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball-guided route transit time, the right side is accompanied by the start of the jackpot game (start of the opening period t1). The struck game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period t6 and can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance path passing time, the game ball hit right with the start of the jackpot game becomes the first within the V valid period t6. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

As a specific configuration, the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) that operates to open the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to operate a plurality of times in one round. (The first specific winning opening 65a is configured to repeat the open state and the closed state in one round), and the game ball that wins when the specific winning opening 65a is opened for the first time presses the probability change switch 65e3. It is preferable to configure it so that it can pass through. Further, the opening / closing door 65f1 that operates to open the first specific winning opening 65a is composed of a plurality of members having different predetermined movements, and the specific winning is performed only when the plurality of members perform specific movements. It may be configured so that the mouth is open.

By using the specific configuration described above, even when a jackpot game with a short opening period t1 (a jackpot game in which the game ball cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (difficult)) is set, the open state (within one round) is set. Since the game ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening (in the second open state), there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Return to FIG. 67 to continue the description. When the opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 (not shown) is turned off (end of the fifth round) and the first specific winning opening 65a is closed, the upper attacker 650b is turned on after the interval period t3 elapses (second). The specific winning opening 650a is open). After that, the operation of the upper attacker 650b is repeated until the final round (7 rounds) is completed, and after the second specific winning opening 650a of the final round (7 rounds) is closed, the ending period t7 elapses and the jackpot game is played. finish.

The third symbol display device 81 is executing the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game while the jackpot game is being performed. Specifically, in the early stage of the big hit game, a production display (directing A) is executed to congratulate the big hit game, and after that, a notification is given that the specific winning opening to be opened in the next round will be switched, and the big hit An effect display (effect B) is executed to notify (suggest) that a game is to be performed to determine whether or not to shift to the high-probability game state after the end of the game. Then, an effect display (effect C) that encourages whether or not to shift to the high probability game state is executed, and at the end of the jackpot game, the game state provided after the jackpot game ends (high or low probability of jackpot, presence / absence of electric support). The effect display (effect D) for notifying (suggesting) is executed.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which the above-mentioned effect B and effect C are switched is different (delayed) from the timing at which the upper attacker 650b is closed (the timing at which the fourth round ends). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent various processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 from being concentrated.

Further, the timing at which the effect B and the effect C are switched is between the timing when the upper attacker 650b closes (the timing when the fourth round ends) and the timing when the lower attacker 65f1 opens (the timing when the fifth round starts). Since the interval period (specific interval period t4) is set, the game ball uses the probability change switch 65e3 in this jackpot game based on the timing at which the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the jackpot can be passed, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game by grasping the result of the jackpot game at an early stage.

In addition, by preparing a plurality of timings for switching the effect display within the specific interval period t4 and providing a means for randomly setting the timing for switching the effect display, the jackpot game can be further based on the timing for switching the effect display. It can be difficult to get the result.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. Although the description on the display screen or the description thereof is omitted for the same parts as the contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 described in the first embodiment described above, the same is true in the present embodiment. It has a display.

First, in the present embodiment, the stage in which the main character is walking outdoors is displayed on the display screen during the normal game state ST1 (not shown). Then, when the jackpot is won and the game shifts to the probabilistic game state ST3, the display screen illustrated in FIG. 68A is displayed. FIG. 68A is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect in the probabilistic game state ST3.

On the display screen of FIG. 68A, the variation of the first special symbol is displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the variation of the second special symbol is displayed on the upper right of the screen. At the bottom of the screen, a game state display area is provided in which the current game mode (game state) "tower search mode (probability variation game state ST3)" and "right-handed" notifying the game method are displayed. In addition, on the right side of the screen, a status display area is provided in which an object imitating the tower currently being searched by the main character is displayed. In this status display area, "1F" which is the lowest floor of the object, "100F" which is the top floor, "rooftop" which is above the top floor, and "30F" which indicates the current number of floors are displayed. Has been done.

During the probabilistic game state ST3, the tower is climbed one floor each time the special symbol changes once, and the display is updated for each change so that the special symbol reaches the roof when it changes 100 times without winning a big hit. That is, the number of floors displayed with the cursor as the "current floor" ("30F" in this figure) is the same value as the current number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot. By displaying this status display area, the hero climbs the tower and finally rooftop in the situation where the special symbol is changed 100 times without winning a big hit during the probability change game state ST3 and the situation shifts to the latent probability change game state ST2. It is configured to be displayed as an effect to reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68 (b), the display contents when a big hit is won during the probabilistic game state ST3 will be described. FIG. 68B is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing that a jackpot was won during the probabilistic game state ST3. In FIG. 68 (b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as "555", indicating that the result of the lottery is a big hit. In addition, a forced stop display is displayed with "246" indicating that the first special symbol has come off. In the status display area, "50F" is shown as the current number of floors (the number of special symbol changes since the end of the previous jackpot).

In the probabilistic game state ST3, when a jackpot is won, a display body (elevator) for notifying that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the display screen. During the jackpot game, the elevator is boarded and the destination of the elevator is fueled (not shown). The destinations of the elevator are "outdoor" when the game state after the jackpot game is set to the normal game state ST1 or the time-saving game state ST1h, and "tower search mode (tower) when the probability change game state ST3 is set. There are three types, "1F)" and "Rooftop mode" (see Fig. 69) when the latent probability change game state is set to ST2, and each is configured so that the destination is suggested by the effect executed during the jackpot game. There is.

In the present embodiment, the game state set after the end of the jackpot is changed depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. Therefore, the jackpot game is performed before the start of the jackpot game or at the beginning of the jackpot game. The game state set after the end is not fixed.

Therefore, based on the winning jackpot types (A to H), it is determined between the gaming state that shifts when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 and the gaming state that shifts when the game ball does not pass (for example, the jackpot type is In the case of jackpot E, the gaming state that shifts after the jackpot game ends is the probabilistic game state ST3 or the time-saving game state ST1h), and the effect common to the discrimination result is used as the effect at the beginning of the jackpot game (for example, effect A in FIG. Then, it is preferable to determine whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, and set the effect at the end of the game (for example, effect D in FIG. 67) based on the determination result. With this configuration, the effect of the display screen can be displayed without discomfort with respect to the game result during the jackpot game (the result of whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3).

FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect in the latent probability variation game state ST2. On the display screen of FIG. 69, it is displayed that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and in the game state display area, right-handed display and the current game mode (game state) are displayed. A certain "rooftop mode (latent probability change game state ST2)" is displayed. Also, in the status display area, the "rooftop" display is highlighted to notify that the main character has reached the rooftop.

This "rooftop mode" is a mode for notifying (suggesting) the latent probability change game state ST2. In the pachinko machine 10, various values are set so that the gaming state in which the player is most likely to obtain a ball is the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 (a) to 80, but in the latent probability variation game state ST2 in which the actual variation target is the second special symbol, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set short. In addition, the small hit game time (of the small hit game time, the opening period and the ending time in which the game ball does not win the specific winning opening) is also set short (shorter than the probability variation game state ST3). That is, the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set to the game state in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for the longest time in the small hit game per unit time among all the game states. Furthermore, the jackpot probability is set to a high probability.

To the "rooftop mode" that suggests the latent probability change game state ST2, either win the jackpot F during the probability change game state ST3 (10% of the total jackpot), or without winning the jackpot during the probability change game state ST3. It is designed to transition by changing the special symbol 100 times.

At that time, as the effect display performed by the third symbol display device 81, for example, a big hit is won during the probabilistic game state ST3 (FIG. 68 (b)), and an effect of getting into the elevator (not shown) is started. Then, is the elevator going upstairs or downstairs during the jackpot game? After notifying (suggesting) which mode the player will shift to after the jackpot game is completed, the effect display in which the elevator reaches the rooftop is executed.

Further, in the case of shifting to the latent probability variation game state ST2 without winning the jackpot during the probability variation game state ST3, the effect shown in FIG. 68 (a) is continuously displayed until the special symbol changes 100 times, and every time. The current number of floors shown in the status display area increases by one floor for each change. Then, when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times and shifts to the "rooftop mode", the cursor displayed in the status display area shifts from "100F" to "rooftop" and shifts to "rooftop mode".

Next, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the "rooftop mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70A is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect in the latent probability variation game state ST2. FIG. 70B is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect when a small hit is won in the second special symbol in the latent probability variation game state ST2.

On the display screen of FIG. 70 (a), it is displayed that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the game status display area includes a right-handed display and the current game mode (game). The "rooftop mode (latent probability change game state ST2)" which is the state) is displayed. Also, in the status display area, the "rooftop" display is highlighted to notify that the main character has reached the rooftop.

Further, on the upper side of the display screen, "possession G (acquisition medium display)" is displayed as a value corresponding to the game ball acquired by the player. A plurality of treasure chests are displayed on the roof of the tower in the center of the display screen. This treasure chest is displayed so that it will be opened when the result of the special symbol game is a big hit or a small hit.

The acquisition medium display displayed on the upper side of the display screen is displayed corresponding to the game balls acquired in the flow of a series of games in the pachinko machine 10 (the flow from the first big hit to the transition to the normal game state ST1). It is a thing.

In the present embodiment, as the acquired medium display, a value corresponding to the total number of media acquired during the series of games is displayed. For example, it corresponds to the media acquired in the jackpot game during the series of games. The value and the value corresponding to the medium acquired in the small hit game may be displayed in a display mode in which the player can identify. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily grasp how the player has acquired the medium in a series of games. Further, when such a display is executed, if the value corresponding to the medium acquired in the small hit game satisfies a predetermined condition (the value corresponding to the medium that can be acquired in one big hit game), another value is obtained. It is preferable to display the display mode. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the medium equivalent to the big hit game has been acquired as a result of a plurality of small hit games.

On the display screen of FIG. 70 (b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at "123" indicating a small hit. Then, the first special symbol, which was changing at the same timing as the stop of the fluctuation of the second special symbol, is forcibly stopped and displayed at the wrong eye. In the center of the display screen, the selected treasure chest opens, and a treasure indicating a small hit appears from the inside.

FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect when a big hit is won in the second special symbol in the latent probability variation game state ST2. When a big hit is won in the second special symbol, one of the treasure chests displayed on the display screen of FIG. 70 (a) is opened during the fluctuation, and an effect in which a monster appears is displayed. Then, the battle with the monster starts during the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot game is notified (suggested) according to the result of the battle (not shown). For example, if you win the battle, you will reach the rooftop and shift to "rooftop mode". In addition, if you escape from the battle, you will be displayed to shift to the "tower search mode (1F)", and if you lose the battle, you will be directed to move to the "outdoor" stage (not shown).

As described above, in the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the effect that the story progresses is displayed for each mode corresponding to the game state, and the story is displayed according to the lottery result (big hit, small hit) of the special symbol. The results are configured to change. Then, since the player can grasp whether or not the current state is advantageous for the player just by looking at the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the game performance is more complicated than that of the conventional pachinko machine 10. There is an effect that the player can play the game without being confused even if he / she adopts (a game property that can acquire many game balls other than the jackpot game).

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 81. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the content of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed. The difference between the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 81. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 72A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment operates the small hit type selection table 202 g and the special electric accessory (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) with respect to the first embodiment. The difference is that the table 202h and the jackpot scenario 202i are added, and the values of the various counter values referred to in the various tables are changed, and the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. , The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first hit random number table 202a is different from the first embodiment in that the value set as the jackpot determination value is different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 (a).

The small hit random number table 202b is different from the first embodiment in that the conditions for determining small hits are changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 (b).

The second hit random number table 202c is different in that the values set as the hit determination values are different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 (c).

The jackpot type selection table 202d increases the jackpot type with respect to the first embodiment so that jackpots having different specific interval periods during the jackpot can be selected, and the jackpot type selection used in the time-saving gaming state ST1h. The difference is that the table D is newly provided. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75.

The variation pattern selection table 202e and the general map variation pattern selection table are different from the first embodiment in that the set variation time is changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79.

The small hit type selection table 202g is a table used when the small hit random number table 202b stabilizes with a small hit, and is a table in which the small hit type corresponding to each gaming state is selected. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (a).

The special electric accessory operation table 202h is a table in which the operation contents of the special electric accessory corresponding to the set jackpot type or small hit type are stored. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (b).

The jackpot scenario 202i is an area for storing a scenario selected when a jackpot is hit, and stores the timing and number of actions of the accessory during each jackpot. The jackpot scenario 202i is updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 85) and reset by the ending process 2 (S1730 in FIG. 86).

FIG. 72B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment has a small hit type selection table 202 g and a special electric accessory (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) operating table with respect to the first embodiment. The difference is that 202h is added and the values of various counter values referred to in various tables are changed, and other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. To do.

The jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is an area for setting (memorizing) the jackpot scenario updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 85), and is in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S254 in FIG. 82). , The jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set.

When the jackpot scenario is set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 in the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 87), the scenario counter 203c2 is updated by adding 1 to the ending process 2 (S1730 in FIG. 86). It is cleared at the same time as resetting the jackpot scenario.

The other memory area 203z includes other memory areas set in the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and at least the number of incoming balls counter 203j and the operation counter 203k shown in the first embodiment described above are included. , The notification counter 203m, the remaining ball timer flag 203n, and the remaining ball timer 203o are included, and are used in the same control as the first embodiment described above.

Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 73A. FIG. 73A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. The first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 199, and in a low probability gaming state, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is "7", the probability is high. In the game state, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is "7 to 9", it is determined that the first hit (big hit). That is, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability gaming state is "1/200", and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is "3/200". In both the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol used in the present embodiment, the winning determination is performed using the first random number table 202a.

The contents of the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). FIG. 73B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table 202b. In the present embodiment, the small hit is not won by the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1). On the other hand, in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the random number counter C1 per first is "10" in the low probability game state (low probability: no electric support, low probability: with electric support). If it is "~ 20", it is determined that it is a small hit, and in the high probability game state (high probability: no electric support, high probability: with electric support), the value of the random number counter C1 per first is "10 to 199". If there is, it is determined that it is a small hit. That is, the small hit probability by the first lottery game is "0/200", the small hit probability by the second lottery game in the low probability game state is "11/200", and the second lottery game in the high probability game state. The small hit probability is "190/200".

As a result, in the high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 and probability-changing gaming state ST3) in which the second lottery game is performed, the small hit game is frequently given. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (b), but the time when the second specific winning opening 650 is opened as a small hit game is the same in the latent probability variation game state ST2 and the probability variation game state ST3. The opening time and the ending time set as the small hit game are different, and the opening time and the ending time are set shorter for the small hit game in the latent probability variation game state ST2. That is, the opening time of the second specific winning opening 650 per unit time is longer in the latent probability changing game state ST2 than in the probability changing game state ST3. Therefore, the number of game balls that a player can acquire as a small hit game can be increased in the latent probability variation game state ST2 than in the probability variation game state ST3, and the player can acquire a game ball other than the jackpot game. It is possible to provide a game machine with unexpected surprises, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the first lottery game is set to 0%, but it may be set to, for example, about 10%, or the second lottery in the low probability game state. The probability of winning a small hit in a game is set to "11/200", but for example, it may be set to the same probability as the second lottery game in the high probability game state.

The contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (c). FIG. 73C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In the present embodiment, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 98" in the low probability gaming state. In the high probability gaming state, when the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is "0 to 99", it is determined that the second hit (per ordinary figure). That is, the probability of winning in the low-probability gaming state is "99/100", and the probability of winning in the high-probability gaming state is "100/100". If the player wins the prize, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a operates, and the game ball easily enters the second starting port 640 (special state). In the present embodiment, the probability of being the second hit is provided with a slight height difference between the high probability time and the low probability time, but the same probability may be used.

Next, the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 75. FIG. 74 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the jackpot type selection table A202d referred to in the normal game state ST1, and FIG. 74 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the jackpot type referred to in the probability variation game state ST3. It is a schematic diagram which shows the selection table B202d schematically. FIG. 75 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability variation game state ST2, and FIG. 75 (b) is a jackpot referenced in the time saving game state ST1h. The type selection table D202d.

The jackpot type selection table 202d is referred to when a jackpot is won as a result of lottery for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), and the type of special symbol won by the jackpot (first). Based on the 1 special symbol (special symbol 1) or the 2nd special symbol (special diagram 2)) and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the jackpot type is jackpot using the counter value acquired from the first hit type counter C2. It is selected from A to jackpot H.

The jackpot type selection table 202d used in the present embodiment has a point that the jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the time saving game state ST1h is added to the first embodiment described above, and the jackpot type to be selected is It differs in that it has increased, that the interval time of the jackpot game can be set according to the jackpot type, and that the ratio of the first hit type counter value assigned to each jackpot type has been changed, and other configurations. Are the same. The explanation of the same part will be omitted, and the difference will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the normal gaming state ST1, the ratio that the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes the high probability gaming state (high probability) is Interval time (specific interval time t4 in FIG. 67) and V operation (operation of switching member 65h) for each jackpot type so that the rate of becoming a low probability state (low probability) is 50% at 50%. , The presence or absence of electric support after the jackpot game is set. Specifically, an open pattern (V is possible) that controls the operation of the switching member 65h so that the game ball can pass (enter) the probability change switch 65e3 as a V operation according to the game state, and the game ball is the probability change switch 65e3. One of the open patterns (V not possible) that controls the operation of the switching member 65h is set so that it cannot pass (enter) the ball (difficult).

Further, if the V operation is V-enabled according to the game state as the interval time, the game ball is transferred to the first variable winning device 65 during the period during which the game ball can pass (enter) the probability change switch 65e3. "4 seconds (V possible)" that can win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and even if the V operation is V possible, the game ball is placed during the period when the game ball can pass (win) through the probability change switch 65e3. One of "1 second (V not possible)" that cannot be won (difficult) is set in the first specific winning opening 65 of the 1 variable winning device 65.

Then, it is set whether or not the electric support (100 times) is given after the jackpot game is completed. Regarding the granting of electric support, the game ball is granted regardless of whether the game ball passes (enters) or does not pass (enter) the probability change switch 65e3. For example, the electric support " When the jackpot type for which "Yes" is set is selected, when the game ball passes through (enters) the probability change switch 65e3, it shifts to the probability change game state (ST3) after the jackpot game ends, and the game ball temporarily switches the probability change switch 65e3. If it does not pass (enter the ball), it will shift to the time-saving game state (ST1h) after the jackpot game is completed.

In this way, the current jackpot type is selected from the jackpot types with different contents set according to the first hit type counter value acquired from the first hit type counter C2. For example, if a jackpot is won in Special Figure 1 during the normal game state ST1 and 50 is acquired as the first hit type counter value, the jackpot type E is selected. During the jackpot game provided by the jackpot type E, the game ball passes (enters) the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability variation game state ST3 is provided after the jackpot game is completed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot B, the jackpot D, and the jackpot H are set as the jackpot types in which the normal game state ST is selected after the jackpot game is completed. This means that regardless of whether "1 second" or "4 seconds" is selected as the interval time and "V possible" or "V not possible" is selected as the V operation, it is possible to shift to the normal game state ST1 after the jackpot game ends. It shows that there is sex. With this configuration, it becomes impossible (difficult) to grasp the game state after the jackpot game ends only by grasping the interval time and the contents of the V operation. Therefore, the player pays attention to the notification (suggestion) of the game state after the jackpot game, which is performed during the jackpot game (or the first special symbol change after the jackpot game ends), and the pachinko machine 10 is used. It has the effect of making people interested in the production display and suppressing the situation where they get bored of the game early.

Further, the distribution in which the V operation is "V possible" or "V not possible" differs only depending on the type of the special symbol, and is set so as not to be changed according to the game state. Specifically, in the first special symbol, the ratio of V operation being "V possible" is set to 90% and the ratio of being "V not possible" is set to 10%, and in the second special symbol, V operation is "V possible". The ratio of "V is not possible" is set to 0% and the ratio of "V is not possible" is set to 0%. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the V operation (operation of the switching member 65h) depending on the gaming state, so that the capacity for storing the operation instruction content for the first variable winning device 65 (switching member 65h) is reduced. Can be (can be two types). There is an effect.

Next, the selection of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (a). In the normal game state ST1, a game aiming at the first special symbol (left-handed game) is an appropriate game method that is advantageous for the player, but when an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed, the normal game state A game using the second special symbol is performed during ST1. As an inappropriate game, the RAM of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 is reset so as to shorten the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the long fluctuation (10 minutes) is set during the normal game state ST1. By receiving a lottery multiple times in a shorter time than the normally required fluctuation time, the player can shift to the latent probability change game state ST2, which is most advantageous for the player, without going through an appropriate game flow (see FIG. 66). Acts are possible. Assuming that such a game is performed, if a big hit is won by the second special symbol during the normal game state ST1, the big hit H is set to be selected. The jackpot H is a jackpot type that shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the jackpot game is completed.

Therefore, it is possible to give a penalty (penalty) to a player who plays an inappropriate game during the normal game state ST1. As for the penalty (penalty) to be executed for an inappropriate player, other than the above contents may be used. For example, during the normal game state ST1, a small hit is won with a second special symbol that is not a target of substantial fluctuation. If this is the case, the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the small hit game may be set as a special variation pattern, and at least the variation pattern in which the first special symbol is a long variation may be forcibly selected. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to continue the game substantially, and it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of an inappropriate game.

In addition, if a jackpot is won as a result of an inappropriate game, the operation content of the special electric accessory during the jackpot game is changed to the special operation content (difficult operation in which the game ball cannot be inserted into the specific winning opening). Contents) may be stored in advance in the ROM of the main control device 110.

In addition, for example, when the jackpot is won with the hold memory of the second special symbol and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the jackpot game is completed, the above-mentioned inappropriate game is performed unintentionally by the player. Since it may be broken, it may be executed only after a predetermined number of times (upper limit reserved memory number (4 pieces) of the second special symbol) after the end of the jackpot game, or the second start port 640 during the normal game state ST1. It may be executed only when the prize is won. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate (suppress) the penalty (penalty) for inappropriate games from being given to the player who is performing the normal game, and to give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Has the effect of being able to suppress.

Next, the jackpot type selection table B202d referred to in the probability variation game state ST3 will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (b). As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the probability variation game state ST3, the ratio that the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes the high probability gaming state (high probability) is At 10%, the rate of becoming a low probability state (low probability) is set to be 90%. This is because the game of special figure 1 in the probabilistic game state ST3 is an inappropriate game like the game of special figure 2 in the normal game state ST1, and therefore a penalty (penalty) is given to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in Special Figure 2, 70% of the game states are in the high-probability gaming state (high probability) after the jackpot game is completed, and 30% are in the low-probability state (low probability). It is set to be.

Next, the jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability variation game state ST2 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the latent probability variable gaming state ST2, the ratio of the gaming state after the jackpot game ends to the high probability gaming state (high probability). Is set to 30%, and the rate of becoming a low probability state (low probability) is set to 70%. This is because the game of special figure 1 in the latent probability changing game state ST2 is an inappropriate game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, and therefore a penalty (penalty) is given to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in Special Figure 2, 90% of the game states are in the high-probability gaming state (high probability) after the jackpot game is completed, and 10% are in the low-probability state (low probability). It is set to be.

Next, the jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the time saving game state ST1h will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the ratio that the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes the high probability gaming state (high probability) is At 95%, the rate of becoming a low probability state (low probability) is set to be 5%. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in Special Figure 2, the rate of the game state after the jackpot game ends is 5%, and the rate of the low probability state (low probability) is 95%. It is set to be. This is because the game of special figure 2 in the time-saving game state ST1h is an inappropriate game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, and therefore a penalty (penalty) is given to the player.

In this way, when a big hit is won in Special Figure 1 during the time-saving game state ST1h, even if the same low probability state is used, the game state after the big hit game is completed has a higher probability than the normal game state ST1. It is set so that it can shift to the game state. With this configuration, even if the player shifts to the low-probability state (falls), it is possible to provide a chance to shift to the high-probability gaming state (pullback chance) for a predetermined period. It has the effect of increasing the motivation of the player to play.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the transition ratio to the high-probability gaming state can be set according to the gaming state and the type of the special symbol, so that a wide variety of game playability can be achieved as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to provide the game, which has the effect of suppressing a situation in which the player gets bored at an early stage. It is also possible to give an appropriate penalty to a player who has performed an inappropriate game.

Next, a variation pattern selection table for selecting variation patterns in each gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time set for each fluctuation pattern is different from that of the first embodiment, and the others are the same. The same part will be omitted, and only the differences will be explained.

FIG. 76 is a schematic view showing the variation pattern selection table A referred to in the normal game state ST1. The normal game state ST1 is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In the present embodiment, as described above, a penalty can be given to an inappropriate game, so that the fluctuation time is set short.

FIG. 77 is a schematic view showing the variation pattern selection table B referred to in the time saving game state ST1h. In the time-saving game state ST1h, as in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the fluctuation time of various deviation fluctuation patterns of the special figure 1 is shortened. It differs from the first embodiment.

FIG. 78 (a) is a schematic view showing the variation pattern selection table C referred to in the latent probability variation game state ST2. In the latent probability change game state ST2, unlike the first embodiment, since the special figure 2 is the target of the actual change, the change time of the special figure 1 is changed to 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the change time of the special figure 2 is changed to 500 ms. It differs from the first embodiment described above in that it has been changed.

FIG. 78 (b) is a schematic view showing the variation pattern selection table D referred to in the probability variation game state ST3. The probabilistic gaming state ST3 is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the fluctuation time when the special figure 1 is off is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram showing a normal map variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation time of a normal symbol. This embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the number of types of ordinary symbols is one, and therefore the difference is that the number of ordinary symbols that refer to this table is one.

FIG. 80A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the small hit type selection table 202g. FIG. 80A is a small hit type selection table 202 g used when a small hit is obtained as a result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol game, so that a predetermined small hit is selected according to the game state. It is set. If the game state is a small hit during the normal game state ST1 or the time-saving game state ST1h, the small hit 1 is selected, and if the small hit is won during the probability change game state ST3, the small hit 2 is selected and the latent probability change. If a small hit is won during the game state ST2, the small hit 3 is selected. It should be noted that the small hit 1, the small hit 2, and the small hit 3 have different operating contents of the special electric accessory during the small hit game. The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (b).

Next, the operation contents of the special electric accessory (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) operated during the big hit game or the small hit game will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). FIG. 80B is a diagram schematically showing the special electric accessory operating table 202h. The operation content of the special electric accessory corresponding to the jackpot type is set by the special electric accessory operation table 202h.

First, the operation contents of the special electric accessory based on each jackpot type will be described. The same operation is set from jackpot A to jackpot E of the jackpot type, the opening time is 5 seconds, the number of rounds is 7, and the second variable winning device is from 1 round (R) to 4 rounds as the opening operation during the round. The 650 (top) opens for 29 seconds, and the first variable winning device 65 (bottom) opens for 29 seconds in the fifth round. Then, from the 6th round to the 7th round, the second variable winning device 650 (top) is set to open again for 29 seconds. The opening operation time during the round is set to 29 seconds, but the specific winning opening is set to be closed when 10 game balls win in the specific winning opening of each variable winning device during that period. Then, 2 seconds is set as the inter-round interval, 1 second is set as the inter-round specific interval (t4 in FIG. 67), and 5 seconds is set as the ending time.

The jackpot types E to H are different from the jackpots A to E described above in that the time of the specific interval between rounds is increased from 1 second to 4 seconds, and the same values are set for other items. .. By making the specific interval between rounds different in this way, as described with reference to FIG. 67, it is possible to set whether or not the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easy or difficult). There is. In this way, between specific rounds (a round in which the game ball is won in the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 and a round in which the game ball is won in the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65. By simply changing the interval time between (and), it is possible to set multiple percentages of jackpot games that can substantially pass through the probability change switch 65e3, providing players with various game characteristics and playing games. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the present embodiment, by changing the specific interval period t4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period t6 (see FIG. 67). However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, the ball-guided path passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball-guided path 72, may be switched. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V opening period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game is shown. For example, in the first round, the first variable winning device 65 1 In the case of a big hit game in which the specific winning opening 65a is open, the period of change according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1. With this configuration, for example, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball-guided route transit time, the right side is accompanied by the start of the jackpot game (start of the opening period t1). The struck game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period t6 and can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance path passing time, the game ball hit right with the start of the jackpot game becomes the first within the V valid period t6. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

In the present embodiment, the operation content of the special electric accessory set by the special electric accessory operation table 202h and the operation content of the switching member 65h corresponding to each jackpot type are set as a jackpot scenario. , Other configurations may be adopted. For example, the operation content of the switching member 65h may be set by the special electric accessory operation table 202h.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 having the probability change switch 65e3 is opened only once in the fifth round in one big hit game, but in one big hit game, the first The variable winning device 65 may be configured to be opened a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, the first variable winning device 65 may be configured to be in the open state in the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round.

With this configuration, the round before the round in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened can be changed to the round in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and during one jackpot game. It is possible to have a plurality (three) specific interval periods. Therefore, for each specific interval period, it is possible to set whether or not the game ball can reach the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 at the timing when the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. There is an effect that a person can have expectations multiple times during one big hit game.

When the above configuration is adopted, if the V operation is V-enabled (FIG. 74), that is, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, and at the same time, the switching member 65h is turned on for 2 seconds. In that case, it is determined whether the game ball is fired at a timing that allows it to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, and if the game ball is not fired at a timing that allows it to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, the player uses an appropriate game method. It is good to notify to.

Specifically, a detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided on the downstream side of the ball guidance path 72, it is determined that the passage of the game ball is detected within a specific interval period, and the third is based on the determination result. As a display for notifying the game method on the symbol display device 81, it is preferable to display contents explaining the game method such as "Don't stop right-handed hitting!" Or "If you keep firing, you have a chance to change!". By performing such a display, it is possible to support the game so that the player can play an appropriate game when the first variable winning device 65 is opened (5th round or 7th round). It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the playability.

The method for determining whether or not an appropriate game is being performed during the jackpot game is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and other methods may be used. For example, a method of determining that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball has been operated during the big hit game, or a method of detecting the amount of rotation of the handle and determining that the right-handed game is not performed is used. You may.

Further, the display content of the display for notifying (guidance) the game method may be changed based on the content of the winning jackpot. For example, if an appropriate game is performed, in the case of a big hit in which the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the display may be emphasized.

Further, a jackpot scenario in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened in consecutive rounds may be configured to be settable. By using such a configuration, even when the interval time is short, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, the variation can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible.

Next, the operation contents of the special electric accessory based on the small hit type will be described. There are small hit types 1 to 3 small hits, small hit 1 is a small hit selected when the game state is the normal game state ST1 or the time-saving game state ST1h, and small hit 2 is the probability change of the game state. This is a small hit selected in the case of the game state ST3. The small hit 3 is a small hit selected when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (see FIG. 80A).

Each small hit is set so that the opening time, the opening operation during the round, and the ending time are different. Specifically, the small hit 1 is set to have an opening time and an ending time of 7.5 seconds, and is set so that the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is repeated 6 times as the opening operation during the round. That is, the small hit 1 is set as a small hit in which high-speed opening is repeated, and the game ball rarely wins a prize in the specific winning opening during the small hit game (difficult).

Next, in the small hit 2, the opening time and the ending time are set to 7.5 seconds, which is the same as the small hit 1, but the opening operation of 1.8 seconds is performed once during the round. It is set. That is, in the small hit 2, the operation of the special electric accessory is set so that the game ball can win a prize in the specific winning opening.

Specifically, in the probability variation game state ST3 (see FIG. 80 (a)) in which the small hit 2 is selected, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit game of the small hit 2 is set. The time is set to 16.8 seconds (about 17 seconds), which is the sum of the opening time (7.5 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds), and the ending time (7.5 seconds). Assuming that the number of game balls to be won in the specific winning opening during the small hit game is 2, and the number of prize balls in the specific winning opening is 10, it is possible to obtain about 60 to 70 prize balls in one minute. It becomes.

Finally, the small hit 3 has the same opening operation as the small hit 2 during the round, but the opening time and the ending time are set to 0.3 seconds. That is, the period during which the specific winning opening is closed is set to be 10 times or more shorter than the small hit 2.

Specifically, in the latent probability variation game state ST2 (see FIG. 80 (a)) in which the small hit 3 is selected, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit of the small hit 3 is set. The game time is set to 2.4 seconds (about 2.5 seconds), which is the sum of the opening time (0.3 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds), and the ending time (0.3 seconds). If the number of game balls to be won in the specific winning opening during the small hit game is 2, and the number of prize balls in the specific winning opening is 10, it is possible to obtain about 480 prize balls in one minute. ..

That is, in the small hit 3, the operation of the special electric accessory is set so that the game ball can win a prize in the specific winning opening, and further, it is the time when the specific winning opening is not opened in the small hit game. By shortening the opening time and the ending time, it is possible to make the open state of the specific winning opening by the small hit game appear more frequently than the small hit 2. Therefore, it is possible for the player to acquire a large number of game balls, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. In addition, by adding another game property (a game property that waits for the game state to shift to the latent probability change game state ST2) to the game property that waits for the jackpot game to be executed as in the past, the player It is possible to provide a wide variety of effects, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, FIG. 81B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Since the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that an advantageous period flag 223 m and an advantageous information storage area 223 n are added, and other configurations are described. Is the same as that of the first embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The advantageous period flag 223m is a flag that is set to be on while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability gaming state, and is set to on when the gaming state becomes the high-probability gaming state, and the gaming state is changed. It is set to off when a low-probability gaming state is reached.

The advantageous information storage area 223n is an area for storing game information while the advantageous period flag 223m is set to ON (during the advantageous state). As the game information, the number of game balls acquired during the advantageous period and the number of big hits and small hits won during the advantageous period are stored. The information stored in the advantageous information storage area 223n is cleared when the advantageous period flag 223m is set to off.

By temporarily storing the number of game balls acquired by the player during the continuation of the high-probability game by using the advantageous period flag 223 m and the advantageous information storage area 223n described above, the acquired medium is displayed on the display screen during the latent probability change game state ST2. (See FIG. 70) can be displayed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86. Regarding the same processing as in the first embodiment, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted, and only the different control processing will be illustrated and described.

The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S254) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S254). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (FIG. 82, S254) is different from the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S204) in the first embodiment in that the process of S651 is added. .. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S609, the process of S651 is executed after the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is executed. In the process of S651, the jackpot scenario 202i (determined by the special electric accessory operation table) defined for the operation of the jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot type is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2. (S651).

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (FIG. 83, S257) is different in that the process of S1051 is added to the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 36, S207) in the first embodiment. .. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1009, the process of S1051 is executed after the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is executed. In the process of S1051, the jackpot scenario 202i defined for the operation of the jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot type is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 (S651).

Here, in the jackpot scenario, the operation for each time in the jackpot game is set. When the start of the jackpot game is set, the specific winning opening set in the jackpot scenario is opened and set after the opening period set in the jackpot scenario has elapsed. After that, when the closing condition (for example, until 10 balls are won or the opening time of 30 seconds elapses) is satisfied, the specific winning opening is closed, and after that, after the interval period set in the jackpot scenario elapses, the next The jackpot round is started, and the opening of the specific winning opening is set.

In the second embodiment, the jackpot scenarios are stored in the ROM 202 corresponding to the game state and the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and the corresponding jackpot scenario is selected. Here, even if the jackpot type is set with an open pattern that allows the game ball to enter the probability change switch 65e3, the game ball can be set to the probability change switch 65e3 by changing the opening period and the interval period. It can be set as a jackpot that can be entered and a jackpot that cannot be entered. As a result, depending on the jackpot game state, the jackpot type that can enter the probability change switch 65e3 can be regulated by the opening time or the interval time, so that the probability change ratio for each game state can be variably set.

In the normal game state ST1 in which the normal game method is set to allow the game ball to flow down the left flow path PA1 and the game ball to enter the first start port 630 to play the game, the right flow path PA2 When the game is played by letting the game ball flow down, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is easily opened. Therefore, when the game ball is flowed down to the left flow path PA1 and the game is played, the first starting port 630 is used. The game ball can be easily entered into the second starting port 640 rather than the game ball. It is advantageous for the player to play the game by letting the game ball flow down to the right flow path PA2 even in the normal game state because more chances of lottery in the second special symbol can be obtained. However, in the second embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the normal gaming state with the second special symbol, even if it is a big hit type that is opened in an open pattern that allows the ball to enter the probability change switch 65e3, it is set in the big hit scenario. Since the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a ends before the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 due to the interval period, it is possible to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3. It cannot be done, and the probability variation is not given to the player, that is, the probability variation ratio of the second special symbol is set to 0%. Therefore, even if the game is performed by letting the game ball flow down to the right flow path PA2 in the normal game state ST1, the disadvantage on the game store side can be suppressed.

Similarly, in each game state, even if the flow paths (left flow path PA1, right flow path PA2) for playing the game are set by design, the probability variation rate at the winning openings for entering balls in different flow paths is disadvantageous to the player. It can be set according to the jackpot scenario.

Next, the normal symbol variation process 2 (S156) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 2 (S156). The ordinary symbol variation processing 2 (S156) is different from the ordinary symbol variation processing (FIGS. 41 and S106) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1214 to S1215 are deleted. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Since the processes S1214 to S1215 in the first embodiment have been deleted, in the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of the second ordinary electric accessory 640a are twice per second regardless of the gaming state. An open pattern is set. Therefore, the opening pattern is always in a support state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 640, and it is configured so that the second starting port 640 can be easily set to win a prize when it is opened.

As a result, in the game state (time saving game state ST1h, latent probability change game state ST2, probability change game state ST3) in which the game ball is allowed to flow down the right flow path PA2, the game ball is moved to the second start port 640. You can get a lot of prizes. In the present embodiment, when the game ball is allowed to flow down the right flow path PA2, it is more difficult to win a prize at the first starting port 630 than when the game ball is caused to flow down the left flow path PA1. Therefore, it is possible to give priority to the second special symbol and change it to play the game, and it is possible to easily set the jackpot to be given to the player with the second special symbol.

Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1720) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1720). The jackpot control process 2 (S1720) differs from the jackpot control process (FIGS. 46 and S1604) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1621 to S1623 are changed to the processes S1721 to S1724. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

In the process of S1721, it is determined whether the jackpot scenario is set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 (S1721). When it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1721: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter d2 and updated (S1722). After that, the process of S1723 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1721 that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1721: No), this process is terminated. In the jackpot scenario, data corresponding to the scenario counter is set respectively, and the operation data corresponding to the current scenario counter is read and controlled.

In the process of S1723, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the current scenario counter is the data indicating the start of the opening (S1723). If the data indicates the start of the opening (S1723: Yes), the opening command is set (S1724). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1723, if it is determined that the opening is not started (S1723: No), the process of S1624 is executed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, since the start of the opening and the start timing of a new round can be determined by the jackpot scenario, the opening time and the interval time can be easily changed for each jackpot type. Can be controlled.

Next, the ending process 2 (S1730) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 2 (S1730). The ending process 2 (FIG. 86, S1730) is different from the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1656 to S1657 are changed to the processes of S1731 to S1733. In the second embodiment, even if the jackpot is given the probability variation game state, the jackpot type in which the upper limit of the number of times that the normal symbol is in the time saving state is set is set, so that the processing of S1731 (time saving counter 203t) is set. The timing of the process of setting 100 to 100) has been changed and set. Further, in the final process of the ending process 2 (S1730) for setting the process of ending the jackpot, the jackpot scenario set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is cleared to 0 and reset. Thereby, whether or not the jackpot game is in progress can be determined from the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2.

As described above, according to the second embodiment, the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the game state (normal game state ST1, time-saving game state ST1h, latent probability change game state). Since it is configured so that a plurality of ratios for transitioning to the high probability game state after the end of the jackpot game can be set based on ST2 and the probability change game state ST3), when the second lottery game that is not a substantial fluctuation target is performed in the normal game state ST1. It is possible to extremely reduce the rate of transition to the high-probability gaming state (0% in this embodiment). With this configuration, even if an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed, it does not shift to a state advantageous for the player (high probability game state), so that the illegal game targeting the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It has the effect of being able to be suppressed.

In the second embodiment, the jackpot type selection table 202d is used to select the jackpot type based on the type of the special symbol and the game state. For example, the jackpot type is selected based on the type of the special symbol. And the selection of the interval time based on the gaming state may be performed using another table. Specifically, in the jackpot type selection table 202d, the jackpot type is selected based on the type of the special symbol, and an interval time corresponding to the gaming state is used by using a different table (for example, the interval time type selection table). Select. Then, the jackpot control may be performed using the selected jackpot type and the interval time. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the types of jackpot types, and there is an effect that the capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the above-mentioned interval time type selection table, the gaming state and the interval time are associated with each other (in the case of a specific gaming state, a specific interval time is always selected), but a predetermined counter (for example, an interval) It may be configured so that a plurality of interval times can be selected based on the counter value of the time type counter). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the game playability more complicated, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the second embodiment has been described using a pachinko machine (simultaneous fluctuation type) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time, but it is adopted for other types of gaming machines. You may. Other types of gaming machines include, for example, a type of gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol change in the order in which they win a prize at the starting port, and a change in one special symbol causes the other special symbol. There are types of game machines, etc. that are executed with priority over fluctuations in.

Further, when the game ball wins a prize at the first starting opening, a winning lottery is performed, and when the lottery result is the first result, the first winning opening is operated so as to be able to win. During the first award game, the second award game that activates the second winning opening in a winning state when the lottery result is the second result, and the second award game, the second prize game Used for a game machine (1 type 2 type mixer) equipped with a third privilege game that operates the first winning opening in a state where a winning can be performed by passing a game ball through a specific area provided in the winning opening. You may.

The second embodiment is configured such that the game ball passes through the ball guidance path 72 only when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state, but is in the case where the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state. Also, the game ball that has passed through a specific path may be configured to pass through the ball guidance path 72. With such a configuration, the ball flow of the game ball on the game board 13 can be complicated, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

Further, the game ball that has passed through a specific route other than the ball guidance route 72 may be configured to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65. With such a configuration, the ball flow of the game ball on the game board 13 can be complicated, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

According to the second embodiment, two specific winning openings are provided in the flow path of the game ball, and the gaming ball passing through the specified winning opening on the upper side (upstream side) in the closed state is specified on the lower side (downstream side). A game in which the winning opening is reachable, and a delay guidance path is provided between the specific winning opening on the upper side (upstream side) and the specific winning opening on the lower side (downstream side) to delay the flow time of the game ball. In the machine, the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific winning opening on the downstream side is changed by changing the length of the specific interval period t4 (see FIG. 67) according to the game state (usually, probability change, latency, time reduction). Configure to be possible.

With this configuration, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball that has won the specific winning opening on the downstream side passes through the specific area (probability change switch 65e3) provided in the specific winning opening. It is configured so that the mode of the game state that shifts (sets) after the end of the jackpot game can be changed. It is possible to provide a jackpot game that can substantially pass through V and a jackpot game that cannot (difficultly) pass through V without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the main control device 110 during the jackpot game can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment described above, the operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (switching member 65h) is performed according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol). (Motion control that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 and motion control that cannot pass (difficult)) are set, and the length of the specific interval period t4 is set according to the game state when the jackpot is won. Since it is configured as such, it is possible to set a plurality of ratios of jackpot games that can substantially pass through the probability change switch 65e3, provide various game characteristics to the player, and improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to.

In the present embodiment, by changing the specific interval period t4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period, but other than that. The configuration of may be adopted. For example, the ball-guided path passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball-guided path 72, may be switched. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V opening period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game is shown. For example, in the first round, the first variable winning device 65 1 In the case of a big hit game in which the specific winning opening 65a is open, the period of change according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1. With this configuration, for example, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball-guided route transit time, the right side is accompanied by the start of the jackpot game (start of the opening period t1). The struck game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period t6 and can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance path passing time, the game ball hit right with the start of the jackpot game becomes the first within the V valid period t6. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

Further, when different times can be set as the specific interval time, the time of the predetermined interval period after the specific interval period is set so as to cancel the difference of the specific interval time during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game is performed. It is preferable to configure the sum of the interval times in the above to match. With this configuration, for example, the time used for each process performed using the interval period when the amount of information processing is small during the big hit game can be unified, and stable processing can be executed. It has the effect of becoming.

In the present embodiment, the ball guidance path 72 (delayed guidance path) is provided so that the ball guidance path passage time becomes (delays) a predetermined time, but the inlet (opening 70a) and the exit (discharge section 70e) of this path are provided. ), A detection means (sensor) for detecting the passage of the game ball may be provided, and a means for determining (monitoring) whether the game ball is passing within a predetermined time may be provided. By using such a configuration, it is possible to easily detect a ball clogging that occurs in the ball guiding path 72 and a fraudulent act that intentionally causes the game ball to stay in the guiding path using a magnet or a ball with a thread. It has the effect of being possible.

The first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the ball guidance path 72 (see FIG. 65) used in the second embodiment may be used in the following game machines. .. That is, the number of rounds of the jackpot game has a first round number (for example, 12 rounds) and a second round number (for example, 15 rounds), and the first to twelfth rounds are variable prizes provided on the upper side of the game board 13. The device (second variable winning device 650) is opened, and from the 13th round to the 15th round, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65) provided on the lower side of the game board 13 is opened. It may be used for a game machine.

By using the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the ball guidance path 72 used in the second embodiment for such a game machine, the launched game ball is wasted. It is possible to entertain the production during the jackpot game by using a specific interval time between specific rounds (between the 12th and 13th rounds).

Specifically, at the end of the 12th round, the second variable winning device 650 is closed, and the game ball flows down to the ball guidance path 72. Since the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guidance path 72 is set to 3 to 4 seconds (see FIG. 65), the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a of the ball guidance path 72 is the first variable winning device. It takes at least 3 seconds to reach 65.

Using the time (arrival time) required for the game ball to reach the first variable winning device 65, a production between rounds (a production that fuels whether this jackpot game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot) By doing this, even if you continue the right-handed game, you can eliminate (reduce) useless game balls (game balls that do not win in the specific winning opening of the variable winning device even though you are hitting the jackpot). is there.

That is, if the above-mentioned effect during the jackpot game is executed by a game machine having one variable winning device, the variable winning device is passed during the specific interval time (the specific winning opening of the variable winning device is closed). The game ball cannot win a prize in the specific winning opening even during the big hit game, and becomes a useless game ball. In addition, if the specific interval time is shortened in order to reduce unnecessary game balls, the production that is executed between specific rounds (the production that fuels whether this jackpot game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot). There is a problem that the effect is weakened.

On the other hand, when the above-mentioned effect during the jackpot game is executed by the game machine using the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball guidance path 72 that allows the game ball to flow down when the second variable winning device 650 is closed is provided. Since the effect during the specific interval time using the time (3 to 4 seconds) when the game ball flows down is performed, it is possible to suppress the wasted ball generated during the big hit and the effect executed between the specific rounds (this big hit). There is an effect that the effect of (directing to incite whether the game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot) can be strengthened.

If the interval time between specific rounds is set shorter than the time during which the game ball flows down the ball guidance path 72, the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 reaches the first variable winning device 65. Since the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state, it is possible to prevent unnecessary game balls from being generated.

As an effect in this case, it is conceivable to divert the display data displayed in the ending period of the 12-round jackpot and display it at the specific interval time of the 15-round jackpot. By adopting such an effect, it is possible to reduce the amount of display data and make the player think that it is a 12-round jackpot, and when the 13th round is started, the player can be made to think. It has the effect of being able to provide surprise and joy.

In addition, a detection means for detecting a game ball flowing down in the ball guidance path 72 is provided, and when the detection means detects a game ball during a specific interval period, this jackpot is a 15-round jackpot (the jackpot is still). (Continued) may be notified. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the act of stopping the firing of the game ball during the interval period during the jackpot game can be suppressed.

Further, the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined as follows. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged in parallel, and the game ball meanders horizontally from the second variable winning device 650 toward the first variable winning device 65. A configuration provided with a guidance path for guiding the player may be used for the following game machines. That is, a variable winning device (for example, 12 rounds) and a second round (for example, 15 rounds) are provided as the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the first to twelfth rounds are provided on the upstream side. The second variable winning device 650) is opened, and from the 13th round to the 15th round, the variable winning device (1st variable winning device 65) provided on the downstream side is opened, and the jackpot game is executed. May be good.

In this configuration, when the variable winning device provided on the upstream side is closed, the game ball rolls on the guidance path and is guided to the variable winning device on the downstream side. This guidance path is configured to meander in the horizontal direction so that a predetermined time (time equal to or longer than the interval period, for example, 3 seconds) is required for the game ball to pass. A plurality of opening patterns are set for the upstream variable winning device and the downstream variable winning device so that they are opened in a predetermined order during one jackpot game, and the opening patterns are set according to the type of jackpot. Is set.

Then, the opening / closing status of each variable winning device can be displayed by the display means. That is, the player can grasp the situation in which the variable winning device is closed by checking the display means. However, it is displayed so that it cannot be determined whether the closing status is the interval period (during the jackpot) or the ending period (end of the jackpot).

By using such a configuration, for example, it is shown that the variable winning device is closed to the display means in the interval period when the variable winning device on the upstream side is closed and then the variable winning device on the downstream side is opened. By displaying the effect (closed effect) by the display means, the player plays the game while expecting whether the jackpot game is over or still to be continued. Then, when the interval period ends and the variable winning device on the downstream side is opened, at the same time, an effect (opening effect) indicating that the variable winning device is opened is displayed on the display means. At the timing when this opening effect is displayed on the display means, the game ball rolling on the guidance path has not reached the variable winning device on the downstream side (the time required to pass through the guidance path rather than the interval time). (Because it is longer), while the closing effect is being executed (while the variable winning device on the upstream side is closed), the game ball that rolls the guidance path is surely won in the variable winning device on the downstream side. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the waste of the game ball while executing the effect indicating the closure of the variable winning device in the big hit game. When using such a configuration, it is advisable to prepare a plurality of types of opening patterns for each variable winning device in the jackpot game.

A modification 1 of the second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 87.

<Modification 1 of the second embodiment>
In the first modification, the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from that of the second embodiment described above, and gameability different from that of the second embodiment described above is provided. Specifically, as will be described later, in this modified example, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state ST1 and the game shifts to the probability variation game state ST3, the value is high only for a predetermined period (during 100 rotations) after the jackpot game ends. It has a game property (so-called two-time loop) in which a jackpot is won at least twice while maintaining a stochastic game state.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flow in which various gaming states in this modified example are set. In this modification 1, the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from that of the second embodiment described above. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, since the distribution is the same as in the second embodiment described above during the normal game state ST1, the description thereof will be omitted. Next, the distribution of jackpots in the probabilistic gaming state ST3 will be described.

During the probability change game state ST3, the actual fluctuation target is set in the special figure 2, and if the big hit is won in the special figure 2, there is a 100% probability of the high probability game state (probability change game state ST3 or latent probability change game state ST2). Move to. In addition, this probabilistic game state ST3 does not win the jackpot, and if the fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric support ends and the game shifts to the latent probabilistic game state ST2. While staying in the probability fluctuation game state ST3 (until the end of the electric support), the person will play the game while paying attention to win the next big hit.

Next, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the distribution is set so that the pullback jackpot that shifts to the probability variation game state ST3 is 34%, and the jackpot that shifts to the time saving game state ST1h (falls) is 66%.

Next, in the time-saving game state ST1h, the distribution is set so that the pullback jackpot that shifts to the probability variation game state ST3 is 75% and the jackpot that shifts to the normal game state ST1 (falls) is 25%. At this time, in the short game state ST1h, if the special symbol fluctuates more than 100 times without winning the jackpot, the electric support ends and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. By winning the jackpot during this period, the distribution is set so that the ratio of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state ST3, which is the high-probability gaming state, is higher than that of the normal gaming state ST1 which is the same low-probability state.

As described above, in the present modification 1, once the low probability state (normal game state ST1) is changed to the high probability game state (probability change game state ST3), the special symbol fluctuation 100 after a predetermined period (after the big hit). Only up to 2 times), then 2 big hits are guaranteed while maintaining the high probability game state. Therefore, the player is not satisfied only with the transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability game state, and then has the purpose of winning a big hit within a predetermined period in the special symbol game performed in the high-probability game state. The game can be continued. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A modified example 2 of the second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 88.

<Modification 2 of the second embodiment>
In the second modification, the upper limit number (110 times) is set for the number of games (variation number) in the high-probability gaming state, and the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from the second embodiment described above. , The game property different from that of the second embodiment described above is provided. Specifically, as will be described later, in this modified example, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state ST1 and the game shifts to the probability variation game state ST3, a specific period (high probability game) after a predetermined period has passed after the jackpot game is completed. Only during the latent probability change game state ST2 in which the electric support is completed), the game property (so-called two-time loop) in which the jackpot is won at least twice while maintaining the high-probability game state. It is equipped. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flow in which various gaming states are set in this modified example. In this modification 2, the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from that of the second embodiment described above. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, since the distribution is the same as in the second embodiment described above during the normal game state ST1, the description thereof will be omitted. Next, the distribution of jackpots in the probabilistic gaming state ST3 will be described.

In this modification 2, the high-probability gaming state is set to shift (fall) to the low-probability state when the special symbol fluctuates 110 times without winning the jackpot. In this probability variation game state ST3, the actual fluctuation target is set in the special figure 2, and if the big hit is won in the special figure 2, the probability variation game state ST3 is set again with a probability of 70% and is low with a probability of 30%. Move to the stochastic state. This probabilistic game state ST3 shifts to the latent probabilistic game state ST2 when the electric support ends when the fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot.

Next, in the latent probability change game state ST2, after the jackpot ends, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starts from the 101st rotation, and the high probability game state shifts (falls) to the low probability state until the 110th rotation. It is a game state executed in. If a big hit is won during this latent probability changing game state ST2, there is a 100% probability of shifting to a high probability gaming state (probability changing gaming state ST3 or latent probability changing gaming state ST2).

Next, in the time-saving game state ST1h, the distribution is set so that the pullback jackpot that shifts to the probability variation game state ST3 is 90% and the jackpot that shifts to the normal game state ST1 (falls) is 10%. At this time, in the short game state ST1h, if the special symbol fluctuates more than 100 times without winning the jackpot, the electric support ends and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. By winning the jackpot during this period, the distribution is set so that the ratio of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state ST3, which is the high-probability gaming state, is higher than that of the normal gaming state ST1 which is the same low-probability state.

As described above, in the present modification 2, the low probability state (normal game state ST1) is temporarily shifted to the high probability game state (probability change game state ST3), and then the number of fluctuations is a predetermined number of times (after the big hit). Only for a specific period (latent probability change game state ST2) after the lapse of (up to 100 special symbol fluctuations), two jackpots are guaranteed while maintaining the high probability game state. Therefore, the player is not satisfied only with the transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability gaming state, and thereafter, in the special symbol game performed in the high-probability gaming state, the player does not win within the predetermined period and after the predetermined period elapses. You can continue the game with the purpose of winning a big hit during a specific period of. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A modified example 3 of the second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 89.

<Modification 3 of the second embodiment>
In the third modification, a shortened path 75 is provided as another path in the ball guiding path 72 provided in the front view right side region of the game board 13 of the second embodiment described above, and the flowing game ball is guided by the ball. A distribution mechanism 75a that divides the shortened path 72 into a shortened path 75, a path that guides the game ball that has flowed down the shortened path 75 to the first variable winning device 65, and a path that guides the game board 13 to the area below the front view of the game board 13. It differs in that it is provided with a distribution mechanism 75b. Other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 89 is an enlarged view of a region on the right side of the front view of the game board 13 of the third modification. In this modification, the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state is alternately distributed to the ball guidance path 72 and the shortened path 75 by the distribution mechanism 75a. Here, the distribution mechanism 75a is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and the rotation range (rotation angle) is regulated by the rotation regulation member. Since the game balls distributed to the ball guidance path 72 flow down the same path as in the second embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, the shortened path 75 is configured so that the trajectory of the ball is more linear than that of the ball guiding path 72, so that at least the game ball distributed to the ball guiding path 72 first reaches the discharge unit 70e. In order to quickly discharge from the shortened path 75, the time for the game ball to pass through the shortened path is set to 2 seconds. By providing the flow paths of the game balls having different shapes in this way and distributing the game balls to any of the paths by the distribution mechanism, it is possible to intentionally change the flow order of the game balls on the game board 13. (It is possible to let the game board 13 flow down in an order different from the order in which it was fired).

By using such a configuration, for example, when the game ball that first passed through the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the shortening path 75 in the specific interval period, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. If it becomes possible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 within the period, while the game ball that first passed through the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the ball guidance path 72, the probability change switch. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to make the game ball win the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 within the period during which the game ball can pass through 65e3.

Therefore, whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 can be determined depending on which route the game ball flows down, so that the player is provided with the game property of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 by himself / herself. This has the effect of preventing the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in this modification, a distribution mechanism 75b is provided for guiding the game ball flowing down the shortened path 75 to the first variable winning device 65 and a path for guiding the game ball to the area below the front view of the game board 13. ing. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball flowing down the shortened path 75 is guided to the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the flow path of the game ball on the game board 13 can be further complicated, and the player can enjoy the flow of the game ball.

Further, even if a distribution mechanism in which the distribution destination is determined in a predetermined order is used as in this modification, a plurality of distributions are made by the time the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 having the probability change switch 65e3. Since the mechanism distributes the game to a plurality of flow paths, it is possible to make it difficult to set the state of each distribution mechanism using the launched game balls so that the distribution destinations are predetermined.

Further, when the first variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down the ball guidance path 72 flows down on the first variable winning device 65, comes into contact with the distribution mechanism 75b, and rotates the distribution mechanism 75b. While changing the state, it flows down toward the bottom of the game board. As a result, the rotational state of the distribution mechanism 75b is constantly changing.

In this modification, only the game ball that has flowed down the shortened path 75 reaches the distribution mechanism 75b, but the game ball that has flowed down the ball guidance path 72 may also reach the distribution mechanism 75b. Further, a distribution mechanism 75c (not shown) that distributes only the game balls that have flowed down the ball guidance path 72 may be separately provided. With such a configuration, the flow path of the game ball can be further complicated, the player can enjoy the flow of the game ball, and the player passes through, for example, the closed second variable winning device 650. Which route the game ball will be distributed to by using it in a pachinko machine that determines whether or not the game ball will win the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 during the period when the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to change the possibility of entering the probabilistic gaming state.

Further, since a plurality of distribution mechanisms are provided on the path through which the game ball flows down during a right-handed game other than during the jackpot game, the distribution of each distribution mechanism is performed when the game is performed by passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3. It becomes difficult to adjust the position in advance, and it becomes possible to make the game result random.

In this modification, a distribution mechanism for distributing the game ball in two directions is used, but a distribution mechanism for distributing the game ball in three or more directions may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the ball flow of the game ball more complicated, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

Further, in this modification, a mechanism for physically distributing the game ball is used as the distribution mechanism, but other configurations may be used. For example, a lottery is performed based on passing through a predetermined area, and the lottery result is obtained. A means for determining the distribution direction may be provided.

Further, in this modification, the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state reaches the distribution mechanism 75a, but is located upstream of the second variable winning device 650 (the game ball is the second). The area before reaching the variable winning device 650) may be configured to reach the sorting device 75a. In this case, the game balls sorted in a predetermined direction by the sorting device 75a are the second variable winning device. A game ball that has flowed down toward a device and has been distributed in a direction other than a predetermined direction separately passes through a specific flow path (for example, a shortened path 75 or a ball guidance path 72), and a game ball that has passed through the specific flow path. The distribution mechanism 75b may be configured to distribute the game ball route to reach the first variable winning device and other routes. With this configuration, it is possible to make the game balls distributed by the distribution mechanism 75a in directions other than the second variable winning device 650 direction reach the first variable winning device 65 side by the distribution mechanism 75b. ..

With this configuration, the game ball that has not won the second variable winning device 650 in the open state may be distributed to the first variable winning device 65 in the open state so that the player can win the prize. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness.

By configuring the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 so as not to notify the player of the timing when the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is opened during the jackpot game, the player moves the game ball on the game board. There is an effect that the game can be enjoyed while observing the opening / closing status of each variable winning device.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured in whole or in combination thereof.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Feature A group> (Twice loop configuration)
A state setting means capable of setting at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and a privilege advantageous to the player are given based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In a gaming machine having at least a privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. If the first privilege game is executed in this state, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and if the second privilege game is executed, the first privilege game is executed. The second advantageous state is set after the execution of the second privilege game, and when the first privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the first privilege is set. The gaming machine A1 characterized in that the first advantageous state is set after the execution of the game.

At least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, at least the first privilege game that gives the player an advantageous privilege and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game are executed by the privilege game execution means. When the first privilege game is executed while the first advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege is set. When the game is executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed while the second advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the first privilege game. As a result, even after the first privilege game is executed in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set, so that the advantageous state for the player can be continuously set. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of privilege games are executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the game machine A1, the privilege game execution means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means is the first advantageous state. It is possible to set a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, and when the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the third privilege game is executed. The gaming machine A2, characterized in that the specific state is set after the execution of the third privilege game.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means. When the third privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the third privilege game. As a result, in the second advantageous state, a specific gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player is set when the third gaming state is executed, so that the continuous state of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the gambling of the game becomes too high.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that the first advantageous state is a game state that is more favorable to the player than the second advantageous state.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more favorable to the player than the second advantageous state, so that the advantage given to the player is excessive. It has the effect of suppressing becoming.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the improvement that facilitates the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means. A game machine A4 characterized by having means.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the privilege game is improved by the privilege game execution means. This makes it easier to execute, so that there is an effect that the player can be expected to execute the privilege game.

In either the game machine A1 or A4, the starting condition determining means capable of determining the establishment of the first starting condition and the second starting condition different from the first starting condition, and the starting condition determining means thereof. , The lottery means for executing a lottery based on the determination that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, and the privilege game execution means is a specific lottery by the lottery means. The gaming machine A5, characterized in that the privileged game is executed based on the determination that the result has been established.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of either the game machine A1 or A4, the following effect is played. That is, the establishment of the first starting condition and the second starting condition different from the first starting condition is determined by the starting condition determining means. The lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the determination that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied by the start condition determination means. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the determination that the specific lottery result is established by the lottery means. As a result, it is possible to expect the player to satisfy the first starting condition and the second starting condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the gaming machine A3 or A4 has a regulating means for restricting the establishment of the second starting condition when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3 or A4, when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means, the establishment of the second starting condition is regulated by the regulation means, so that the player can use it. There is an effect that a disadvantageous state can be easily set.

In any of the game machines A3 to A5, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the first starting condition and the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the second starting condition are shown. Each of the two identification information has a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display means can dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information at the same time. A game machine A6 characterized by being configured.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A3 to A5, the following effect is played. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the second start condition are displayed by the dynamic display means, respectively. Dynamically displayed in the means. The first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means at the same time. As a result, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be efficiently executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

The game machine A7 is characterized in that the game machine A5 or A6 has a release means for releasing the regulation by the regulation means based on the setting of the specific advantageous state by the setting means.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A5 or A6, the regulation by the regulation means is released by the release means based on the setting of a specific advantageous state by the setting means. There is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific advantageous state will be set.

A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game execution means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means are set. And the control means for facilitating the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means even when the privilege game is executed next based on the setting means for setting the advantageous state. A game machine A8 characterized by having.

According to the game machine A8, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game execution means is set by the setting means. Based on the fact that the advantageous state is set by the setting means, even when the privilege game is executed next time, the advantageous state is easily set by the control means by the setting means, so that the advantageous state can be combined into a plurality of privilege games. It can be set continuously across. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic B group> (Switch between advantage and disadvantage and prevent disadvantage side)
The first lottery game is played based on the first entrance where the game ball can enter, the second entrance which is different from the first entrance, and the first entrance. A lottery game execution means for executing and executing a second lottery game based on entering the ball into the second entrance, and a second lottery game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first lottery game. A switching means for switching between one state and a second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game based on a predetermined opportunity, and a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by having a suppressing means for suppressing the execution of the game.

According to the game machine B1, the first lottery game is executed by the lottery game execution means based on the fact that the ball has entered the first ball entrance. Further, the second lottery game is executed by the lottery game execution means based on the fact that the ball is entered into the second ball entrance different from the first ball entrance. The first state in which the second lottery game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first lottery game and the second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game are switched based on a predetermined opportunity by the switching means. Be done. The restraining means suppresses the execution of the lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means. As a result, the execution of the lottery game on the disadvantage side is suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the player can easily execute the advantageous lottery game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that gives a significant disadvantage to the player.

In the game machine B1, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means, and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means. It has a dynamic display means and a dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic period determining means has a longer dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that has been disadvantageously switched by the switching means than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that has been advantageously switched. A game machine B2 characterized in that it facilitates determination of a dynamic display period.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. Further, the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. The dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that is disadvantageously switched by the switching means is dynamically displayed as the dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that is advantageously switched. It is easy to determine by means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the unfavorably switched game from being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can determine the game that is set advantageously.

The game machine B1 or B2 has a launching means capable of launching the game ball into the game area, and an adjusting means for adjusting the launching force of the game ball launched by the launching means based on the operation of the player. The first entrance and the second entrance are arranged at positions where the game ball launched from the launching means can enter while the player performs the same operation on the adjusting means. A game machine B3 characterized by being a machine.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effect is played. That is, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means. The firing force of the game ball launched by the launching means is adjusted by the adjusting means based on the operation of the player. The first entrance and the second entrance are arranged at positions where the game ball launched from the launching means can enter while the player performs the same operation on the adjusting means. As a result, the player can execute the lottery game that is advantageous to the player without changing the operation of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be made easier.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, the player has a privilege giving means for giving a privilege to the player. The privilege granting means is set to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game than in the first lottery game. A game machine B4 characterized by.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B1 to B3, the following effects are played. That is, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, the player is given a privilege by the privilege giving means. When a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game than in the first lottery game, the rate of granting benefits that is advantageous to the player is set higher. As a result, when the game in the second lottery game is set in favor of the player, a state more advantageous to the player can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

In the game machine B4, the privilege granting means is either the first privilege or the second privilege which is more advantageous than the first privilege as the privilege when the specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that one of them is given, and the switching means switches to the second state based on the fact that the second privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4, the following effects are played. That is, when a specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game, either the first privilege or the second privilege which is more advantageous than the first privilege is given as a privilege by the privilege giving means. Based on the fact that the second privilege has been granted by the privilege granting means, the switching means switches to the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be changed.

In the game machine B4 or B5, the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means includes the first lottery game or the second lottery game until a specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the ratio of the setting privileges set so as to facilitate a specific lottery result is set higher than the privilege for the first lottery game.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4 or B5, the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege giving means includes the first lottery game or the first lottery game until a specific condition is satisfied. Since the ratio of the setting privilege set so that the second lottery game is likely to be the specific lottery result is set higher than the privilege for the first lottery game, the second lottery game is executed. This has the effect of improving the expectations of the player.

The game machine B6 is characterized in that the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege giving means is configured to at least give the set privilege. B7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B6, at least the set privilege is given to the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege giving means. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation that the second lottery game is executed can be raised.

In any of the game machines B1 to B7, the first flow path through which the game ball can flow, the second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first entry port are the first flow path. The gaming machine B8, which is arranged in each of the second flow paths, and the second entry port is arranged in the second flow path.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B7, the first entry port is arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively, and the second entry port is the first. Since it is arranged in two flow paths, there is an effect that it is possible to set a state in which only the first lottery game is executed.

In any of the game machines B1 to B8, when the lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, the suppressing means notifies the notification information indicating that the lottery game that is disadvantageous is being executed. A game machine B9 characterized by this.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B8, the suppressing means means that the disadvantageous lottery game is executed when the lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed. Since the notification information to be shown is notified, there is an effect that the player can play the game more easily.

A game machine B10 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B1 to B9, the lottery game execution means is configured to be able to execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game at the same time.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B9, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are simultaneously executed by the lottery game execution means, so that the game can be efficiently performed. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic C group> (Electric chew configuration)
The first lottery is executed based on the first entry port where the game ball can enter, the second entry opening different from the first entry opening, and the entry into the first entry opening. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, the lottery means for executing the second lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, and the first entrance. A variable means that can be changed between a first state that regulates ball entry and a second state that makes ball entry easier than the first state, a judgment means that executes a judgment based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a judgment thereof. When a specific determination result is determined by the means, the variable control means for changing the variable means from the first state to the second state, and the second entry port based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The gaming machine C1 is characterized by having a regulating means for regulating entry of a ball or regulating the execution of the second lottery.

According to the game machine C1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the ball has entered the first entrance. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, the second lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, is executed by the lottery means. It is variable by the variable means to a first state that regulates the entry of the ball into the first entry port and a second state that makes it easier to enter the ball than the first state. When a specific determination result is determined by the determination means that executes the determination based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the variable means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable control means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, the regulation means regulates the entry of the ball into the second entrance or the execution of the second lottery. Thereby, the advantageous state and the unfavorable state for the player can be set by the regulatory means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be given a change in the interest and the interest can be improved.

In the game machine C1, the second entry port is arranged below the first entry port, and when the variable means is in the second state, the second entry port is entered by the variable means. The regulation means is arranged so as to prevent the flow of the game ball flowing down the ball flow path, and the regulating means is set so that the variable means can be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, whereby the second entry ball. A game machine C2 characterized in that it regulates entry into the mouth.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, the second entrance is arranged below the first entrance. When the variable means is in the second state, the variable means is arranged so as to prevent the flow of the game ball flowing down the flow path entering the second entry port. By setting the variable means to be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, the ball entering the second ball entry port is regulated by the regulating means. As a result, it is possible to regulate the entry of the ball into the second entry port with a simple configuration. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the configuration of the game machine from becoming complicated.

The game machine C1 or C2 has a first flow path through which the game ball can flow down and a second flow path different from the first flow path thereof, and the first ball entry port is the first flow path. The gaming machine C3 is arranged in each of the second flow path and the second flow path, and the variable means is arranged in the first entry port arranged in the second flow path.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the first ball entry port is arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively. Since the variable means is arranged at the first entry port arranged in the second flow path, there is an effect that the game ball flowing down the second flow path can be easily entered into the first entry port.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery, and the dynamic display thereof. The first identification information dynamically displayed by the means and the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information are provided, and the regulating means operates on the second identification information. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the execution of the second lottery is regulated by facilitating the determination of a long dynamic display period as the target display period by the dynamic display period determining means.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, the following effect is played. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. By facilitating the determination of a long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period for the second identification information by the dynamic display period determining means, the execution of the second lottery is regulated by the regulating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution can be restricted to the second lottery with a simple configuration.

<Feature D group> (Continuous up configuration)
Based on the first entry port where the game ball can enter, the second entry port different from the first entry opening, and the game ball entering the first entry opening, the first A lottery means for executing a lottery and executing a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, and the first lottery. A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result on the display means and dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery on the display means, respectively. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means, and the second identification information by the dynamic display determining means. As the dynamic display period, a long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined and a short state in which a dynamic display period shorter than the long state is easily determined are set. A setting means capable of this, and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode. As a privilege given to the player by the privilege giving means, at least the first privilege and the second privilege given less than the first privilege based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery. When either the privilege determining means for determining either the privilege and the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, the other identification information is dynamically displayed. If it is displayed, the first stop display means for displaying the dynamic display in a stop display mode different from the specific stop display mode, and the first when the long state is set by the setting means. The gaming machine D1 having a setting means for facilitating the determination of the second privilege by the privilege determining means in a lottery.

According to the game machine D1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, the second lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, is executed by the lottery means. The first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. A long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined as a dynamic display period of the second identification information by the dynamic display period determining means, and a dynamic state shorter than the long state. A short state in which the display period is easily determined is set by the setting means. When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given to the player by the privilege giving means. As the privilege given to the player by the privilege giving means, at least the first privilege and the second privilege which is given less than the first privilege based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery. Either one is determined by the privilege determination means. If either the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, and the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is changed to the specific stop display mode. A stop display mode different from the above is stopped and displayed by the stop display means. When the long state is set by the setting means, the second privilege is easily set by the privilege determining means in the first lottery. As a result, the player can be expected to execute the second privilege with less privilege. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

The game machine D1 has a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states based on a predetermined condition, and the setting means is set with a specific game state by the game state setting means. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that, on condition that the second privilege is easily determined by the privilege determining means in the first lottery.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, one game state from a plurality of game states is set by the game state setting means based on a predetermined condition. On condition that a specific game state is set by the game state setting means, the second privilege is easily determined by the privilege determining means in the first lottery. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more expected to determine the second privilege when a specific gaming state is set.

In the game machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the setting means for setting the advantageous state in which the privilege is easily given by the privilege giving means and the setting means set the advantageous state. The gaming machine D3 is characterized by having a control means for facilitating the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means even when the privilege is next granted based on the above.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily given by the privilege giving means is set by the setting means. Based on the fact that the advantageous state is set by the setting means, even when the next privilege is given by the control means, the advantageous state can be easily set by the setting means, so that the advantageous state can be set across a plurality of benefits. It can be easily set and has the effect of further improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic E group> (Set low non-priority probability variation rate)
A first variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the second variable ball entry means arranged in, a specific area in which the game ball entered in the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the game ball passing through the specific area, the player A predetermined variable pattern of the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition and a privilege-giving means for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player. The variable pattern determined by the determination means includes a variable control means that is variable by the above and a determination means that determines the variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. An advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means when the 1 variable ball entry means is in the closed state can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine E1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine E1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on the operation of the player, a first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball launched from the launching means, and the first ball entering means thereof. A second ball entry means different from the above, a ball entry assisting means that enables the game ball to enter the second ball entry means more easily than the first ball entry means, and the first ball entry means. A first determination means that executes the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball, and a second determination means that executes the second determination based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. And the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second identification information showing the second discrimination result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means are dynamically dynamic at the same time. When the display means that can be displayed and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result are displayed, the privilege game The privilege game execution means for executing the above, the first state set by allowing the game ball to be inserted into the second entry means to perform the game, and the game ball to be inserted into the second entry means. A game state setting means for setting one of a second state set so as not to allow the ball to play a game, a case where the first state is set by the game state setting means, and the second state. It is characterized in that it has a ratio variable means for changing the ratio at which the advantageous pattern is set by the determination means when the state is set and when the specific second determination result is obtained. Game machine E2 to play.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E1, an advantageous pattern is set depending on whether the first state is set by the game state setting means or the second state is set. Since the ratio is changed by the ratio variable means, when the second state is set, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set low, the ball is entered into the second ball entry means in the second state and the game is played. There is an effect that the damage can be reduced even if the fraud is done.

In the game machine E1 or E2, the ratio variable means sets the ratio of the second probability lower than that in the first state in the second state.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, there is an effect that the damage can be reduced even when the fraud in the second state is performed.

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the first flow path that allows the game ball to enter the first ball entry means more easily than the second ball entry means, and the first ball entry means than the first ball entry means. The game machine E4 is characterized by having a second flow path that allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E3, the ball entry rate between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is variable depending on the flow path, so that the game ball flows down. The game can be changed depending on the flow path to be played, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In any of the game machines E1 to E4, between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, a game ball that did not enter the first variable ball entry means is inserted into the second variable ball entry means. A guiding means for guiding the variable ball-entry means over a predetermined period or longer is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is such that after the first variable ball-entry means is changed to the closed state, the period is shorter than the predetermined period. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state after being changed to the open state.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E5, in the disadvantageous pattern, it can be performed with easy control so that it becomes difficult to enter the ball into the second variable ball entry means. It has the effect of reducing the control load.

<Characteristic F group> (Advantageous symbols and disadvantageous symbols are changed during the opening period)
A first variable means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can pass and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to pass than the open state, and the first variable means arranged on the downstream side of the first variable means. A second variable entry means in which a game ball that has passed through one variable means can enter, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the second variable entry means can enter, and a game ball in the specific area. The first variable means and the second variable ball entry as a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the passage and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition. It has a variable control means for varying the means with a predetermined variable pattern, and a determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns, and is determined by the determination means. The variable pattern includes an advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has entered the first ball-entry means can enter the specific region when the first variable means is in the open state, and the advantageous pattern is more than the advantageous pattern. A game machine F1 characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter a specific area is set.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine F1, since the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable means and the second variable ball entry means, the player can be interested in the variable pattern. , It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine F1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entry means capable of launching a game ball launched from the launching means, and a first ball entry means thereof. Is different, the first discriminating means that executes the first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. The second discrimination means that executes the second discrimination based on the sphere, the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means by the second discrimination means. A display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the determination and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. When the second identification information indicating the second identification information to be shown is displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game and the privilege game are executed by the privilege game execution means. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a ratio in which the advantageous pattern is set corresponding to the game state set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine F2 is characterized by having a ratio setting means for variably setting the ratio and the ratio at which the disadvantage pattern is set.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the ratio of the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern is set according to the game state set by the game state setting means, so that the ratio of the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern is changed depending on the game state. There is an effect that the player's interest can be improved by changing the degree of expectation for the privilege given to the player.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means is based on the first probability and the first probability thereof. The probability setting means for setting at least a high second probability and the privilege given by the privilege giving means are characterized in that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. Game machine F3 to play.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F1 or F2, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the game ball is in the specific area even while the privilege game is being executed. By making people interested in whether or not they can pass through, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble of getting tired of the game.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern are set so that at least the period from the start of the privilege game to the opening state of the first variable means is different. The game machine F4 characterized by being.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F3, the player determines the start of the privilege game at the timing when the first variable means is opened, so that there are advantageous patterns and disadvantageous patterns. Can be difficult for the player to identify, and even if it is a disadvantageous pattern, it is possible to expect the ball to enter a specific area.

The game machine F4 has a guiding means for guiding a game ball that has passed through the first variable ball-entry means to the second variable ball-entry means for a predetermined period or longer, and the disadvantageous pattern is that the first variable ball-entry means said. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is at least set so as to be variable from the open state to the closed state within the predetermined period after the open state.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F4, there is an effect that the game ball can be more reliably suppressed from passing through the specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

<Characteristic G group> (Advantageous symbols can be changed in interval period)
A first variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the second variable ball entry means arranged in, a specific area in which the game ball entered in the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the game ball passing through the specific area, the player A predetermined variable pattern of the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition and a privilege-giving means for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player. The variable pattern determined by the determination means includes a variable control means that is variable by the above and a determination means that determines the variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. An advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means when the 1 variable ball entry means is in the closed state can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine G1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine G1, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern have at least a period from when the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state to when the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state. The gaming machine G2, which is characterized by being set differently.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G1, there is an effect that an advantageous pattern and a disadvantageous pattern can be set by easy control.

In the game machine G1 or G2, between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, a game ball that did not enter the first variable ball entry means is inserted into the second variable ball entry means. A guiding means for guiding the means over a predetermined period of time is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is the second variable in a period shorter than the predetermined period after the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the ball entry means is changed to the open state and then changed to the closed state.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area in a more reliable pattern.

In any of the game machines G1 to G3, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entry means capable of launching a game ball launched from the launching means, and a first ball entry means thereof. A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry means. The second discrimination means for executing the second discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball, the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination. A display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination by the means, and the first identification information or the specific identification information indicating the specific first determination result. When the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game and the privilege game executing means execute the privilege game when the second identification information indicating the second determination result is displayed on the display means. , The ratio of the advantageous pattern to the disadvantageous pattern is changed according to the game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states and the game state set by the game state setting means. A game machine G4 having a variable ratio setting means for setting.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G4, the ratio of the advantageous pattern to the disadvantage pattern is variably set according to the game state, so that the game state to be set is set. This has the effect of increasing the degree of expectation that the game ball will enter a specific area and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machines G1 to G4, the first probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means, and a first probability higher than the first probability thereof. It has a probability setting means capable of setting either one of the two probabilities, and the privilege given by the privilege giving means is such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. A game machine G5 characterized by this.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G4, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the specific area is set even while the privilege game is being executed. By making people interested in whether or not they can pass the game ball, there is an effect that the problem of getting tired of the game can be suppressed.

<Characteristic H group> (New Zero Attacker)
Based on the condition determination means for determining the establishment of a specific condition and the determination of the establishment of the specific condition by the condition determination means, an open state in which the game ball can enter from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter. The first variable ball entry means, the second variable ball entry means arranged in parallel with the first variable ball entry means, and the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. The first variable entry means and the second variable based on the privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the ball entering the ball and the determination that the specific condition is satisfied. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game in which the ball entry means are changed in a predetermined order until a predetermined condition is satisfied in the open state, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. With, when the first variable ball entry means is in the closed state, there is a guiding means for setting the period until the game ball reaches the second variable ball entry means to a predetermined period or longer. The gaming machine H1 characterized by being.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and the flow path of the game ball is not formed by using the two variable winning devices, and further games are played. There was a need to improve the interests of. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine H1, even when the first variable ball entry means is closed, the period until reaching the second variable ball entry means by the guiding means is set to a predetermined period or longer, so that the second variable There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball flows down without entering the second variable ball entry means and the interest of the game is lowered by the time the ball entry means is opened.

In the game machine H1, the effect executing means includes an open effect indicating that the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means is in the open state and the first variable. It has an effect executing means for at least executing a closing effect indicating that the ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are in the closed state when they are in the closed state, and the closing effect is within the predetermined period. A game machine H2 characterized in that it is executed in.

According to the game machine H2, in the closing effect, it is possible to notify that the closed state is used for a predetermined period of time, so that there is an effect that the player can easily understand the effect.

In the game machine H1 or H2, when the privilege game 1 is executed by the privilege game execution means, the order in which the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are changed to the open state, respectively. The gaming machine H3 is characterized by having an opening pattern determining means for determining an opening pattern in which is set from a plurality of opening patterns.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H1 or H2, since it is determined from a plurality of open patterns, there is an effect that the open patterns can be randomized and the game can be varied in various ways.

In the game machine H3, the timing for changing the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state is preset in the opening pattern determined by the opening pattern determining means. A game machine H4 characterized by being the one that has been used.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, the timing of changing from the closed state to the open state is set in advance in the open pattern, so that the first variable ball entry means and the second variable entry means are set according to the open pattern. There is an effect that the number of game balls entering the ball means can be stabilized and the profit given to the player can be set based on the design value.

<Characteristic I group> (Loops twice only for a predetermined period after the big hit)
A state setting means capable of setting at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and a privilege advantageous to the player are given based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In a gaming machine having at least a privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. If the first privilege game is executed in this state, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and if the second privilege game is executed, the first privilege game is executed. The second advantageous state is set after the execution of the second privilege game, and when the first privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the first privilege is set. After the game is executed, the first advantageous state is set, and after the first advantageous state is set, the specific condition is set without executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game by the privilege game executing means. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that the second advantageous state is set when it is established.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start port provided on the surface of the game board, a big hit lottery with a special symbol is performed, and the probability of winning a big hit is based on the result of the lottery. Some give high-probability games with high probability. In such a configuration, a gaming machine in which a high-probability game is continued until the jackpot is won twice has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-57583). In such a game machine, once the high-probability game is started, it is promised to win the jackpot twice while continuing the high-probability game. Therefore, after the high-probability game is started, the player There was a problem that he got tired of the game. The game machine I1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the game machine I1 is to provide a game machine capable of alleviating the player's boredom.

According to the game machine I1, at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, at least the first privilege game that gives the player an advantageous privilege and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game are executed by the privilege game execution means. When the first privilege game is executed while the first advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege is set. When the game is executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed while the second advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the first privilege game. After the first advantageous state is set, if a specific condition is satisfied without executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game by the privilege game executing means, the first advantageous state is changed to the second advantageous state. Set. As a result, if the first privilege game is executed before the specific condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state, then the second advantageous state is set, so that the advantageous state for the player is continuously set. be able to. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of privilege games are executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the game machine I1, the privilege game execution means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means is the first advantageous state. It is possible to set a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than any of the second advantageous states, and when the third privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set. , A game machine I2 characterized in that the specific state is set after the execution of the third privilege game.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I1, the following effects are played. That is, a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means. When the third privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the third privilege game. As a result, in the second advantageous state, a specific gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player is set when the third gaming state is executed, so that the continuous state of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the gambling of the game becomes too high.

The game machine I1 or I2 has a discrimination means for executing the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. A game machine I3 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the discriminant result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminant result. Since the above condition is satisfied, the player can play the game with an interest in the discrimination result by the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

A game machine I4, wherein in any of the game machines I1 to I3, the specific condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I4, the specific condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times, so that the player can satisfy the determination condition a predetermined number of times before the determination condition is satisfied. The game will be played while expecting that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Probability setting means for setting at least one of a first probability that is determined to be the specific determination result by the determination means and a second probability that is higher than the first probability in either the game machine I3 or I4. The gaming machine I5, wherein the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are those in which the second probability is set by the probability setting means.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I3 or I4, the following effects are played. That is, at least one of the first probability that is determined to be a specific determination result by the discrimination means and the second probability that is higher than the first probability is set by the probability setting means. In the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the second probability is set by the probability setting means. Thereby, in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific judgment result in a short period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic J group> (Attacca prize distribution configuration)
Based on the condition determination means for determining the establishment of a specific condition and the determination of the establishment of the specific condition by the condition determination means, an open state in which the game ball can enter from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter. To the first variable ball entry means, the second variable ball entry means arranged on the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means, and the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. The first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means based on the privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering, and the determination that the specific condition is satisfied. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game in which the variable ball entry means is changed in a predetermined order until a predetermined condition is satisfied in the open state, the first variable ball entry means, and the first variable entry means. A first distribution means for distributing at least a game ball to the downstream side of the ball means, and a game ball distributed to the downstream side of the first variable entry means by the first distribution means with the second variable entry means. The gaming machine J1 is characterized by having at least a second sorting means for sorting to the downstream side of the second variable ball entering means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a big hit lottery with a special symbol is performed, and when the result of the lottery is a big hit, the game is played. There is one that provides a jackpot game in which a game ball is inserted into a jackpot provided on the board. In such a configuration, a game machine in which two large winning openings are provided on the surface of the game board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, there is a problem that the game ball that did not enter one of the big prize openings does not enter the other big prize opening, and the flow of the game ball on the game board surface is poor. .. The game machine J1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the game machine J1 is to provide a game machine capable of realizing a ball flow of a game ball that makes a player expect.

According to the game machine J1, the establishment of a specific condition is determined by the condition determination means, and based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, the game ball can be opened from the closed state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter. The first variable ball entry means is changed to the state. The second variable ball entry means is arranged on the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, the privilege granting means grants a privilege advantageous to the player. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, the privilege game executing means opens the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means in a predetermined order until the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Perform a variable bonus game. At least the game balls are distributed to the first variable ball entry means and the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means by the first distribution means, and the game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means are second. At least the second variable ball entry means and the downstream side of the second variable ball entry means are distributed by the distribution means. As a result, the game ball distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means can be made to enter the second variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of realizing a ball flow of a game ball that makes the player have expectations, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine J1, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are a rotating portion that can rotate in the first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction, and a rotating portion thereof. The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that it has at least each of the regulating means for regulating the rotation range of the above at a predetermined angle.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are moved to the first direction and the second direction opposite to the first direction by the rotating portion. Since it can be rotated and the rotation range of the rotating portion is regulated at a predetermined angle by the regulating means, it is possible to execute an appropriate distribution operation, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. ..

In the game machine J2, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are configured to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by a flowing game ball. The game machine J3.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J2, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are configured so as to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by the flowing game ball. Therefore, it is possible to execute a more appropriate distribution operation.

In the game machine J1 or J2, when the first variable entry means is in the closed state, the guiding means for guiding the game ball to the second variable entry means and the guiding means cause the game ball to be the first. When the second variable ball entry means is closed when the ball is guided to the two variable ball entry means, it has a taxiway for guiding the guided game ball to the second distribution means. A game machine J4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1 or the game machine J2, the following effects are played. That is, when the first variable ball entry means is in the closed state, the game ball is guided to the second variable ball entry means by the guiding means. When the game ball is guided to the second variable ball entry means by the guiding means, and the second variable ball entry means is in the closed state, the guided game ball is guided to the second sorting means. It has a taxiway. As a result, the rotational state of the second sorting means can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to complicate the distribution of the game ball by the distribution member, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic K group> (Regulate the probability variation rate of one symbol at normal times by a variation method other than simultaneous variation)
A first variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the second variable ball entry means arranged in, a specific area in which the game ball entered in the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the game ball passing through the specific area, the player A predetermined variable pattern of the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means as a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition and a privilege-giving means for imparting a privilege advantageous to the player. The variable pattern determined by the determination means includes a variable control means that is variable by the above and a determination means that determines the variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. An advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means when the 1 variable ball entry means is in the closed state can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern. The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine K1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine K1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on the operation of the player, a first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball launched from the launching means, and the first ball entering means thereof. A second ball entry means different from the above, a ball entry assisting means that enables the game ball to enter the second ball entry means more easily than the first ball entry means, and the first ball entry means. A first determination means that executes the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball, and a second determination means that executes the second determination based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. And the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second identification information showing the second discrimination result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means are displayed respectively. The display means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying either the first identification information or the second identification information on the display means based on a predetermined priority order, and the specific first identification information. When the first identification information indicating the determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game and the second ball entry means The first state, which is set to allow the game ball to enter and play the game, and the first state, which is set so as not to allow the game ball to enter the second ball-entry means to play the game. The specific second determination between the game state setting means for setting one of the two states and the case where the first state is set and the case where the second state is set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine K2 is characterized by having a ratio variable means for varying the ratio at which the advantageous pattern is set by the determination means when a result is obtained.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine K1, an advantageous pattern is set depending on whether the first state is set by the game state setting means or the second state is set. Since the ratio is changed by the ratio variable means, when the second state is set, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set low, the ball is entered into the second ball entry means in the second state and the game is played. There is an effect that the damage can be reduced even if the fraud is done.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the ratio variable means sets the ratio of the second probability lower than that in the first state in the second state.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine K1 or K2, there is an effect that damage can be reduced even when fraud is performed in the second state.

In any of the game machines K1 to K3, a first flow path that allows a game ball to easily enter the first ball entry means rather than the second ball entry means, and the first ball entry means than the first ball entry means. The game machine K4 is characterized by having a second flow path that allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K1 to K3, the ball entry rate between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is variable depending on the flow path, so that the game ball flows down. The game can be changed depending on the flow path to be played, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In any of the game machines K1 to K4, between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means is inserted into the second variable ball entry means. A guiding means for guiding the variable ball-entry means over a predetermined period or longer is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is such that after the first variable ball-entry means is changed to the closed state, the period is shorter than the predetermined period. The gaming machine K5 is characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state and then changed to the closed state.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K1 to K5, in the disadvantageous pattern, it can be performed with easy control so that it becomes difficult to enter the ball into the second variable ball entry means. It has the effect of reducing the control load.

<Characteristic L group> (The probability variation rate is changed by the opening and interval in configurations other than simultaneous fluctuation)
A first variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the second variable ball entry means arranged in, a specific area in which the game ball entered in the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the game ball passing through the specific area, the player A predetermined variable pattern of the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition The variable pattern determined by the determination means includes a variable control means that is variable by the above and a determination means that determines the variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. An advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means when the 1 variable ball entry means is in the closed state can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine L1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine L1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entry means capable of launching a game ball launched from the launching means, and a first ball entry means thereof. Is different, the first discriminating means that executes the first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. The second discrimination means that executes the second discrimination based on the sphere, the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means by the second discrimination means. A display means capable of displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the determination, and either the first identification information or the second identification information are placed in a predetermined priority order. Based on this, the dynamic display means that is dynamically displayed on the display means and the first identification information that indicates the specific first determination result or the second identification information that indicates the specific second determination result are transmitted to the display means. When displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game and the game state setting for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. It is characterized by having a means and a ratio variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern according to the game state set by the game state setting means. Game machine L2.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L1, the ratio of the advantageous pattern to the disadvantage pattern is variably set according to the game state, so that the game is played in a specific area depending on the set game state. There is an effect that the degree of expectation that the ball enters can be changed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine L1 or L2, the first probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means, and a first probability higher than the first probability thereof. It has a probability setting means capable of setting either one of the two probabilities, and the privilege given by the privilege giving means is such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. A game machine L3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L1 or L2, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the game ball is in the specific area even while the privilege game is being executed. By making people interested in whether or not they can pass through, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble of getting tired of the game.

In any of the game machines L1 to L3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern are such that the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state and then the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state. The gaming machine L4, characterized in that the period until is set to be at least different.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines L1 to L3, there is an effect that an advantageous pattern and a disadvantageous pattern can be set by easy control.

In any of the game machines L1 to L4, between the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means, a game ball that has not entered the first variable entry means is inserted into the second variable entry means. A guiding means for guiding the variable ball entering means over a predetermined period or longer is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is such that after the first variable ball entering means is changed to the closed state, the period is shorter than the predetermined period. The gaming machine L5, characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state after being changed to the open state.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effect played by the game machines L1 to L4, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area in a more reliable pattern.

A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any of the game machines Z1, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any of the game machines Z2, the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the stop It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any of these, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the above, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
65 First variable winning device (variable ball entry means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of display means)
630 1st start port (1st ball entry port)
640 2nd start port (2nd entry port)
650b Upper attacker (regulatory means)
S305 First discriminating means S306 Part of dynamic display means S651 Percentage setting means S705 Second discriminating means S1051 Opening period setting means S1655 Part of game state setting means S1680 Part of privilege granting means S1604 Bonus game execution means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the game balls in starting opening provided on the game board is ball entrance, conducted lottery per special symbol, when the result of the lottery was large person Ritona' In some cases, a game is executed by inserting a game ball into a large winning opening provided on the surface of the game board. In such a configuration, a game machine having two large winning openings on the surface of the game board has been proposed .

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-265765

However, in the gaming machine described above, further interest improvement of the game has been demanded.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having further improved the interest of the game in the above-mentioned game machine.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a launching means capable of launching a game ball and a first launching means capable of launching the gaming ball launched from the launching means based on the operation of the player. An entry means, a second entry means different from the first entry means, and an entry that enables the game ball to be more easily entered into the second entry means than the first entry means. The ball assisting means, the first discriminating means capable of executing the first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A second discrimination means capable of executing the second discrimination based on the above, a first identification information for showing the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means. A display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result of the second determination according to the above, and the first identification information or the specification indicating a specific first determination result. When the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the above is displayed, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the game ball to the second ball entry means. A first state in which a game ball is allowed to enter and a game is performed, and a second state in which a game ball is allowed to enter the second ball entry means to play a game. A game state setting means for setting one of the above, and a first variable ball entry means that can be changed to an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the open state. , The second variable ball entry means arranged on the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means, the first variable state in which the game ball entered into the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the first variable state thereof. Granting a privilege that gives a player an advantageous privilege based on a specific area that can be changed to a second variable state that is more difficult to enter than the variable state and the game ball passing through the specific area. A variable control means that changes the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means in a predetermined variable pattern as a privilege game based on the means and the establishment of a specific condition, and the variable control means. A determination means for determining the variable pattern to be performed from a plurality of different variable patterns, and an advantageous setting in which the specific area is changed to the first variable state for a long period of time during the period in which the privilege game is executed and its advantage. Either one of the disadvantageous setting in which the period of being changed to the first variable state is shorter than the setting is executed, and the variable pattern determined by the determining means includes the first variable ball entry means. The closed state In this case, the game ball that did not enter the first variable ball entry means can enter the specific area, and it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. The disadvantage pattern is at least set, and the game machine is set in the first state by the game state setting means, which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. When the first setting is made, the specific second determination result is higher than when the second setting is made to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the first setting. When the advantage pattern is determined by the determination means in a state where the advantage setting is made based on the above, the second state is set, and the first setting is made. Is configured such that the advantageous pattern is determined by the determining means in a state where the disadvantage setting is made based on the specific second determination result, and the specific second determination is made. In the case of the determination result, the ratio at which the advantageous pattern is determined in the first state and the ratio at which the advantageous pattern is determined in the second state are set to be the same. Is.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on an operation of a player, and a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched from the launching means. A second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and a ball-entry assisting means that enables the game ball to be more easily entered into the second ball-entry means than the first ball-entry means. Based on the first determination means capable of executing the first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The second discrimination means capable of executing the second discrimination, the first identification information for showing the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination by the second discrimination means. A display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result of the above, and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the specific second determination. When the second identification information indicating the result is displayed, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the second ball entry means are used to insert the game ball. One of a first state that is set to allow the game to be played and a second state that is set not to allow the game ball to be played in the second ball-entry means is set. A first variable ball entry means that can be changed to an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the open state, and the first variable The second variable ball entry means arranged on the downstream side of the ball entry means, the first variable state in which the game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the first variable state in which the ball has entered. A specific area that can be changed to a difficult second variable state, a privilege granting means that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the passing of the game ball through the specific area, and a specific condition. As a privilege game, a variable control means for changing the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means in a predetermined variable pattern, and the variable pattern variable by the variable control means. The determination means for determining the above from a plurality of different variable patterns, and the specific area have a longer period of being changed to the first variable state during the period in which the privilege game is being executed, and the first of the advantageous settings. Either one of the disadvantageous setting for which the period of being changed to the 1 variable state is short is executed, and in the variable pattern determined by the determining means, the first variable ball entering means is the closed state. In the case of the first 1 There are at least an advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the variable ball entry means can enter the specific area and a disadvantage pattern in which it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. The game machine is set, and the first state is set by the game state setting means, and the first setting is made to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. If so, it is based on the specific second determination result, as compared with the case where the second setting for making it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the first setting. In the state where the advantageous setting is made, the ratio of the advantageous pattern being determined by the determination means is increased, and when the second state is set and the first setting is made, the specific When the advantageous pattern is determined by the determination means in a state where the disadvantage setting is made based on the second determination result, and the specific second determination result is obtained. The ratio at which the advantageous pattern is determined in the first state and the ratio at which the advantageous pattern is determined in the second state are set to be the same. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device having a La-La cross section, (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device. (A) to (b) are the rear view of a part of the variable winning apparatus. (A) is a flow chart showing the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment, and (b) is the case where the jackpot type selected in each gaming state in the first embodiment and the jackpot type are selected. It is a schematic diagram which showed the game state which shifts to. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes in the probabilistic gaming state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes in the probabilistic gaming state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a frame button in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a selection switch in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the contents of ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the first hit random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the small hit random number table in the first embodiment. c) is a diagram schematically showing a second random number table in the first embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views showing an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the general drawing variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the RAM of the main control device 110 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM 223 schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 deviation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 detachment stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notification processing which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the notification lottery process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes in the normal game state or the latent probability change game state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of the display mode in the latent probabilistic game state or the probabilistic game state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is an enlarged view of a part of the front surface of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a flow figure which showed the transition of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the jackpot game in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. This is an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. This is an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the first hit random number table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the small hit random number table in the second embodiment. c) is a diagram schematically showing a second random number table in the second embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views showing an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the general drawing variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the special electric accessory operation table set in ROM. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, and (b) is the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM schematically. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol change stop process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation stop processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow figure which showed the transition of the game state in the 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow figure which showed the transition of the game state in the 2nd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is an enlarged view of a part of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd modification of the 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 58, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and starting ports 630, 631, 640, 67 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 (FIG. 11 (a)) and a selection switch 600 (see FIG. 11 (b)) are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when the effect or background displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2), which will be described later, is changed.

As shown in FIG. 11B, the selection switch 600 includes a determination switch (a) for determining selection of effects and the like, a left switch 600b for instructing leftward selection, and an upward selection. It is composed of an upper switch 600c, a right switch 600d for instructing a rightward selection, and a lower switch 600e for instructing a downward selection.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launch unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push-button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is not limited to the above, but the configuration is such that the main control device 110 and other control devices detect the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a, and the solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a. May be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a first starting port 63a, and a first. 2 The starting port 63b, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, the second starting port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 by a wood screw or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a starting port or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down). In addition, the game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 and the winning port.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

On the right side of the game board 13, a first normal symbol start port 67a and a second normal symbol start port 67b are provided below the first normal symbol start port 67b. The first normal symbol start port 67a and the second normal symbol start port 67b are configured to have the same shape, and are configured by a gate type start port having a sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. There is. When the game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, a lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery conducted for the passing of the game ball through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit.

When the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and "○" and "×" are displayed. After the symbols of No. 1 are alternately lit for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (a symbol of “◯” or “×” in the present embodiment) indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed (lit). If a ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67 or the second normal symbol start port 67b while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes thereof is the same as that of the first normal symbol start port 67a. It is held up to 4 times in total at the 2nd ordinary symbol start port 67b. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. When the variation display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol start port 67 (first normal symbol start port 67b or second normal symbol start port 67b) remains, the next A lottery for ordinary symbols is performed, and a variable display according to the lottery is started.

When it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with "○", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol was a win. When the winning symbol is displayed, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is activated. The first ordinary electric accessory 632 has a left guide member 632a and a right guide member 632b, and the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are spaced apart from each other so that one game ball can pass to the left and right. Normally, it is maintained in an upright position. A predetermined angle (in this embodiment, the left guide member 632a is 40 degrees counterclockwise and the right guide member 632b is 40 degrees clockwise) from the state where the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are substantially vertically upright. The game ball moves (that is, is changed to the open state), and the left guide member 632a and the right guide member guide the game ball to the second start port 640, so that the game ball enters the second start port 640. It becomes an easy state (special state). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of order, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with "x", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol was out of order. At this time, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is not operated, and the next variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed.

A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). The device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are balls that have won prizes in the first starting port 630, the right starting port 631, the second starting port 640, the first ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67a, and the second ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67b. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation display has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error display are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. The 7-segment LED on the left has a variable display (dynamic) of the first special symbol showing the judgment (lottery) result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as the first lottery game) based on the winning of the first starting port 630 or the right starting port 631. Is displayed. Specifically, the variable display (7 segments in the present embodiment) is determined until the variable time (dynamic display time) elapses, which is determined based on the winning of the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631. After the central segment blinks), it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the judgment result. If the determination result is off, the central 1 segment is lit and a symbol "-" indicating the off is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the deviation such as the symbols "3" and "7" corresponding to the hit is displayed.

On the 7-segment LED on the right side, a second special symbol (dynamic display) indicating the determination (lottery) result of the lottery (second lottery game) based on the winning of the second starting port 640 is displayed. Specifically, it is displayed until the fluctuation time determined based on the winning of the second starting port 640 elapses, and is configured in the same manner as the first lottery game. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

The first special symbol indicating the determination (lottery) result of the first lottery game and the second special symbol indicating the determination (lottery) result of the second lottery game are the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later. See also). As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can perform various variable displays as compared with the 7-segment display 37b, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, the fluctuation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, but the fluctuation time is set for each fluctuation mode, and corresponds to the dynamic display mode related to time information. Further, the fluctuation pattern can be divided into a long-term fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time and a short-time fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time, depending on the fluctuation pattern that becomes reach and the fluctuation pattern that does not reach. In this way, even when the time is roughly sorted by a fixed time standard (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), the time information is dynamic. Corresponds to the display mode.

Further, as will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time is reached also corresponds to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the time information of the above-mentioned rough fluctuation pattern (for example, is it a long-time fluctuation pattern? Information on time information determined based on (whether or not, etc.) (for example, the number of long-term fluctuation patterns performed before the start of fluctuation) is also applicable.

In this pachinko machine 10, is it a big hit in the lottery (first lottery game, second lottery game) performed for winning prizes in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640? In addition to making a pass / fail judgment (big hit lottery), the jackpot type is also judged. As the jackpot type determined here, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), jackpot A (15R jackpot probability variation jackpot), jackpot B (15R normal jackpot), jackpot E (15R normal jackpot (electric support)) (Yes))) are set (see FIGS. 16A to 16C). Here, the presence of electric support of the jackpot E indicates that the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is easily set to a special state (open state). In the jackpot E, after the jackpot game of 15 rounds, the electric support state is set until the total number of times of the first lottery game and the second lottery game reaches 100 times.

As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), two types of jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot (with electric support)) and jackpot D (15R probability variation jackpot (without electric support)) are set (FIG. 16). (A)-(c)).

Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the variable winning devices 65 are arranged as the winning devices that are operated in the open state during the jackpot game. The variable winning device 65 is operated so that the first specific winning opening 65a is opened 15 times for a predetermined period or until a predetermined number (10 balls in the present embodiment) of game balls are entered for the jackpots A to E. ..

The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b to form a variable winning device 65. A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to light the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It has an arranged LED substrate 65d, a back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED substrate 65d with a base member 65c, and an opening / closing door 65f1 for opening / closing a specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d. The opening / closing unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the game that protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g. A switching member 65h for switching the flow path of the sphere, a link member 65i locked with the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and the back surface of the back cover body 65j. It is composed of a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the side and operates the link member 65i, and a fixing cover body 65m that covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. There is.

FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a sectional view taken along line Lb-Lb of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5 (b). The bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 6B.

As shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which the game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 composed of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side and the ball cannot be entered. It is variable to a closed state where it is possible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the right first starting port 631 side. It is configured as follows. Therefore, even during the time-saving game (including during the probabilistic game), it is possible to put the game ball into the second starting port 640 while hitting right, and the game method is changed to left hit immediately after the big hit game. You can reduce the trouble of changing. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 5B. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. .. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. ..

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to the high probability gaming state (probability variation) by passing the above-mentioned probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. It is set to the game state). That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for imparting a probability change game state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to divide the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state ST1) or a probabilistic gaming state.

In this way, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that has won the first specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, so that the player's interest can be improved even during the jackpot game. Can be done. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. .. The operation timing and operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A, jackpot C, and jackpot D are won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds according to the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round. Has been done. Further, when the jackpot B and the jackpot E are won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round.

Therefore, in the jackpot A, the game ball winning the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is not possible to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Has been done. Therefore, the probability variation grant ratio can be controlled according to the jackpot type, and it can be configured so that excessive advantages and disadvantages do not occur.

A case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge port 65e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 6B. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution flow path is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. Thereby, it can be determined by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the probability change switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls entered in the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball that was won before the 14th round is won in the 14th round and the probability change switch 65e3 is won even if the jackpot is B.

In this way, the game ball that has won the first specific winning opening 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the prize ball (one ball winning in this embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. 15 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, so that a lottery for whether or not to give the probability change game state can be executed. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the probabilistic gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, various gaming states in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a flow in which various gaming states are set. FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a jackpot type that occurs for each special symbol and a gaming state that shifts after the jackpot occurs in various gaming states.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, the following four gaming states are set as gaming states. The first is the normal gaming state ST1.2 in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low (normal) and there is no electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is unlikely to be in the special state (open state)). The second is a game state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low (normal) as in the normal game state ST1, but there is electric support (the first normal electric accessory 632 tends to be in the special state (open state)). Time saving game state ST1h. Third, the probability of a big hit of a special symbol is high, and there is no electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is unlikely to be in a special state (open state)). Latent probability change game state) ST2. The fourth is in the game state where the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high and there is electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 tends to be in the special state (open state)). A certain probabilistic transformation support game state (so-called probabilistic game state) ST3.

In the present embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time. However, in each game state, one of the special symbols is substantially changed (also referred to as a substantial change target). Specifically, it is configured so that the fluctuation time of a special symbol that is not a substantial fluctuation target is longer than the fluctuation time of a special symbol that is a substantial fluctuation target. In addition, the game ball is difficult to enter into the starting port for drawing a special symbol that is not subject to substantial fluctuation, or the game ball enters the starting port for drawing a special symbol that is subject to substantial fluctuation. It is configured so that the game is easy to play. As a result, it is possible to substantially not generate a jackpot of a special symbol that is not a substantial fluctuation target (make it difficult to generate), and to substantially generate a jackpot of a special symbol that is a substantial fluctuation target (make it easy to occur).

The method of subjecting one of the special symbols to the actual fluctuation target is not limited to the method described above. For example, ordinary electric accessories are provided at the starting port that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol and the starting port that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, in each game state, it is conceivable to make only the ordinary electric accessory of the starting port corresponding to the special symbol to be substantially changed movable (or easy to move). As a result, the game ball does not enter the starting port corresponding to the special symbol that is the target of the actual fluctuation, and the game ball does not enter the starting port corresponding to the special symbol that is not the target of the actual fluctuation (it is difficult to enter the ball). Can be done. In this case, a lottery for moving the ordinary electric accessory provided at each starting port may be performed separately. For example, a lottery for moving one ordinary electric accessory is performed based on the entry (passing) into the first ordinary symbol start port (referred to as the lottery for the first ordinary symbol), and the other ordinary electric accessory is movable. The lottery for the second ordinary symbol may be performed by entering (passing) the ball into the second ordinary symbol starting port (referred to as a lottery for the second ordinary symbol). Further, the lottery of the first ordinary symbol and the lottery of the second ordinary symbol may be executed at the same time, and like the lottery of the special symbol in the present embodiment, when one of the ordinary symbols is a big hit, , The lottery of the other ordinary symbol may be missed. As a result, the variation of the gaming state can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the first special symbol and the jackpot based on the second special symbol have different probabilities of selecting a jackpot that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. That is, the probabilities of being able to shift (loop) to a high probability gaming state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) are different. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 16, the jackpot based on the first special symbol has a low probability of being able to shift (loop) to a high probability gaming state (latent probability changing gaming state ST2 or probability changing gaming state ST3) ( 34%), that is, there is a high probability (66%) of shifting (falling) to a low probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or time-saving gaming state ST1h). On the other hand, the jackpot based on the second special symbol has a high probability (100%) of being able to shift (loop) to a high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3). In addition, in explaining the flow in which various game states are set, a jackpot that enables a transition to a high-probability game state (a game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3) is selected (generated) for convenience. In this case, it will be described as shifting to the high-probability gaming state (the gaming ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3).

By setting a special symbol that is a target of substantial fluctuation in each game state, it is possible to adjust (set) whether it is easy to shift to a high-probability gaming state (loop) or to a low-probability state (fall). As a result, in each game state, in addition to two types (high probability and low probability) of the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit, two types (probability) of transitioning (looping) to the high probability game state after the big hit (probability). It is possible to set a state (high probability, low probability) of transition to a high probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the gaming state and improve the interest of the player.

Specifically, in the probability-changing gaming state ST3, which is a high-probability gaming state, by setting the actual fluctuation target in Special Figure 1, the gaming state is easily shifted (falling) to the low-probability state, which is also the high-probability gaming state. In the latent probability change game state ST2, by setting the actual fluctuation target in the special figure 2, it is possible to make the game state easy to shift (loop) to the high probability game state. That is, even if the game is in the same high-probability state (or low-probability state), the distribution of the game state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game can be changed by changing the special symbol that is the target of the actual fluctuation. It is possible to increase the variation in which the game state shifts, and improve the interest of the player.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. First, in the state in which the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (the state in which the RAM clear switch is pressed and the power is turned on), the normal game state ST1 is set. In the normal game state ST1, the first special symbol is substantially subject to change. That is, it is a gaming state in which the probability (probability variation rate) of a jackpot that shifts to a high-probability gaming state is low (34%). Specifically, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1), a fluctuation time of 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30,000 ms (30 seconds) is selected (see FIG. 17). Then, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, the jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot) that shifts to the high probability gaming state is selected as the jackpot type with a probability of 34%, and the jackpot B (15R normal jackpot) that remains in the low probability state. Is selected with a probability of 66% (see FIG. 7B, FIG. 16).

On the other hand, in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (special diagram 2), which is not a substantial variation target, is set to be long. Specifically, when the result of the winning / failing determination (lottery) is incorrect, 64800000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (see FIG. 17). Therefore, it is possible to execute the lottery 2160 to 8200 times in the first special symbol while the deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed once. Since the jackpot probability in the normal game state ST1 (low probability state) is 1/400, the jackpot in the first special symbol is reached by the time the second special symbol that is out of the normal game ends changing once. It is configured to occur. In addition, since the business hours of the amusement store are mainly about 15 hours from 9 am to 11 pm, they are set to be longer than that. Therefore, even if the second lottery game is executed in the normal game state ST1, the deviation fluctuation of the special figure 2 does not end within the business hours. With this configuration, in the normal game state ST1, a jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1), which is a substantial fluctuation target, is generated (easily).

If the second lottery game is executed and the result of the winning / failing determination is not deviated and the result is a hit, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is selected to be 600,000 ms (10 minutes) (see FIG. 17). This will be described in detail later, but when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts to fluctuate based on the jackpot, the fluctuation based on the other special symbol is removed. This is because it is controlled so as to be. If the hit / fail determination result of the special figure 2 is a hit and 6480000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the fluctuation time, the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the special figure 2 does not end within the business hours. Therefore, there arises a problem that all fluctuations (first lottery game) based on the special figure 1 executed during business hours are controlled so as to be out of order (not a big hit). Therefore, the fluctuation based on the jackpot in Special Figure 2 is set to the time (10 minutes) that can be completed within the business hours. Thereby, the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

However, when the fluctuation based on the jackpot of Special Figure 2 is short (for example, 500 ms (0.5 seconds)), the player can judge the result of the hit / fail judgment of Special Figure 2 in a short time, so that the next fraud There is a risk that the act will be carried out. For example, a game ball is inserted into the second starting port 640, and it is determined that the hit / fail determination result of the special figure 2 based on the entry is incorrect (the variation display of the special figure 2 is executed longer than 0.5 seconds). In that case, there is a risk that a fraudulent act (so-called reset goto) of resetting (initializing) the pachinko machine 10 will be executed. As described above, when the RAM clear switch of the pachinko machine 10 is pressed and the power is turned on (reset), the normal game state ST1 is set, and the fluctuation of each special symbol is also initialized (that is, the fluctuation is stopped). Will be). Therefore, by repeating the above fraudulent act (reset goto), it is possible to generate a big hit based on the special figure 2 which is not a target of substantial fluctuation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variation based on the jackpot of the special figure 2 is set to 10 minutes so that the player cannot determine the result of the hit / fail judgment (lottery) of the special figure 2 in a short time. As a result, a period of at least 10 minutes is required to execute the fraudulent act (reset goto), so that the feasible frequency of the cheating act (reset goto) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally generate the jackpot of Special Figure 2 by the above-mentioned fraudulent act (reset goto).

The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not limited to that described above, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, in a game machine in which the second lottery game cannot be executed unless the game ball is intentionally launched (for example, a right-handed game), a right-handed game is performed in the normal game state ST1 (for example, a second lottery game is performed). As a penalty, the fluctuation time based on the jackpot in FIG. 2 may be set to a time longer than 600,000 ms (10 minutes) (for example, 1 hour). Further, in this case, it may be notified that a fraudulent act (right-handed game in the normal game state ST1) is being executed (or has been executed).

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the second starting port 640 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Therefore, in order to insert the game ball into the second starting port 640 (perform the second lottery game), it is necessary to perform the game (right-handed game) of passing the game ball through the right side of the variable display unit 80. In the normal game state ST1, the electric accessory 632 provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 is difficult to be set in the special state (open state) (that is, it is difficult to enter the right first starting port 631). Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in the normal game state ST1, it is difficult to execute the first lottery game according to the special figure 1 which is a substantial fluctuation target, and it is easy to execute the second lottery game according to the special figure 2 which is not a substantial fluctuation target. become. That is, the right-handed game in the normal game state ST1 is set to be more disadvantageous to the player than playing the game (left-handed game) by passing the game ball through the left side of the variable display unit 80. Therefore, in the normal game state ST1, the player plays a left-handed game. When a left-handed game is performed in the normal game state ST1, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 640, but the game ball enters the first starting port 630. As a result, the game state in which the jackpot of the second special symbol does not occur (difficult) and the jackpot of the first special symbol occurs (easily) (that is, the game state in which it is difficult to shift to the high-probability gaming state) is set. Can be done.

In the normal game state ST1, the jackpot B is generated, and after the jackpot game of the jackpot B is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to). On the other hand, after the jackpot A is generated and the jackpot game is executed, the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set (shifted to) (see FIG. 7B). However, if the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 after the jackpot game based on the jackpot A is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to).

The latent probability change game state ST2 is a game state in which the jackpot probability is set to be 10 times higher (high probability game state) than the normal game state ST1, and the second special symbol is a game state in which the second special symbol is substantially changed. That is, it is a gaming state in which the probability (probability variation rate) that a jackpot that can continue the high probability gaming state occurs is high. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). As a result, in the latent probability change game state ST2, the second lottery game can be efficiently performed by performing the right-handed game. Then, in the jackpot of the second special symbol, as the jackpot type, the jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) in which the latent probability variation game state ST2 is continued (looped) is selected with a probability of 66%, and the jackpot shifts to the probability variation game state ST3. D (15R probability variation jackpot) is selected with a 34% probability.

On the other hand, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the variation time of the first special symbol, which is not a substantial variation target, is set long. Specifically, if the result of the winning / failing determination (lottery) of the first special symbol is incorrect, the fluctuation time is selected to be 18000000 ms (30 minutes) (see FIG. 18A). Therefore, it is possible to execute the lottery up to 3600 times in the second special symbol while the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol is performed once. Since the jackpot probability during the probability change (high probability gaming state) is 1/40, the jackpot will be a jackpot with the second special symbol by the time the first special symbol, which is out of the ordinary game, has changed once. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is a hit, the fluctuation time is selected to be 500 ms (0.5 seconds) (see FIG. 18 (a)). In the latent probability change game state ST2, when the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), it shifts to the normal game state ST1, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent act (reset goto) cannot be executed. Therefore, when the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time is set as short as 500 ms (0.5 seconds). As a result, even if a big hit occurs in the first special symbol in the latent probability change game state ST2, the game can be continued without reducing the efficiency (turnover rate) of the game.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the latent probability change game state ST2, the lottery result of the second special symbol is configured to be a small hit with a probability of 8/400. In the small hit in the latent probability change game state ST2, about 3 game balls can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. Since the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry into the specific winning opening 65a is 15, about 45 balls are paid out to the player for each small hit game. As a result, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the right-handed game can be executed in a state that is more advantageous than the normal game state ST1 (a state in which the consumption of the possessed ball is suppressed).

In the latent probability variable game state ST2, the jackpot of the second special symbol is obtained, and when the jackpot D (15R probability variable jackpot) is selected, the latent probability variable game state ST2 is set (looped) again. On the other hand, when the jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) is selected, the gaming state with the probability transformation support (probability variation gaming state ST3) is set thereafter.

The probabilistic game state ST3 is a game state in which the lottery probability of the special symbol is set 10 times higher (set to the high probability game state), and the first special symbol is a game state in which the first special symbol is substantially changed. Further, the lottery probability of the normal symbol is set to be 40 times higher, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is also short, so that the fluctuation time can be easily selected (see FIG. 19). Further, the time (opening time) in which the electric accessory 632 is maintained in the special state (open state) is also set longer than in the normal gaming state ST1 and the latent probability changing gaming state ST2. Therefore, when the player hits the right side, the right first starting port 631 can be easily won. In the present embodiment, 95% of the right-handed game balls are configured to win the right first starting port 631. Therefore, 85% of the remaining 5% of the game balls win the second starting port 640, and the remaining 5% is consumed as an out ball. Therefore, in the probabilistic game state, about 99% of the right-handed game balls win a prize in the right first start port 631 or the second start port 640, and 99% of the right-handed game balls play as prize balls. Will be paid out to the person. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of balls held by the player and perform the game.

In the probabilistic game state ST3, the lottery result of the second special symbol is configured to be a small hit with a probability of 5/400. In the small hit in this probabilistic gaming state ST3, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from becoming too advantageous in the probabilistic gaming state ST3. Not limited to this, a game ball may be allowed to enter the specific winning opening 65a (for example, one ball). As a result, it is possible to increase the benefits for the player and improve the interest of the player.

In the probabilistic gaming state ST3, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, which is not a substantial fluctuation target, is set to be long, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, which is a substantial fluctuation target, is set to be short. Specifically, 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol regardless of the result of the winning / failing determination (lottery) (see FIG. 18B). On the other hand, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, if the result of the winning / failing determination (lottery) is wrong, the fluctuation time is selected to be 18000000 ms (30 minutes) (see FIG. 18 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to execute the lottery up to 3600 times in the first special symbol while the deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed once. Since the jackpot probability during the probability change (high probability game state) is 1/40, the jackpot is made with the first special symbol by the time the second special symbol, which is out of the ordinary game, has changed once. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, if the result of the winning / failing determination (lottery) of the first special symbol is a hit, the fluctuation time is selected to be 5000 ms (5 seconds) (see FIG. 18 (b)). As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), it shifts to the normal game state ST1, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent act (reset goto) cannot be executed. Therefore, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probabilistic game state ST3, the fluctuation time is set as short as 5000 ms (5 seconds). As a result, even if a big hit occurs in the second special symbol in the probabilistic game state ST3, it is possible to make the game machine capable of continuing the game without lowering the efficiency (turnover rate) of the game.

Further, as described above, in the probabilistic gaming state ST3, 95% of the launched game balls win the right first starting port 631. Therefore, since it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 640 and the second lottery game is difficult to be executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a big hit of the second special symbol which is not a substantially variable target.

When the jackpot of the first special symbol is reached in the probability variation game state ST3, the jackpot A is selected at a rate of 34%. After the jackpot game based on the jackpot A, the latent probability change game state ST2 is set (shifted to). Therefore, the latent probability change game state ST2 is selected (shifted to) with a probability of 34%, and the game can be played with a high probability until at least two big hits are won again. On the other hand, if the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 66%, the normal gaming state ST1 is set (so-called falling) after the jackpot game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set, the player has a high probability of favoring the player until the jackpot is executed twice while the consumption of the possessed ball is suppressed. 2 The lottery game (or the first lottery game) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player can perform two jackpot games in a short period of time as compared with the normal game state, and there is an effect that the player can be provided with a sense of superiority.

Furthermore, by displaying so that the player can grasp that the lottery game will be executed with a high probability in favor of the player until the jackpot is executed twice, the player is given at least two jackpots. It has the effect of making you feel guaranteed and providing a sense of security.

In the present embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, when the jackpot B of the first special symbol is reached, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to). That is, it is not possible to obtain two big hits. In the latent probability change game state ST2, as described above, the right-handed game in which the first lottery game is difficult to be executed is performed, and the second lottery is performed during the fluctuation of the deviation of the first special symbol, which fluctuates for a long time. The game is executed a plurality of times, and the jackpot of the second special symbol is generated (easily) (substantially, the jackpot of the first special symbol is not obtained). However, there is a case where the first special symbol becomes a big hit due to the reserved ball of the first special symbol stored in the latent probability change game state ST2. For example, when a big hit is obtained in the first second lottery game in which the latent probability change game state ST2 is set (probability of 1/40). Therefore, in this case, in the latent probability change game state ST2, the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot of the first special symbol with a probability of 34%, and the jackpot E is selected with a probability of 66% (). 7 (b) and 16 (b)). If the jackpot A is selected, the game shifts to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, which is a high-probability gaming state, so that it is possible to obtain two jackpots. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is selected, it is not possible to obtain two jackpots, and the situation shifts to a low probability state. In this case, 100 times of time saving games are given after the big hit game is completed. As a result, a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 is given. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the player is discouraged and the motivation for the game is significantly reduced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37. A third symbol display device 81 is provided, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variations of the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol).

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114, so that the first display is as shown in FIG. 4A. Left (left side display area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2), and right showing the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2), which is one of the third symbols, in the area Dm. Three symbol rows of (right side display area Dm3) are displayed. The type of the third symbol (whether it is special figure 1 or special figure 2) displayed in the first display area (Dm) is determined and displayed according to the game state.

In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state ST1 (low probability gaming state) and the gaming state with probabilistic transformation support (probability transformation gaming state), the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the probabilistic transformation support. In the case of the none game state (latent probability change game state ST2), the second special symbol is set to be displayed in the first display area Dm.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the type of the special symbol displayed in the first display area Dm is set to be switched, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same special symbol may always be displayed. Good.

Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variablely displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. It is designed to be (dynamically displayed).

The third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of 10 types of special symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". .. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variation display is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over.

Specifically, in the first display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Further, in the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, a second display area Dn and a second sub-display area Dt are formed below the second display area Dn at the upper right of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol string indicating a first special symbol or a second special symbol (depending on the game state) is displayed. Further, in the second sub-display area Dt, a symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the gaming state) displayed in the second display area Dn is displayed. Details will be described later, but in the case of the probability variation game state ST3, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, the treasure box symbol is the second display area as the third symbol indicating the second special symbol. It is displayed in Dn. Then, when the change of the second special symbol is started, a blinking display is executed in which the state of FIG. 9A and the state of FIG. 9B are alternately displayed in a short cycle (for example, 1 second). .. Then, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, when the fluctuation time elapses, the display is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 9A. On the other hand, when the lottery result is a hit, it is configured to be stopped and displayed in the state shown in FIG. 9B when the fluctuation time elapses.

Further, a third display area Du is formed on the upper left of the first display area Dm. In this third display area Du, two types of symbol rows of "○" and "×" as shown in FIG. 8B are displayed in parallel in two rows, and the symbol on the left side is a lottery for the first special symbol. The result is shown, and the symbol on the right side is configured to show the lottery result of the second special symbol. The lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be shown depending on other aspects. For example, when two types of symbols "○" and "×" are displayed in two rows in parallel and two "○" symbols are displayed in the left and right columns, the first special symbol or the second special symbol (game). It may be configured to notify that a hit (depending on the state) was hit. Further, the third display area Du and the second display area Dn may be shared. For example, in the normal game state ST1, two types of symbol strings "○" and "×" are displayed in parallel in the second display area, and in the probabilistic game state ST3, FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (b) are displayed. ), The symbol of the treasure box may be displayed in the second display area Dn as the third symbol indicating the second special symbol. In this case, the display area may be switched based on the change of the game state after the big hit game. As a result, the display area of the first display area Dm can be widened, so that the effect of the effect displayed in the first display area Dm can be enhanced. Further, when the variation based on the second special symbol is not executed (when there is no hold of the special figure 2), the second display area Dn and the second sub-display area Dt may not be displayed. As a result, the display area of the first display area Dm can be widened.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit (or a small hit), the change of the other special symbol that is changing is also forcibly changed. It is configured to be stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a disconnection.

Here, in the big hit, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed 15 times (referred to as 15 rounds), whereas in the small hit, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed. It is executed twice (for example, two rounds). Further, one round of the jackpot game is executed until 30 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have won the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, one round of the small hit game in the latent probability variable game state ST2 is set until 1.8 seconds elapse or 10 game balls win the variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hit game in the latent probability change game state ST2, about 3 game balls can be entered. Further, one round of the small hit game in the probabilistic game state ST3 is set until 0.5 seconds elapse or 10 game balls win the variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hit game in the probabilistic game state ST3, it is almost impossible to put the game ball into the variable winning device 65, and it is difficult to obtain the prize ball.

Even in the probabilistic game state ST3, as described above, when the lottery result indicating a small hit in the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the changing second special symbol is forcibly removed (FIG. 9). (See (a)) is displayed as a stop. In this case, the deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol, which is a fluctuation for a long time (10 minutes) and is not a real fluctuation target, is stopped, and after the small hit game of the special figure 1 is completed, the new fluctuation of the special figure 1 is formed. At the same time, the second lottery game is executed based on the new hold (next hold) ball of the second special symbol. That is, there is a possibility that a big hit based on the second special symbol will occur. In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the second lottery game with the second special symbol, the big hit C (15R probability variation big hit) that can shift to the high probability game state is always selected (100%). It is configured (see FIG. 16C), which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, when the fluctuation is started based on the new hold (next hold) of the second special symbol, the first special is set in the second display area Dn as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10B. The variation of the symbol is displayed, and the variation of the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. Similarly, the symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the second sub-display area Dt, and the symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is varied so as to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. .. The variable mode is not limited to this, and the display area of the second display area Dn where the variation of the second special symbol is displayed is enlarged, and the variation of the first special symbol is displayed in the first display. The area Dm may be reduced.

When the variation of the second special symbol is changed so as to be displayed in the first display area Dm, the display mode in which the treasure box is opened is executed, and if the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect, as shown in FIG. 10 (a). The word "Sorry" is displayed from inside the treasure box, and the player is informed that the lottery result was out of order. On the other hand, when the winning / failing judgment result is a hit, the characters "Congratulations" are displayed from inside the treasure box as shown in FIG. 10B, and the player is informed that the lottery result was a win. To.

In this way, when the first special symbol wins a small hit in the probability variation game state ST3, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation of the new second special symbol is started. 2 The chances of the lottery game being executed can be increased. Further, in that case, as shown in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (b), the variation based on the second special symbol is emphasized and displayed, so that the player is expected to win the jackpot with the second special symbol. Can be made to.

In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is a decorative display according to the situation. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 8A, sub-display regions Ds are formed below the first display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 8B, the reserved symbol "black circle" corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. On the other hand, a second sub-display region Dt is formed below the second display region Dn. As shown in FIG. 9A, the reserved symbol "black triangle mark" corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the second sub-display area Dt. In the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four, so that a maximum of four reserved symbols "black circles" are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds. In the second sub-display area Dt, a maximum of four reserved symbols "black triangle marks" are displayed.

In the present embodiment, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed by a "black circle" and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is displayed by a "black triangle mark". Not limited to this, the reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be the same. By using the same reserved symbol for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the capacity of the symbol data can be reduced. Further, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. For example, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol may be displayed in the left area of the sub-display area Ds, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the right area, or the fluctuation starts from the left side of the display area. The reserved symbols may be displayed in order.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of two of the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three, four, or more lottery games and the corresponding start-up. Of course, it is also possible to provide each mouth and simultaneously configure the variable display of each lottery result.

When a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start port 640, the first start port switch or the second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is activated. Turns on. It should be noted that the first start port 630 and the right first start port 631 are formed on the back side of the game board 13 with a common guide path for guiding the game ball that has entered the ball to the first start port switch. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first start port switch and the second start port switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 are also one of the winning ports in which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when a ball wins a prize.

When either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the jackpot, the variation display based on the other special symbol is forcibly terminated. In the present embodiment, when one of the special symbols starts to fluctuate so that the winning / failing judgment result becomes a big hit, the special symbol that starts to fluctuate after the other is forcibly changed as a lottery result. Is configured to start. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the jackpot game is started continuously or the jackpot game is started at the same time.

In the present embodiment, when the winning lottery game is executed by one special symbol, the lottery game that is out of the game is forcibly executed by the other, but the other is not limited to this. The lottery game may be executed according to the lottery result so that the jackpot game can be started continuously. In addition, if one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted in the other special symbol, and the remaining fluctuation display is continued after the big hit. May be good. In this case, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be blinked and displayed in a predetermined display mode "for example, h of the alphabet" in a predetermined cycle. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended).

Further, a special symbol that preferentially executes the variable display in each game state may be specified, and the variable display of the special symbol may be preferentially executed. For example, in the normal game state ST1, the variation of the first special symbol is preferentially executed. In this case, the change of the second special symbol may be temporarily stopped (or forcibly stopped) based on the start of execution of the change of the first special symbol. As a result, if the first special symbol does not change, the change of the second special symbol can be executed, but when the change of the first special symbol starts, the change of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (or). Forcibly stopped). Therefore, the variation of the first special symbol can be preferentially executed in the normal game state ST1.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not win in any of the winning openings are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be returned to the initial state.

<About the configuration>
The characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, a left flow path PA1 on which the game ball flows down on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and a right flow path PA2 on which the game ball flows down on the right side of the variable display unit 80 are formed. A first starting port 630 is arranged below the center of the variable display unit 80. As described above, the game balls flowing down the right flow path PA2 are configured by the nail groups T2 and T3 so that 85% of the flowing game balls enter the second starting port 640. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path PA1 is more easily entered into the first start port 630 than the game ball that has flowed down the right side flow path PA2.

The first normal symbol start port 67a is arranged in the right flow path PA2, the variable winning device 65 is arranged below it, the right first start port 631 is arranged below it, and the second normal is on the right side thereof. The symbol start port 67b is arranged. A second starting port 640 is arranged below the right first starting port 631. A plurality of nails T for changing the rolling direction of the game ball are arranged on the game board 13.

The game ball launched into the right flow path is the right th when the electric accessory 632 is in the normal state (the state where the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are upright) due to the nail group T4 (composed of three nails). 1 It is configured so that a game ball does not enter the starting port 631. When the electric accessory 632 is in the normal state, 85% of the game balls flowing down the right flow path are configured to flow down the left side of the right first starting port 631. The ratio of the game balls flowing down the left side and the right side of the right first starting port 631 can be changed by adjusting the angle (inclination) of the nail T1. By inclining the angle of the nail T1 toward the variable winning device 65 side (opposite side to the nail group T4), the width between the nail T1 and the nail group T4 becomes wider, and the nail T1 flows down between the nail group T4. That is, the ratio of the game ball flowing down on the right side of the right first starting port 631 increases. On the other hand, by inclining the nail T1 toward the right first starting port 631 side (nail group T4 side), the width between the nail T1 and the nail group T4 becomes narrower, and the game ball flows down on the right side of the right first starting port 631. By reducing the ratio of playing balls, the ratio of game balls flowing down the left side of the right first starting port 631 can be increased.

The game ball that has flowed down the left side of the right first starting port 631 is configured to be guided to the second starting port 640 by the nail group T3 (composed of five nails). In the nail group T3, the width of each nail is arranged to be narrower than that of one game ball, and the game ball cannot pass between them (width). The game balls guided by the nail group T3 are prevented from flowing down the second starting port 640 by the nail group T2 (composed of three nails), and all of them enter the second starting port 640. It is configured. Not limited to this, it is natural that some game balls may flow downward from the nail group T3 side (or the nail group T2 side, or both).

Here, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 640, one prize ball is set to be paid out to the player. Since 85% of the game balls launched into the right channel PA2 are configured to win a prize at the second starting port 640 (when the electric accessory 632 is in the normal state), the game balls launched by the player. Of these, 85% are configured to be refunded as prize balls. Therefore, by launching the game ball into the right flow path PA2, the player can suppress the consumption (decrease) of the game ball as a holding ball as compared with launching the game ball into the left flow path. In this embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the right first starting port 631 does not win a prize in the second starting port 640 due to the nail group T2. Thereby, by adjusting the nail T1, the ratio of the game balls entering the second starting port 640, that is, the ratio of the game balls refunded as prize balls in the right-handed game can be adjusted.

Next, in the special state (the state in which the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are rotated until they are substantially horizontal, the open state), the electric accessory 632 is left side of the right first starting port 631 by the left guide member 632a. It is configured so that the flow path flowing down the water is closed. As a result, when the electric accessory 632 is in the special state (open state), the game ball flowing down the right flow path is prevented from winning the second starting port 640. Therefore, in the time-saving game state ST1h or the probability variation game state ST3, the winning of the right first starting port 631 increases, the winning of the second starting port 640 decreases, and the first lottery game with the first special symbol It is configured to increase the number of executions (execution frequency). Further, in the time-saving game state ST1h and the probability variation game state ST3, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set longer, the number of executions (execution frequency) of the second lottery game can be further reduced (lowered).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol which is advantageous to the player is set to be short, the game is performed so as to launch the game ball into the right flow path. As already mentioned, since the ratio of the game balls that win the second starting port 640 is set to 85% of the game balls that flow down the right flow path, the number of balls held by the player decreases. However, in the present embodiment, in the latent probability change game state ST2, the probability of winning a small hit with the second special symbol is set high. Further, the small hit game executed during the latent probability change game state ST2 is set so that the opening time of one round of the one variable winning device 65 is 1.8 seconds or 10 balls are won, and the opening time per round is set to other. Since it is extended from the small hit in the game state of, the prize ball can be obtained by the small hit. In the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit during the latent probability change is set to be 15% of the amount consumed by flowing down the right flow path, and is configured to compensate for the decrease in the number of balls held by the player. Has been done. Therefore, even in the latent probability change game state ST2, the player can play the game by suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held.

In the present embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, it is prohibited to play a game in a right-handed game (a game in which a game ball is launched into the right flow path PA2), and the second start port is in the normal game state ST1. When the game ball wins a prize in 640, an abnormality process is executed, an alarm display "Please play left-handed" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a similar warning is also notified by voice. Further, in the normal game state ST1, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 640, the jackpot may be controlled to be invalid, or an abnormal signal may be output to a hall computer or the like. You may.

In the present embodiment, the game method (left-handed game or right-handed game) is changed in each game state, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. It may be configured so that either a left-handed game or a right-handed game may be performed in all game states, or either a left-handed game or a right-handed game may be performed in a specific game state. You may. For example, a start port for the first special symbol and a start port for the second special symbol are provided at the lower center of the game board 13. Then, the game ball that flows down the left flow path PA1 by performing the left-handed game and the game ball that flows down the right flow path PA2 by performing the right-handed game are the starting port of the first special symbol and the second. It may be configured so that the ball can enter the starting port of the special symbol. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish between a left-handed game and a right-handed game in all game states or a specific game state, so that the game burden on the player can be reduced.

<Electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

The jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation type counter C3 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and some counters are not in the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45). It is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 wins the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second starting port 640 in which the counter values are stored for the winning of the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631. A second special symbol holding ball storage 203b is provided in which each counter value is stored. In the present embodiment, the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 are provided with a maximum of four holding balls, and the second starting port 640 is provided with a maximum of four holding balls, respectively. A maximum of eight reserved balls are memorable. Therefore, the game ball is moved to the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game. When a prize is won, each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball wins in the second starting port 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. .. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the first special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed). Various settings and control processing for this are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is moved to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and various types for variable display of the second special symbol. Settings and control processing are executed.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is at the first starting port 630 or When the right first starting port 631 and the second starting port 640 are won, if the number of holdings for the winning starting port is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning start port. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning start port is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and a prize ball (in this embodiment, one game ball). ) Is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is 4 in total for the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631, and 4 for the second starting port 640, but is limited to this. Instead, each of them may be four, or the upper limit may not be set.

Each counter shown in FIG. 9 will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first random number counter C1 is commonly acquired for each ball entering the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45).

The value of the random number counter C1 per first is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the spheres are the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start port. At the timing when the 640 is won (starting prize), it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning start port of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 14) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a (in this embodiment, "7" at the low probability and "0-9" at the high probability), it is determined to be the jackpot.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first hit random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (hits) that are big hits is 1 at low probability, the value "7" is 10, and the value "0-9" is 10. It is stored in the first random number table 202a.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment). ) Is reached and then returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the spheres are the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start. At the timing when the mouth 640 is won (starting prize), it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning start opening. The timing at which the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired is actually the timing at which the game ball is detected by the first start port switch (not shown) or the second start port switch (not shown). That is.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, a random number that is out of order. If there is, the variation pattern in the variation display effect and the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of deviation. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball execution area 203b is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect or The stop type is the one at the time of big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16) stored in the ROM 202.

As the jackpot type, as described above, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot E are set as jackpot types dedicated to the first special symbol, and jackpot C and jackpot D are set as jackpot types dedicated to the second special symbol. Has been done. The jackpot A to jackpot E are each composed of 15 rounds of jackpot games. Further, in the jackpot A, jackpot C, and jackpot D, the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is rotated for 5 seconds at the start of the 14th round, so that the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. When the game ball is detected by the probability change switch 65e3, the game state after the big hit game is set to the probability change game state ST3 or the latent probability change game state ST2, which is the high probability game state.

The method for making the game ball pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, a V variable winning device 651 in which a game ball that has entered can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (provided with a probability change switch 65e3) and a game ball that has entered cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (probability change switch 65e3). (Not provided) A non-V variable winning device 652 is provided. Then, in the jackpot that makes it possible to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to the high-probability gaming state, the V variable winning device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game cannot be shifted to the high-probability gaming state. In the jackpot, the V variable winning device 651 is not opened and closed, and the non-V variable winning device 652 is controlled to be opened and closed. Further, the V variable winning device 651 may be provided with a switching member 65h as in the present embodiment. Then, by moving the switching member 65h at a specific timing (for example, at the start of the 14th round), the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Then, in the jackpot that makes it possible to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to the high-probability gaming state, the V variable winning device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed in the 14th round, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to the high-probability gaming state. In the jackpot that makes it impossible to shift to, the non-V variable winning device 652 is controlled to be opened and closed in the 14th round. As a result, it is not necessary to change the control of the probability change switch 65e3 for each jackpot type, so that the design cost and the program capacity can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot B and the jackpot E, the switching member 65h is rotated only for 0.5 seconds at the start of the 14th round. It takes 0.5 seconds or more for the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 to reach the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, if the jackpot is B or the jackpot E, the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. It is configured so that it is impossible to play, and the gaming state after the big hit is not set to the gaming state with a high probability. In the case of the jackpot B and the jackpot E, which do not shift to the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot game, the switching member 65h may not be rotated. As a result, in the jackpot B and the jackpot E, it is possible to surely prevent the game ball from passing through the probability change switch 65e3, and since it is not necessary to rotate the switching member 65h, the power consumption can be reduced.

Therefore, even if the jackpot game is started, it is determined for the player whether or not the probability change is given during the subsequent jackpot game, so that the expectation for the probability change can be continuously held for a long time. Further, since the ratio of the probability variation given is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player can play the game by changing the degree of expectation that the probability variation is given depending on the difference in the special symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the jackpot type selection table 202d is composed of three types of tables, the jackpot type selection tables A to C. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table A. This jackpot type selection table A is used to determine the jackpot type based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 when a jackpot occurs in the normal gaming state ST1 (including the time-saving gaming state ST1h). It is a selection table. As shown in FIG. 16A, jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot) and jackpot B (15R normal jackpot) are set as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). For jackpot A, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set as a determination value, and for jackpot B, the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "34 to 99" is the determination value. Is set as. As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), one type of jackpot C is set, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99" is set as a determination value. That is, in the normal game state ST1, the jackpot A is selected with a probability of 34% and the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 66% when a jackpot is achieved in the special figure 1. On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in Special Figure 2, the big hit C is selected with a 100% probability.

As shown in FIG. 16A, in the jackpot A, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the operating time of the electric accessory 632 is also set long (electricity). This is a jackpot in which a V-winning open pattern is set, in which a support state) is not given and an open pattern in which a game ball can win is given to the probability change switch 65e3 of the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, the jackpot B is a jackpot in which the electric support state is not given and the V prize opening pattern is not set. The jackpot C is set to a jackpot in which an electric support state is given and a V prize opening pattern is set.

In this way, in the normal game state ST1, by setting only jackpot C as the jackpot type of the second special symbol that should not normally be played (variable), it is assumed that a jackpot occurs in the second special symbol due to fraud or the like. However, the latent probability change game state ST2 is not given, and the problem that at least two big hits are illegally given in the high probability game state can be suppressed.

Next, FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table B. The jackpot type selection table B is a table for determining the jackpot type when a jackpot is established in the latent probability variation game state ST2. In this jackpot type selection table B, jackpot A and jackpot E are set as jackpot types in Special Figure 1, and jackpot C and jackpot D are set as jackpot types in Special Figure 2, respectively.

The jackpot E is a 15-round time-saving jackpot, and the electric support state is given until the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to fluctuate 100 times after the jackpot game is completed. The jackpot probability in this case is set to a low probability state. In addition, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is set to be long when the transition to the latent probability variation game state ST2 is made, the big hit is the change of the first special symbol that has transitioned to the latent probability variation game state ST2. Is generally considered. In that case, with the intention of relieving the player, the jackpot E, which is not normally selected in the game state ST1, is set to be selected instead of the jackpot B. Therefore, the disappointment of the player can be suppressed, and the problem that the motivation for the game is significantly reduced can be suppressed.

When a big hit is made in Special Figure 2, a big hit C and a big hit D are set respectively. The jackpot D is composed of jackpots in which a latent probability change of 15 rounds is set. Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability change game state ST2 is set, there is a high possibility that the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to the high probability game state until at least two big hit games are executed. ing. Therefore, for the player, the jackpot D is set to a more advantageous jackpot type than the jackpot C in which the probability variation game state ST3 is set.

In the jackpot type selection table B, the jackpot C is set to "0 to 65" as a determination value, and the jackpot D is set to "66 to 99" as a determination value. Therefore, the jackpot C is set to be selected with a probability of 66% when the second special symbol is hit, and the jackpot D is set to be selected with a probability of 34%. Therefore, the player plays the game with the expectation that the jackpot D will be selected when the jackpot is hit with the second special symbol during the latent probability variation game state ST2.

FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table C. The jackpot type selection table C is a selection table used to determine the jackpot type when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3. In the jackpot type selection table C, jackpot A and jackpot B are set as jackpot types of the first special symbol, and only jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. The percentage of jackpot A selected is set to 34% (judgment value "0 to 33"), and the percentage of jackpot B selected is set to 66% (judgment value "34 to 99"). ).

In this way, when the probability variation game state ST3 is set, the jackpot D is always selected when the jackpot is reached in the second special symbol, so that the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set, and at least 2 is set for the player. It is configured so that the high-probability gaming state can be continuously set until the jackpot is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation game state ST3, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, and further, the electric accessory 632 is easily set to be in the special state (open state) (electric support). ), The number of balls entering the second starting port 640 is suppressed. As will be described later, in the probabilistic gaming state ST3, 3000 ms is selected at a rate of 191/199 and 30,000 ms is selected at a rate of 8/199 by lottery (see FIG. 19). Therefore, it is configured so that the fluctuation time of 30,000 ms, which has a long fluctuation time, is selected with a low probability.

Until the fluctuation time of 30,000 ms elapses, the electric accessory 632 is not operated in the special state (open state), and during that time, the game ball is likely to win the second starting port 640 (right-handed). Since 85% of the game balls are entered), the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be increased. On the other hand, during the probabilistic game state ST3, in the case of deviation as shown in FIG. It is configured so that a new lottery is not efficiently executed even when the reserved ball is stored. However, since the small hit probability of the first special symbol is set to 1/80 during the probability variation game state ST3 (see FIG. 15 (b)), every time a small hit is won in the first special symbol, The fluctuation executed by the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and then the fluctuation of the stored ball is started. That is, by winning a small hit with the first special symbol, the lottery opportunity with the second special symbol increases, and the lottery that is advantageous to the player is easily executed. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that he will win a small hit with the first special symbol, and can increase the expectations of the player other than the big hit. The lottery probability for small hits may be set to an appropriate value.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description of various counters will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0.

The value of the variable type counter CS1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball is moved to the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640. At the timing of winning (starting winning), the RAM 203 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

In the present embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired at the timing when the start winning is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the value may be acquired at the timing when the variation starts. Of course, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 may also be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 (a) to 18 (b), the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 17) for selecting a variation pattern in a low-probability gaming state, and a latent probability variation game. Fluctuation pattern selection table B for selecting a variation pattern in the state ST2 (see FIG. 18A), variation pattern selection table C for selecting a variation pattern in the probability variation game state ST3 or the time saving game state ST1h (FIG. 18 (FIG. 18). b) Refer to) are set respectively.

In each fluctuation pattern selection table, the type of fluctuation pattern is set according to the number of reserved balls when the fluctuation starts, the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1, and the hit / fail determination result. The type of fluctuation pattern determined by the main control device 110 is a rough content of the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation time and the rough fluctuation type (non-reach, various types of reach) are mainly determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 114 is configured to determine the content of a more detailed fluctuation pattern. With such a configuration, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal game state ST1, the hit / fail judgment result is deviated as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and an extremely long fluctuation time (dynamic display time) is determined regardless of the hit. Has been done. Specifically, 64800000 ms is selected and 18 hours is set. Since the business hours of a game store are usually long from 9:00 am to 11:00 pm, the business hours are 15 hours, which is longer than that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing with the second special symbol in the normal game state ST1 and making a big hit. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time is long even in the case of a big hit. In this case, by outputting to the hall computer or the like that the game is being played with the second special symbol, the game store can monitor the illegal game and give guidance in the correct game method.

In the present embodiment, the hit case has a long fluctuation time in the second special symbol, but the hit case may have a short fluctuation time such as 500 ms. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that the second special symbol executes an extremely long hit variation and the first special symbol does not execute the hit variation during that period.

As shown in FIG. 18A, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the case of being off is configured to be 180,000 ms, which is set extremely long. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, which is a hit, is configured to be 500 ms and is set short. With this configuration, even if the player shifts to the latent probability variable game state ST2 and the first special symbol of the first variation becomes a jackpot E, it is difficult to understand that the transition to the latent probability variable game state ST2 has occurred. it can. Furthermore, the jackpot game can be continuously executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 18B, in the probabilistic gaming state ST3, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol coming off is configured to be 180,000 ms, which is set extremely long. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the hit is configured to be 5000 ms, and is set according to the period in which the effect of the treasure box described later is executed.

In the present embodiment, the variable display that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured so as not to fluctuate at the same time, but the variation display that becomes a big hit can be performed at the same time. When configured, the fluctuation display time that is the jackpot of the second special symbol is shorter than the first special symbol (for example, 5 seconds) or extremely short fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 second), and the first special The fluctuation time that becomes the jackpot of the symbol may be configured so that a fluctuation time longer than the second special symbol (for example, 60 seconds) or an extremely long fluctuation time (for example, 5 minutes) is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to postpone the jackpot with the second special symbol, which may determine the jackpot B, which is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, and in the meantime, the second special. A jackpot C can be given to the player by making a jackpot with a symbol. In this case, if a big hit is started with one special symbol, the lottery game that is changing in the other special symbol may be invalidated. With this configuration, the jackpot C, which is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, is given, and the probability variation game state ST3 is determined immediately after the probability variation game state ST3 is set, and the probability variation game state ST3 ends in a short period of time. Problems can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-described configuration in which the fluctuation display in which the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time, the hit / fail judgment result in the first special symbol is a deviation. By setting the display time long (for example, 100 seconds) and setting the fluctuation time of the hit / fail judgment result in the second special symbol to be short (for example, 1 second), the first special symbol can be used during the time-saving game. The number of times the lottery result is displayed can be reduced (the number of times the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner) can be reduced, and the number of times the lottery for the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player, can be increased. If the number of time reductions is until the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates 100 times, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is changed 100 times in succession due to the deviation of the second special symbol. The number of times the second special symbol is variablely displayed during the time-saving game can be effectively reduced by configuring the time longer than the time when the variable display is performed.

Returning to FIG. 13, the description of various counters will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the ordinary symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is the hit of the normal symbol when it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 15 (c)).

Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the sphere is the first normal symbol start port 67a (through gate) or the second normal symbol start port 67b (see FIG. 22). It is acquired when it is detected that it has passed through the through gate). The number of random number values to be won is 5 in the normal game state ST1, and the range is "5 to 9". Further, in the high-probability gaming state, it is 200, and the range is "5 to 204". That is, in the normal game state ST1, it is determined that the player has won when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-9", and in the high probability gaming state, the acquired second random number counter When the value of C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and the symbol "○" is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory is displayed. The left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b of the 632 are opened once for a predetermined time (1.2 s in the present embodiment) in the normal gaming state ST1, and in the high probability gaming state, the predetermined time (this implementation). In the embodiment, the opening operation of 1s) is performed twice. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 41).

When the game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not displayed, and each counter based on the hold ball is stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c. When the value is not stored, the random number value is acquired from the second hit random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is variablely displayed or the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the number of times of holding (normal symbol holding 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the second random number counter C4. When a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to on, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on the random value is stopped or the hold is exhausted. If the data is shifted to the previous hold area, it is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the newly shifted and stored holding area is set to on. Judgment as to whether or not data is stored in the hold area or whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is executed depending on which hold area or whether or not the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

In the present embodiment, the lottery between the first lottery game and the second lottery game is configured to select various common counter values, but the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery By setting various counters dedicated to each game (second special symbol) and changing the update triggers and initial values of various counters between the first lottery game and the second lottery game, they are updated with different values. Of course, it may be composed of the counter values to be generated.

By configuring in this way, in the lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter values are acquired at the same opportunity, the counter values of different values can be acquired. It is possible to suppress a variation pattern selected between the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, and a problem that the result of determining whether or not the result is synchronized.

In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are selected from the common fluctuation pattern table, the trouble that the selected fluctuation patterns are synchronized is suppressed, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, the stored data in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (a RAM having a small storage area or the like is used) can be obtained.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 44) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 43) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e. , Ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability change flag 203g, probability change setting flag 203h, probability change passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203o, probability change effective flag 203p, discharge number counter 203s, time saving medium counter 203t, jackpot flag 203u, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, look-ahead hold ball storage area 203x, small hit flag 203y, time saving flag 203a2, other memory It has at least area 203z.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning a prize in the first starting port 630 up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). is there. Further, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the game ball winning the second starting port 640 up to the upper limit number (4 in the present embodiment). It is a storage area for.

The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops the variable display, the first special symbol is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the storage area. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. For details, see the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). (Not shown) is the same.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) are started. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) with the detection of winning is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the counter buffers of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. The value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting port 640, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer as in the case of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the corresponding values are obtained. Each area (not shown) is similarly stored.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, the MPU 201 executes the above-mentioned first process such as a jackpot lottery and a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Corresponds to one start prize among the data (counters C1 to C2, CS1 values) stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. The data is shifted to the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. In addition, the shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) when the start winning of the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b is detected. It is a storage area to be stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), The value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Set the normal symbol flag (not shown) to on and store (store) it. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that data (counter C4 value, normal symbol flag (not shown)) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. have. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing (starting prize) to the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b is digested in the holding area where the data is empty. The reserved areas are stored in order from the earliest reserved area.

In addition, when it is detected that the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning prize, each counter value is stored and the winning lottery of the normal symbol is performed. It is a memory for storing data (value of counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes a winning lottery, a display setting of the second symbol display device 83 or the second symbol display device 88, and the like. In addition, among the data corresponding to each start winning prize (value of the random number counter C4 per second) stored in the above-mentioned normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data corresponding to one start winning is reserved for this normal symbol. Shift to the ball execution area (not shown). In addition, the shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are the first start detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning of the mouth 630 or the second starting port 640, the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined. Each is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process (FIG. 44, S1514) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is the first special symbol reserved based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631. When the counter value is stored in the ball storage area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1. Is.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is a counter value in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 640. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol hold ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

In the MPU 201, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) are respectively. When stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is stored in the first special symbol change start processing (figure). 23, S203) or the second special symbol change start processing (FIG. 23, S206), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the change pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variation display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed (hereinafter referred to as “starting prize”), the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the second symbol display device 83 and the second symbol of the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display effect performed by the display device 88 up to 4 times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process (FIG. 44, S1514) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed (see FIGS. 41 and S1205).

The normal symbol flag (not shown) is a flag indicating that the data of the random number counter C4 per second is stored and is held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. is there. When the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, it is set to ON. Further, when the value of the second counter C4 is shifted to the next hold area (the hold area corresponding to the hold number in which the hold is exhausted and the hold number is reduced by one), the hold area before the shift is performed. The normal symbol flag (not shown) of is set to off, while the normal symbol flag (not shown) of the shifted and stored holding area is set to on. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is processed to stop the fluctuation, the normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to off.

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3). When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the game state is in a high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3), and when it is off, it indicates a low probability game state (including the time saving game state ST1h). ). In the present embodiment, when the probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to on at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (see S11682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started. In the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power outage occurs, the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3) after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3) is determined by the probability-changing switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. It is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is set to off based on the on. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

If the probability change setting flag is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch 65e3 has passed, the probability change setting flag 203h May be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 has been passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability change passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by determining fraud such that only the probability change setting flag 203h is turned on and the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. it can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this embodiment). It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the total of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation pass counter 203i is incremented and updated by 1 when passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1681 in FIG. 50). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1711 in FIG. 51). The probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, the game ball is added and updated one by one (S1673 in FIG. 50). .. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (total value of the discharge number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k is set to be on (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, in jackpot A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to on for 5 seconds based on the start of 14 rounds, and in jackpot B and jackpot E, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to 0.5 based on the start of 14 rounds. Set to on for seconds. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of 14 rounds in the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the jackpot B (S1642 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, in the process of S1679 of the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted and updated one by one. Further, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning of the probability change switch 65e3 according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in the present embodiment, a voice saying "look at the liquid crystal") for attracting the attention of the player. In the present embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 balls are won in the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). The notification counter 203m is decremented and updated one by one by the processing of S1664 of the notification processing (FIG. 49, S1631) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. When this command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the process for outputting the above-mentioned voice.

With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the 14th round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can use the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Gaze at 81. Here, in the thirteenth round of the jackpot game, the character of a girl is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the character "attention", which is a notification prompting the player to see the third symbol display device 81, is displayed. It is displayed. In the 14th round, the flow path solenoid 65k is activated, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the type of jackpot being executed will be determined. In order to keep the player expecting that the probabilistic game state ST3 is given until the end of the jackpot game, the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6A) is made difficult for the player to see. Notification effect is being executed. However, when the 13th round is completed, the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so during the interval period, the player is notified by voice to watch the third symbol display device 81. The notification effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, the player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display content, and the player's attention can be distracted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In the present embodiment, the player is configured to distract the player's attention from the switching member 65h by notifying the player to show the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable prize is won before the start of the 14th round. By notifying the device 65 so as to hold the player's hand over it, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Further, the device is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured to distract the player's attention by notifying the player to see the decorative lamp 34 or the like. Further, during the 13th round, the player may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like and giving a notification prompting the player to read it with a mobile phone. In the present embodiment, the maximum time (5 seconds from the start of 14 rounds) until the operation of the switching member 65h is completed is set as the effect of distracting attention. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the jackpot A, the jackpot C, the jackpot D, the jackpot B, and the jackpot E are determined by the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one (see S1632 in FIG. 50). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and is for determining whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter of.

The remaining ball timer 203o is the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one round set in advance is completed. Is a counter for determining whether or not has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball winning the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o. Is set as. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o (3 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected pieces match (3 seconds). S1707 of FIG. 51). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the 14th round, the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual one, and the jackpot B and the jackpot E are reached. Even so, it is possible to suppress fraudulent passage of the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3.

If the number of winnings and the number of discharged items do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probabilistic gaming state ST3 from being illegally given.

The probability change effective flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability change effective flag 203p is set to ON, the game ball flowing into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is the probability change switch 65e3 based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON. It shows that it is less than the time required to pass through. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The probability change effective timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability change effective flag 203p is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability change effective timer 203r, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability change effective timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability change switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to be passed.

As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not illegally guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the ball is allowed to enter the special discharge port 65e2 and the game ball is passed through the probability change switch 65h, or the game is played with a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65h. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up a ball to pass it or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect it as passing by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S1711 in FIG. 51).

The time saving medium counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of changes of the remaining special symbols in the time saving gaming state ST1h. At this time, the time reduction / medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, if the probabilistic game state ST3 is not set after the jackpot game, the game shifts to the time-saving game state ST1h 100 times.

The jackpot flag 203u indicates that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on winning the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640 is a hit at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag that is set to on when it is determined. In addition, it is set to off when the jackpot game is completed. In addition, it is composed of a flag that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the jackpot. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, and "10" sets the jackpot flag 203u on for the first special symbol, and "01" sets the jackpot flag 203u for the second special symbol. At "00", the jackpot flag 203u is set as off.

Here, since the jackpot flag 203u is commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to be on at the start of fluctuation. If so, even if the other lottery result is a big hit, the big hit flag 203u is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same manner as a loss. As a result, it is possible to process the first special symbol and the second special symbol so that the variable display that becomes a big hit is not executed at the same time.

That is, when the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit is started in one of the special symbols, the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit is not started in the other, and only the deviation mode is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured, but the present invention is not limited to this, and independent jackpot flags are set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to execute the variable display that becomes a big hit at the same time. With such a configuration, even if the fluctuation display of the jackpot B and the jackpot E is started in the first special symbol during the probability variation game state ST3, the fluctuation time is set long and the second special By configuring the symbols to be easily drawn in a short fluctuation time, it is possible to easily configure the second special symbol to win the jackpot before the jackpot B starts. Therefore, the effect of notifying the player of the time until the jackpot B starts (that is, the period until the probability variation game state ST3 ends) is executed, and the player is hurriedly hit the jackpot with the second special symbol. You can perform a production that lets you play a game in an attempt to win. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is a flag indicating that the jackpot game of the second special symbol is started to be executed while the first special symbol is variablely displayed. It is set to ON in S1004 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 36, S207) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Further, it is set to off in the process of S611 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204).

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variablely displayed. It is set to ON in S605 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S204) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Further, it is set to off in the process of S1011 in the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 36, S207).

The look-ahead hold storage area 203x stores determination information such as a hit / fail judgment result, a jackpot type, and a variation type for the hold ball stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. It is a storage area to be stored.

The small hit flag 203y is a flag indicating that the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. This small hit flag is configured to be able to identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the small hit. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as not to be a small hit at the same time (if one is a small hit, the other is a miss). Therefore, the small hit flag 203y does not have a value indicating that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are small hits.

The time saving flag 203a2 is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol (electric support state, high probability gaming state of the normal symbol). If the value of the time saving flag 203a2 is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state (electric support state) of the special symbol, and if the value of the time saving flag 203a2 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol. Indicates a state (a low-probability state of a normal symbol). The initial value of the time saving flag 203a2 is set to off, and is set to on at the end of the jackpot type jackpot game with electric support in the ending process (see FIG. 48) executed at the end of the jackpot game. (See S1655 in FIG. 48). Then, in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 41), it is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving (electric support) state (see S1208 and S1214 in FIG. 41), and the next jackpot game is started. (S607 in FIG. 29, S1007 in FIG. 36), or when the number of lottery of special symbols in the time saving (electric support) state reaches a predetermined number (see S628 in FIG. 30), it is set to off.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description continues. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for opening and closing a specific winning opening 65a, and an electric accessory. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving the above is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is connected. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variable display effect (a variable display effect). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a vibration sensor 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it displays in the order of winning displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The voice output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed so that the reserved symbol display being displayed is rearranged and displayed in the variable display start order.

A vibration sensor (not shown) is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since winning a prize at the starting port is an important factor for determining the game state, it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration to prevent the winning hole from being intentionally won. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 has been vibrated by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113>
Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. At least the variation pattern selection table 222a is set in the ROM 222.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the detailed contents of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a has a plurality of types of fluctuation contents (for example, fluctuations) corresponding to the fluctuation time and the rough fluctuation pattern (reach, non-reach, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110. One variation content is determined from the reach variation patterns of different display contents of reach A to D, which are composed of the same time and the same determination result.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (b). FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f. , Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, effect counter 223j, slave state setting area 223k, and other memory area 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. More specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The prize information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and each of these areas has. Stores the winning information respectively. From the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (variation) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. (Display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631, or in the main control device 110, in a special symbol. When the fluctuation display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. , Special symbol 1 Stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b, and holds the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223b, a display reservation ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is based on a reserved ball number command in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main controller 110 to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Since it is different only in that it is memorized, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, selecting an addition time from the addition time selection table 222b, and the like. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. It should be noted that each time the main process is executed, one is added and updated.

In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main control device 110 is set. The current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223h. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3). It has a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided with. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

In the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) is pressed when the power is turned on (power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)). In this case, it is a circuit for outputting the RAM erasing signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects the winning of a special symbol or a normal symbol, and executes control processing such as various lottery such as selection of a winning or fluctuating pattern for the winning. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably control the pachinko machine 10, the lottery for whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is sub-controlled as in the present embodiment. The control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced by performing the operation by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device.

The control board of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 is covered with a box (box) composed of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member called a board box. The substrate box is crimped by a member for preventing fraud called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted to each other, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (or By doing so, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member unless there is a method that leaves an opening mark, such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. There is.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the model having exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

In the following, the MPU 231 and the ROM 234 and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. Further, the ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 at any time, and controls the display of the third symbol display device 81.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured to enable variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, among the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the 7-segment LED on the left side executes the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol, and the 7 on the right side. In the segment LED, the variation display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 51. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) of the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b is executed. The through-gate passage process associated with the passage of the sphere in is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) and the through gate passage processing (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, a special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 23, S104) makes various determinations and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and displays the determined variation by predetermined control. In the embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously control the variable display, or control the stop display in the display mode showing the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 23, S104) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 23, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). When it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display elapses, the processing of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Will be done. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), the second special symbol is variable-stopped with a symbol indicating a big hit (or small hit), and the big hit game (or small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed. In this case, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol during the variable display is executed. When the second special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the variation display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the variation display (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start processing is executed (S203). In the first special symbol change start processing (S203), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a, the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection based on the hold data The process is executed. Further, in the first special symbol change start processing (S203), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. As a result, during execution of the variation display based on the big hit (or small hit) of the first special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol is controlled to be an out-of-order variation display. The first special symbol change start processing (S203) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. When the second special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), if the fluctuation of the first special symbol being displayed is interrupted (temporarily stopped), it is interrupted (temporarily stopped). It may be configured to perform the process of restarting the variable display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped).

After the first special symbol variation start process (S203) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is in the variation display (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variation display (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop processing (S207) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) will be described in detail later, but similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed. , The process of stopping the variable display is executed with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped fluctuating with a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit) and the big hit game (or small hit game) of the first lottery game is executed, the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is changed. The process of forcibly stopping is executed. When the first special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the variation display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). The details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in the variation display (S205: No), the second special symbol variation start processing is executed (S206). In the second special symbol change start process (S206), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold ball number storage area 203b, the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection based on the hold data The process is executed. Further, in the second special symbol change start processing (S206), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. As a result, during the execution of the variation display based on the big hit (or small hit) of the second special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is controlled to be an out-of-order variation display. The second special symbol change start processing (S206) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 31 to 35. When the first special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), if the fluctuation of the second special symbol being displayed is interrupted (temporarily stopped), it is interrupted (temporarily stopped). It may be configured to perform the process of restarting the variable display of the second special symbol that has been temporarily stopped).

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S203).

In the first special symbol change start processing (FIG. 24, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S303). .. A process is performed in which the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S305). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 24, S305) will be described in detail later, but based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Based on the set game state, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306) will be described in detail later, but the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S203), will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state ST3 (during probabilistic change) (S402). Whether or not the game state is the probability change game state ST3 is determined by whether or not the probability change flag 203g is set to ON. When it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (that is, the game state is the probability change game state ST3 (during probability change)) (S402: Yes), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) is displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for high probability, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (not during probability variation)) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a (FIG. 15A). Based on (see), it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for low probability, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

When the processing of S403 or S404 is completed, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on (S405). Here, when the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is set to ON, it indicates that the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit is started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, by using the jackpot flag 203u (and the small hit flag 203y) in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can simultaneously receive a jackpot. It is configured so that the fluctuation is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that big hits (or small hits) are continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the amusement store side becomes excessively large. If the second special symbol has started to be a big hit or a small hit, the first special symbol is selected without drawing the first special symbol (skipping the processing from S402 to S404). The variation display based on the deviation (Special Figure 1 deviation variation processing (S410)) may be executed. As a result, the lottery process (processes S402 to S404) can be skipped, so that the processing load can be reduced.

In S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off, that is, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit has not been started in the second special symbol (S405: No). ), It is determined whether the lottery result executed in the process of S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S406: Yes), the big hit flag 203u is set to on for the first special symbol (S407). After that, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery result) is set as a jackpot (S408), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set as the value of the jackpot type counter C1. It is set based on the game state (S409). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y for the second special symbol is on (S405: Yes), or in the processing of S406, it is determined that the lottery result is out of order. In the case (S406: No), the special figure 1 deviation processing is executed (S410). The special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S410) will be described with reference to FIG. 26, but the setting of the deviation symbol when the lottery result of the first special symbol is deviation is executed.

In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the first random number C1 actually acquired is a big hit, the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is already set to on, that is, the first 2 When a fluctuation that becomes a big hit or a small hit is started by the special symbol, the setting that is forcibly removed is executed in the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuations that become big hits (or small hits) are not executed at the same time, and the big hits (or small hits) are continuously obtained in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress the problem that the fluctuation is started and the damage on the game store side becomes excessive. Further, since the big hit (or small hit) is executed simultaneously or continuously, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the fluctuation that becomes a big hit is not executed at the same time, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to be executed at the same time. In this case, a dedicated jackpot flag may be set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, when the jackpot game is executed with the other special symbol, the measurement of the fluctuation time is temporarily stopped for the fluctuation of one special symbol, and the special symbol is pseudo-variated. , It is conceivable to configure it to temporarily stop.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a special figure 1 deviation change process (S410), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 24, S203), will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 1 deviation processing (S410). In the special figure 1 deviation variation processing (FIG. 26, S410), first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on for the second special symbol (S412). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on (S412: Yes), the first special symbol display device 37 is set to the off symbol of the first special symbol (S416). After that, this process ends. In this way, when a big hit or a small hit is set in the second special symbol, the off symbol is forcibly set in the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to fluctuations that are big hits or small hits at the same time.

On the other hand, in the process of S411, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off for the second special symbol (S411: No), it is currently determined whether the lottery result is a small hit. The determination is made based on the game state of the above and the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) (S412). If it is determined that the hit is not a small hit in the process of S412 (S412: No), the lottery result is out of order, so the process of S416 is executed and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S412, when it is determined that it is a small hit (S412: Yes), the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S413). The lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a small hit (S414), and the small hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S415). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203u is set to ON in the process of S407 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 25).

When it is determined in the process of S501 that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the current gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, latent probability changing gaming state ST2, probability changing gaming state ST3, The variation pattern selection table 202e according to any of the time-saving game states ST1h) is set (S502). The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 16A to 16C) corresponding to the set gaming state and the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2. (S503). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern selection table 203e set in the process of S502 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S504). A special figure 1 variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S504 (S505). After that, the process of S507 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the jackpot flag 203u for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the special figure 1 is out. The variation pattern selection process is executed (S506).

Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the special drawing 1 deviation pattern selection process (S506) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process (S506). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S506), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S511). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S511). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is on (S511: Yes), the small hit fluctuation pattern is set (S512). In the case of a small hit, one type of fluctuation pattern is set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Specifically, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) is set. When the processing of S512 is completed, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating the small hit is set (S513). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is a miss) (S511: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. 17 and FIG. 18) are set (S514). From the set variation pattern selection table, the deviation pattern is selected based on the hit / fail determination result (disappearance) and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 (S515). The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected deviation pattern (S516). After that, this process ends.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 27. After executing the process of S505 or the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process (FIGS. 28, S506), the process of S507 is executed. In the process of S507, a state command indicating the current gaming state is set (S507). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 22, S104), will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S204), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601). In the process of S601, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: Yes), the jackpot flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is determined whether or not it is set to (S602). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (S602: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S603). Although not shown, when the process of S603 is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is turned on is set.

When the processing of S603 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (S604). Then, the start of the jackpot game based on the selected jackpot type is set (S605). After that, the time saving medium counter 203t is reset to the initial value 0 (S606), and the time saving flag 203a2 is set to off (S607). Next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S608). A process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S609), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: No), then whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is turned on. Determine (S610). If it is determined in the process of S610 that the fluctuation stop flag 203y of FIG. 1 is off (S610: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S610 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is on (S610 in FIG. 29), it means that the second special symbol is stopped by a big hit or a small hit. The processes of S611 and S612 are executed in order to stop the fluctuation based on the first special symbol. In the process of S611, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to off, and the process proceeds to the process of S612.

In S612, the special figure 1 disengagement stop process for displaying the first special symbol in a disengaged manner is executed. In the process of S602 described above, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is off for the special figure 1 (S602: No), similarly, the special figure for stopping and displaying the first special symbol in an out-of-order manner. 1 Disengagement stop processing is executed (S612). When the processing of S612 is completed, the main processing is completed.

In this way, in the first special symbol stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the variation display has elapsed (S601: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is used. The process of stopping the variation display (S603 to S609 or S612) is executed. Further, when the second special symbol is stopped fluctuating with a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit) and the big hit game (or small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed (S610: Yes), the fluctuation display is displayed. The process (S612) of forcibly stopping the first special symbol is executed. When the first special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit) (S610: Yes), the fluctuation of the second special symbol being displayed is interrupted (temporarily stopped). You may.

Here, with reference to FIG. 30, the special drawing 1 disengagement stop process (S612) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 1 disengagement stop process (S612). In the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S612), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S621). Special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S622). Then, a special 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (indicating that the special figure 2 is forcibly stopped fluctuating) is set (S623). The start of the small hit game is set (S624). After that, the process of S625 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S621, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is off for the first special symbol (S621: No), the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order, so S622. Skips the process of S624 and shifts to the process of S625. In the process of S625, it is determined whether or not the time saving / medium counter 203t is a value larger than 0 (S625). In the process of S625, when it is determined that the time saving medium counter 203t is larger than 0 (S625: Yes), the time saving medium counter 203t is subtracted by 1 and updated (S626), and the time saving medium counter 203t after the subtraction is 0. It is determined whether or not it is (S627). In the process of S627, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S627: Yes), it means that the time saving game state ST1h ends. Therefore, the time saving flag 203a2 is set to off (S628). The process proceeds to S629.

On the other hand, in the processing of S627, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203t after subtraction is not 0 (greater than 0) (S627; No), the time saving gaming state ST1h continues, so the processing of S628 is performed. The process is skipped and the process proceeds to S629.

In the process of S629, the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S629). A process of stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed) on the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (S630). After that, this process is executed. Here, after returning to FIG. 29 and executing the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S608), this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time, but when the first special symbol is changed and stopped by the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit, the second special symbol is displayed. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to on so as to execute the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol. On the other hand, as will be described later, when the second special symbol is stopped to fluctuate due to the lottery result of a big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol is stopped by setting the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v to ON. It is forcibly executed. As a result, simultaneous fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be efficiently executed.

In addition, if one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has already started a fluctuation that becomes a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly removed as a result of determining whether or not it is wrong. The variable display is started. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the continuous forced execution of big hits and small hits, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the gambling becomes too high.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S206).

In the second special symbol change start process (FIG. 31, S206), the number of first special symbol hold balls in each process from S301 to S306 is compared with the above-mentioned first special symbol change start process (FIGS. 24 and S203). The counter 203d, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306) In each process from S701 to S706, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process. (S705) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) are the same except that they are changed, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705).

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 32, S705) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305) in the following points. In the processing of S801 corresponding to the processing of S401, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and in the processing of S408. In the corresponding processing of S808, the special figure 1 (first special symbol) is changed to the special drawing 2 (second special symbol), and in the processing of S809 and S810 corresponding to the processing of S409 and S410, the first They differ in that the special symbol is changed to the second special symbol. Since the other points are the same, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S810 and FIG. 33 in FIG. 32) executed in the second special symbol jackpot discrimination process (see FIG. 32) is also the above-mentioned special figure 1 deviation variation processing (see FIG. 26). Since the same processing as in the above is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 34, S706) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306) in the following points. In the process of S901 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S506 to S507. In each process of S906 to S907 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) differs from the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIGS. 29, S204) described above in the following points. In the process of S1002 corresponding to the process of S602, "for special figure 1" is changed to "for special figure 2", and in the process of S1003 corresponding to the process of S603, special figure 2 The point that the variable stop flag is changed to the special figure 1 variable stop flag, the point that the special figure 1 stop type command is changed to the special figure 2 stop type command in the processing of S1004 corresponding to the processing of S604, and S609 and In the processing of S1009 and S1010 corresponding to the processing of S610, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag, and in the processing of S1011 corresponding to S611, the special figure 1 deviation stop processing is special. FIG. 2 is different in that it is changed to the off-stop processing. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1011, FIG. 37 in FIG. 36) executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 36) is also the above-mentioned special figure 1 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 30). Since the same processing as in the above is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously variablely displayed. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

In this embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a stop display for a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can know that you haven't done so, and you can play the jackpot game with confidence.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) determines whether the game ball has won a prize in any of the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640, and if a winning ball is won, it is held. Up to the maximum number (up to 4 for each of the 1st start port 630, the right 1st start port 631, and the 2nd start port 640), each of the acquired counter values is set to the 1st special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the 2nd special symbol. This is a process of storing each in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a Alternatively, a process of predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described.

In the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 which is the first starting port (S1101). Here, winning a prize in the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 (there was a starting prize) (S1101: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set. Acquired (S1102). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103). It is determined whether this is less than four, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved pieces for the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 (that is, whether the number of reserved pieces is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1104). A hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of hold balls is set (S1105). Each value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 which are various counter values is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area 203a of the RAM 203 is read. Each is held (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls (S1106).

Next, the first look-ahead process is executed (S1107). The first look-ahead process (S1107) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 39, but the hit / fail determination result and the fluctuation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a , The process of determining the stop type, etc. is executed.

Next, with respect to each process from S1108 to S1114, the winning of the game ball to the first start port (first start port 630 and right first start port 631) executed in each process from S110 to S1107. Since the same process as the process performed in the above process is different only in that the process is executed for the second starting port 640, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the first look-ahead process (S1107), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first look-ahead process (S1107).

In the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 39, S1107), first, various counter values are obtained from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a, that is, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2. , Each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read out (S1121). The read data is stored in the area with the smallest winning order among the vacant storage areas of the look-ahead hold storage area 203x (S1122).

The hit / fail determination result is determined based on the data stored in the read-ahead hold storage area 203x. It should be noted that the hit / fail judgment result determined here is determined in the case of winning in the normal game state ST1. Since the fluctuation time is variably set according to the number of holdings, the timing at which the fluctuation starts cannot be determined between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that it is not possible to accurately determine the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, the hit / fail determination result can be accurately determined only when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 which has the same jackpot determination value in both the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state is "7". Therefore, in the process of S1123, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a hit during the normal game state ST1.

In the process of S1123, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S1123: Yes), the first special symbol is a big hit, and the first winning command indicating the big hit type is set. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1123 that the winning / failing determination result is incorrect (S1123: No), the first winning command indicating that the pre-reading lottery result of the first special symbol is incorrect is set (S1125). .. After that, this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port (first starting port 630 or right first starting port 631) and is newly held and stored, the information held and stored is used. Based on this, the hit / fail determination result is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the display mode of the hold ball can be changed (for example, the color of the hold ball can be changed to a different color from the usual one) based on the hold-stored hit / fail judgment result, or before the fluctuation starts. It is possible to display a notice symbol or the like to perform an effect of suggesting a winning / failing judgment result to the player.

In the present embodiment, in the case of pre-reading, the hit / fail determination is determined as the normal game state ST1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state at the start of the fluctuation is accurately determined, and the hit / fail determination is made based on the game state. It may be configured to run. In this case, the selection of the fluctuation pattern is not variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by configuring so that a constant fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the fluctuation order until the reserved ball starts to fluctuate based on the information stored on hold.

Next, the second look-ahead process (S1114), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this second look-ahead process (S1114).

The second look-ahead process (FIG. 40, S1114) is based on the above-mentioned first look-ahead process (FIG. 39, S1107) winning a prize in the first start port (first start port 630 or right first start port 631). In contrast to the process of pre-reading the hold data in advance and making various judgments, the process is to pre-read the hold data based on winning the second start port 640 and perform various judgments. Since the same processing is executed only for differences, detailed description will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed at the same time. When a variable display that becomes a big hit or a small hit is executed in one special symbol, the variable display that is out of order is forcibly executed in the other special symbol. Therefore, in the first look-ahead process or the second look-ahead process described above, when the lottery result is read ahead, it may be configured to determine whether or not the lottery result is forcibly deviated. In this way, for example, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is pre-read, the period (time) during which the dynamic display of the pre-read lottery result is executed is calculated. Then, it may be determined whether or not the fluctuation that becomes the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol is executed during the period when the dynamic display is executed. If the lottery result is out of order, it will be out of order regardless of the execution state of the second special symbol, so it may not be determined. As a result, the processing load due to the above-mentioned determination can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display mounting unit 88, the opening time of the electric accessory 632, and the like.

In this ordinary symbol variation processing (FIG. 41, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting the ordinary symbol (second symbol). (S1201). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the period from the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83 to the middle of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 632. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S1201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S1202). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S1202: Yes). S1222). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S1220 and the processing of S1221, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display mounting unit 88.

In the process of S1222, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1222: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1222, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be variablely displayed has elapsed (S1222: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1223). .. In the process of S1223, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S1213, the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode at the time of the miss is set by the process of S1218, the "x" symbol is displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S1223, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the process of S1213 and the process of S1218. 2 A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S1224). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1224: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 632 is set (S1225). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out of order (S1224: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1202: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired. (S1203).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S1204). If it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S1204: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S1205).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). In the process of S1206, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1207).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203a2 is on, that is, whether or not the time saving gaming state ST1h or the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set (S1208). When it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is off in the processing of S1208 (S1208: No), based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) for the low probability time, The hit / fail determination result is acquired (S1211). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is on (S1208: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1209). If it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1209: Yes), the process of S1211 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1209: No), the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c (FIG. 15 (c)) for high probability. The hit / fail determination result is acquired based on (S1210).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1212). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a hit (that is, it is a miss) (S1212: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of the miss is set. (S1218). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is determined to be a hit (that is, a win) (S1212: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode at the time of hit, is displayed. It is set (S1213).

It is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203a2 is on, that is, whether or not the time saving game state ST1h or the probability variation game state ST3 is set (S1214). If it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is off in the processing of S1214 (S1214: No), the processing of S1217 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is on (S1214: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1215). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot, the process of S1216 is executed.

In the process of S1216, the opening time of the guiding members (left guiding member 632a and right guiding member 632b) of the electric accessory 632 is set to 1 s and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1216). On the other hand, in the processing of S1215, when it is determined that the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (that is, it is in a low probability gaming state) (S1215: Yes), the electric accessory 632 The blade opening time is set to 0.2 s and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1217).

It is determined whether the gaming state is during the time-saving gaming state ST1h (including the probabilistic gaming state ST3) (S1219). When it is determined that the time is shortened (S1219: Yes), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is acquired by the value of the normal diagram fluctuation type counter CS2, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (figure). The fluctuation time is determined from (see 19) (S1220). After that, this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal map is determined from the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 19) based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2. As shown in FIG. 19, in the normal figure variation pattern selection table 202f, a variation pattern of a normal symbol is set corresponding to each gaming state. Except for the probabilistic game state ST3 (probability change: with electric support), there is only one type of fluctuation pattern, and the same fluctuation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected normal map fluctuation type counter CS2. On the other hand, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state ST3, the determination value "0 to 190" determines the fluctuation time of 3000 ms, and the determination value "191 to 198" determines the fluctuation time of 30,000 ms.

As a result, in the probabilistic gaming state ST3, a longer fluctuation time than in other cases is selected with a probability of 8/199. If this long fluctuation time is selected, the electric accessory 632 will not be operated until the fluctuation time elapses. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the second starting port 640 is arranged below the electric accessory 632, and when the electric accessory 632 operates, the left guiding member 632a can win a prize in the second starting port 640. The flow path is blocked. Therefore, in the meantime, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 640 is regulated.

Here, as described above, if a long fluctuation time (30000 ms) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 632 does not operate during that time, so that the game is hit right during that time. About 85% of the balls will win the second starting port 640. Therefore, by selecting a long fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the probability variation game state ST3, the number of winnings to the second starting port 640 can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 16C, during the probabilistic gaming state ST3, the jackpot D is always selected when the second special symbol hits, which is more advantageous than the jackpot with the first special symbol. Is selected. Therefore, in the probabilistic gaming state ST3, the lottery with the second special symbol can be more advantageous to the player when the big hit is obtained than the lottery with the first special symbol. Therefore, by increasing the winning of the second starting port 640 during the probabilistic gaming state ST3, it is possible to give the player an advantageous period.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and determines whether the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. , This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 when the game ball has passed.

In the through-gate passage process (FIG. 42, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301). Here, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal gaming state (S1302). .. In the process of S1302, if it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state (S1302: Yes), it means that the right-handed game is executed even though the gaming state is the normal gaming state. The indicated notification command is set, and the process proceeds to S1304. If a notification command indicating a firing abnormality is set, this process may be terminated as it is, and the lottery for normal symbols may not be performed.

On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the normal gaming state (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1304. In the process of S1304, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S1304). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1305).

Whether the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: No), or the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. Even if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S1305: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1305). : Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S1306). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the free hold areas (normal symbol hold 1 to normal symbol hold 4) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203f of the RAM 203. Store in the area (S1307). In the process of S1307, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203 g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol hold 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of normal symbol hold 2 is set, if the value is 2, the area of normal symbol hold 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the area of normal symbol hold 4 is set first. Area.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1401) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 44), first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1501). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1502). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1503).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1504), and if it is turned on (S1504: Yes), the process shifts to S1512. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1504: No), it is further determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505), and if it is not stored. (S1505: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1512 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1506), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1507: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1512 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 are correctly saved.

In the process of S1512, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1512). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1513, S1514) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1513, S1514) is executed.

Further, the initialization process (S1513, S1514) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1513, S1514), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1513), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1514). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1510.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1504: No), the power outage occurrence information is stored (S1505: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is stored. If it is normal (S1507: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1508). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1509), and the process proceeds to S1510. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1510). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1511). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (S1600) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1600). In this main process (S1600), the counter update process and the power off time process are roughly classified.

In the main processing (FIG. 45, S1600), first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is input to each of the sub sides. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603) and executed. After the process of S1253 is executed, the probability variation setting process is executed (S1254). This probability variation setting process (S1254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but when the jackpot A or jackpot C is executed, the game ball enters the second specific entry port (not shown). When it is determined whether or not the ball has been hit and the ball is entered, a process of setting the data indicating that the game state after the big hit game is set in the probability change game state ST3 is executed in the state setting area after the big hit.

When the probability change setting process (S1254) is executed, the jackpot control process is executed (S1255). The jackpot control process (S1255) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43, but a process of setting the operation of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the jackpot game process (S1255) is executed, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S1256). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S1256), the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 632 is executed. After that, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1257).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1258). Briefly, on condition that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is used. The second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessory 632 is released for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1260). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1260: Yes), the process is shifted to S1251 and each process after S1251 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1260: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1261, S1262).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1261). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1252 (S1262).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1251 to S1258 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1256, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S1263 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1263), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1264). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1265), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1266), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1259 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1251 to S1258, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1261 and S1262 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1251. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1251 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1301) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1251 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (FIG. 45, S1600), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) of is executed (S1601). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 23) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 38) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 46) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1604). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 632 attached to the right first starting port 630 is executed (S1605). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1225 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S1216, the processing of S1217, and the processing of S1220 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1606). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), it corresponds to the variation pattern. The variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31) ends. , The variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 65). ) Is stopped and displayed (lit) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1607). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1220 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1223 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S1212 or the process of S1223 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41). ).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1609). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1609: Yes), the process is shifted to S1601, and each process after S1601 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1609: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1610, S1611).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1610). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1602 (S1611).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1601 to S1607 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1608, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 43 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S1612 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1612), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1613). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1614), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1615), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1608 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1601 to S1607, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1610 and S1611 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1601. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1601 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1501) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1601 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1604) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1604). This jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 45), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a jackpot or a small hit of a special symbol is started (S1621). Specifically, S606 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 29), S1006 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 36), or S624 of the special figure 1 deviation stop processing (see FIG. 30). If the process of S1024 of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 37) is executed and the start of the big hit or small hit of the special symbol is set, the big hit or small hit of the special symbol is started. judge. In the process of S1621, when a big hit or a small hit of a special symbol is started (S1621: Yes), an opening command is set (S1622), and this process is terminated.

The opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) and transmitted according to the game state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated regularly (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the jackpot or small hit of the special symbol is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpot A and 5000 for jackpot B). If this happens, the opening command should be sent. By doing so, for example, in the case of a big hit in a left-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is lengthened, and in the case of a big hit in the right-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is increased. Can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during the left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to the right-handed game as the big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, it is possible to secure a sufficient time to switch to a right-handed game (big hit game). As a result, the operational burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S1621, when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S1621: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is in the big hit or the small hit (S1623). As for the big hit or small hit of the special symbol, it is said that the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). , During the predetermined time after the jackpot game of the special symbol is completed. In the process of S1623, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1623: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is a big hit or a small hit of a special symbol, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1624). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1624: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1625). The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1625) will be described with reference to FIG. 47, but the open setting to the variable winning device 65 and the probabilistic solenoid in each round corresponding to the jackpot type is executed.

The jackpot operation setting process (S1625), which is one process in the jackpot control process (FIG. 46, S1604), will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1625). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 47, S1625), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is set is read (S1641). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S1641 (S1642). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 4) of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1641. After that, this process ends.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at each start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, in the case of the small hit game, the operation of the probabilistic solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 is set. The small hit is composed of two rounds, and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for one second in each round.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S1624, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1624: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability solenoid) 65k (S1626). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1626: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1627). After that, the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1628). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1626, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1626: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1629). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball ejection time, has elapsed. To determine as. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1630). After that, this process ends.

Here, the details of this ending process (S1630) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 48, S1630). In the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630), first, an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S1651). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON (S1652). If it is determined in the process of S1652 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1652), the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (S1653), and the process proceeds to the process of S1654. Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to on.

In the process of S1654, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a type with electric support (big hit C) (S1654). In the process of S1654, if it is determined that the jackpot type is a type with electric support (S1654: Yes), the time saving flag 203a2 is set to ON (S1655), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1654, if it is determined that the jackpot type is not the type with electric support (big hit C) (S1654: No), the process of S1655 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

When it is determined in the process of S1652 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1652: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot E (S1656). If it is determined in the process of S1656 that the jackpot type is jackpot E (S1656: Yes), 100 is set in the time saving / medium counter 203t (S1657), the process of S1655 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1656, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot E, the processes of S1657 and S1655 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the probability change switch 65e3 and set the high probability game state. Therefore, it is possible to keep expecting the player to shift to the high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3) until the jackpot game is completed. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a high probability gaming state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is given after the jackpot game, so that even during the jackpot game The game can be played with an interest in whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1629 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: No), the notification process is executed (S1631). Here, the details of the notification process (S1631) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1631).

In the notification process (S1631), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1631). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1631: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 13th round (S1632). The end timing of the 13th round is determined depending on whether it is detected that 10 balls have been won or that 30 seconds have passed in the 13th round. When it is determined that the end timing of the 13th round is reached (S1632: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1632, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the 13th round (S1632: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting a 2-second counter in S1633, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball ejection time after the 13th round is completed, and the voice of looking at the liquid crystal is heard. It is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 14th round, but the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 13th round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is identified. It is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the probabilistic game state ST3 will be given until the end of the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203 m, the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the 14th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but the effect is not limited to this, and from the 13th round. It may be executed continuously.

On the other hand, in the process of S1221, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1661: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by -1 (S1664). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665: Yes), the notification command is set (S1666). After that, this process ends. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the setting of the voice output "Look at the liquid crystal".

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 49, S1631) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1632). Here, the winning process (S1632) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1632).

In the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1671). The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1671: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1671: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1672: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1673). After that, the process of S1674 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not passed (S1672: No), the process of S1674 is executed.

In the process of S1674, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674: Yes), the closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1676). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1677). After that, the process of S1678 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being ejected after the opening / closing door 203n is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1674, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1675). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1675: Yes), the process of S1676 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1675: No), the process of S1678 is executed.

In the process of S1678, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1678). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1678: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by -1 and updated (S1679). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1680). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passage switch 65e3 (S1680: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1681). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on (S1682). After that, the process of S1683 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1680, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1680: No), the process of S1683 is executed. In the process of S1683, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1683). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S1684). The probability variation valid flag 203p is set to on (S1685). After that, this process ends. Here, by setting the probability change effective flag 203p to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change game Can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1678, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1678: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203p is ON (S1686). If the probabilistic valid flag 203p is off (S1686: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation effective flag 203p is on (S1686: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation effective timer 203r to update (S1687). It is determined whether the value of the probabilistic valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S1688). When it is determined that the probability change effective timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1688: Yes), the probability change effective flag 203p is set to off (S1689). The probability variation effective timer 203r is reset to the initial value 0 (S1690). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1688, when it is determined that the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1688: No), the process of S1680 is executed.

As a result, if the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation game state ST3 can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for determining the validity, it is possible to prevent the probability change game state ST3 from being illegally passed through the probability change switch 65e3.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 50, S1632) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1633). After that, this process ends. Here, the details of this exception handling (S1633) will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1633). In the abnormality processing (S1633), a processing for monitoring whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality handling (FIG. 51, S1633), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S1701). If it is outside the round validity period (S1701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1703). After that, the process of S1704 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702: No), the process of S1704 is executed.

In the process of S1704, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1704: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated (S1705) because it is in the period of the ball brushing time. The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1706). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1706: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1706: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the number of discharges counter 203s) and the number of prizes (the value of the number of prizes counter 203j) match. (S1707).

If it is determined that they match (S1707: Yes), the process of S1709 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1707: No), an error command is set (S1708). After that, the process of S1709 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 even if the jackpot is B.

In the process of S1709, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S1709), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to the initial value 0 (S1710). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to the initial values (S1711), and then this process ends.

<About the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 114>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 61, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S2116 (see FIG. 53) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see FIGS. 53 and S2113), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2116. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S2116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S2116 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S2116, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2116 is executed (see FIGS. 53 and S2115). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2116 is executed, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S2116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S2011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S2008 via the processes of S2004 to S2006 This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process is shifted to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

Note that the clearing process of S2009 is skipped because when the processing of S2008 is reached via the processing of S2004 to S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S2101 was executed (S2101), 1 millisecond. If the above has not passed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the process of S2101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S2102 to S2110 determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2111 and the variation display setting process of S2112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2101: Yes). S2102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S2105 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, and the setting is used as a command for the display control device. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). After that, the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After that, the command determination process (S2111) that performs the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2112. The details of this command determination process (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

In the process of S2112, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is generated by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

When the processing of S2112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2115), and the power-off process is executed (S2116). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S2117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to the process of S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2111). This command determination process (S2111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. The details of the command determination process (S2111) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the main control device 110 Further, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for variablely displaying the first special symbol. Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is executed in order to display the first special symbol in a variable manner (S2202). The special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55, but the setting required for variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Is executed.

Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2202), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (S2241), and the fluctuation pattern type is selected from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command. Extract (S2242). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiablely stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIGS. 61, S2112) described later. It is used when setting a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

When the process of S2242 is executed, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent probabilistic gaming state ST2 (gaming state without probabilistic transformation support) (S2243). When it is determined that the game state is other than the latent probability change game state ST2 (S2243: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the latent probability change game state is ST2 (S2243: Yes), the lottery result of the change of the first special symbol that starts to change is a change of jackpot E (15R normal jackpot: 100 times of electric support). (S2244). If it is determined that the fluctuation does not result in a jackpot E (S2244: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation is a jackpot E (S2244: Yes), the characters indicating the chance zone (see FIGS. 63A to 63B) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2245). ). After that, this process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player because the fluctuation time is set to be long, is set to be short. On the other hand, in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that was mainly executing the game is set to be long. As a result, when the player shifts to the latent probability change game state ST2, the player strikes right and plays the game so that the game ball wins the second special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to start changing at the same time. Here, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, in the second special symbol, a high probability game (probability variation) is always given when a big hit is made, but in the first special symbol, when a jackpot is reached, a normal probability game (low probability game) is given. Is configured to be awarded by lottery. Therefore, even if a jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot: no electric support) is given in the normal game state ST1 as a jackpot with the first special symbol, the fluctuation started with the first special symbol after the jackpot game is the jackpot E. Then, it will immediately shift to the normal game state ST1.

As described above, normally, after shifting to the latent probability variation game state ST2 in which the game is mainly performed by the second special symbol, the third symbol is displayed based on the start of the fluctuation of the jackpot E in the first special symbol. A chance zone (a notification mode indicating the time saving game state ST1h or the probability variation game state ST3) is displayed on the device 81. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the player displays the heaven zone (notification mode indicating that the latent probability changing game state ST2 is in the latent probability changing game state ST2) on the third symbol display device 81, and thereafter, the player has two big hit games. Recognizes that the high-probability gaming state (probability change) is maintained (highly likely) until is executed. However, in the chance zone, the player is not sure (high expectation) that the probabilistic game state ST3 will be granted even after the next big hit, and there is a possibility that the player is in the time-saving game state ST1h (low probability state). The game will be played while recognizing it.

Therefore, for example, if the player shifts to the latent probability change game state ST2 and the first change of the first special symbol is a big hit E, the heaven zone is normally displayed, but the chance zone is displayed. The Rukoto. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is discouraged in a short period of time.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the process of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2202) is executed, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2203). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner. Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2203: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) is executed. The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG. 56.

Here, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of this special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (S2301), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (S2301). S2302). The variation pattern type extracted here is identifiablely stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is displayed in the variation display setting process (FIGS. 61, S2112) described later. It is used when setting a variation pattern command for displaying a second special symbol that notifies the control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

When the process of S2302 is executed, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state ST3 (the gaming state with the probabilistic transformation support) (S2203). If the game state is other than the probabilistic game state ST3 (S2303: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state ST3 (S2303: Yes), it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol that starts to fluctuate is a big hit (S2304). Here, the determination is executed by determining whether the variation pattern is a jackpot from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command.

In the process of S2304, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol that starts to fluctuate is a big hit (S2304: Yes), a treasure chest hit notice effect command is set for the display control device 114 (S2305). .. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail determination is incorrect, the treasure box detachment notice effect command is set for the display control device 114 (S2306).

Here, the treasure chest hit notice effect command is a command instructing the third symbol display device 81 to display the display mode shown in FIG. 10A. In the present embodiment, when the state shifts to the probabilistic gaming state ST3, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol is displayed. In the 2 display area Dn, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. Here, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed in the second display area Dn is the symbol of the treasure box, and the display mode shown in FIG. 9 (a) and the display mode shown in FIG. 9 (b). Is repeatedly displayed in a short cycle (for example, every 0.5 seconds), so that it can be displayed as if it is blinking.

Here, when the probability variation game state ST3 is set, the long deviation variation pattern C (18000000ms) is selected if the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol is incorrect. Therefore, the frequency at which the second special symbol starts to fluctuate becomes extremely low. However, if a small hit is won with the first special symbol, the change of the second special symbol that is changing is also forcibly stopped and displayed based on the stop of the change, and is newly stored after the small hit game. The fluctuation of the holding ball of the second special symbol is started. In this case, the player expects that the second special symbol, which is easier to select a jackpot that is more advantageous than the first special symbol, starts to change to become a jackpot.

When the second special symbol starts to change, as shown in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (b), the treasure box showing the change of the second special symbol is enlarged and displayed in the first display area Dm. .. On the other hand, the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn. After that, after the treasure box is displayed in a display mode that vibrates for about 2 seconds, if the treasure box opens and the winning / failing judgment result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. Character is displayed, and it is notified that the second special symbol has become a big hit. Then, a notification mode indicating that the probabilistic gaming state ST3 "continue chance!" Is continuously executed is displayed.

When the jackpot D is selected when the jackpot in the special figure 2 is reached in the probability variation game state ST3 (that is, when the probability variation game state ST2 is configured to shift to the latent probability variation game state ST2) It suffices to display the notification mode (for example, the characters "Entering the heaven zone!") Indicates that the game state ST2 is entered. In this case, it should be configured to display a notification mode instructing to stop the firing of the game ball, such as "Stop firing!". Here, in the probabilistic game state ST3, the game is mainly executed by the first special symbol, but in the latent probabilistic game state ST2, the game is mainly executed by the second special symbol. Is set to. Therefore, when the game ball enters the right first starting port 631 and the reserved ball of the first special symbol is memorized, it triggers a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, so stop firing. By instructing, the defect can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, as shown in FIG. 10A, the display that the treasure box is opened is executed as in the case where the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, and then the hit / fail is displayed from the inside of the treasure box. The characters "Sorry" indicating that the judgment result is incorrect are displayed. After that, when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the display mode is switched to the display modes shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, and the blinking display is executed until the fluctuation time set in the second special symbol elapses. Will be done.

As a result, the player pays attention to the second special symbol only for a certain period at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time. Can pay attention to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Therefore, the game becomes easy to understand, and the player can play the game comfortably.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), this process ends. When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2205). If it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S2205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S2206). This stop type command reception process (S2206) will be described with reference to FIG. 57.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type command reception process (S2206). In the stop type command reception process (S2206), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received according to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on. When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on. (S2311). The stop type (big hit A to big hit E, missed, missed reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S2312). The extracted stop type is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is of the second special symbol. Each is identifiable as a stop type.

It is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (S2313). If the gaming state is a gaming state other than the normal gaming state ST1, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (S2313: Yes), it is determined whether the stop type is jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot: no electric support) (S2314). If it is determined that the stop type is other than the jackpot A (S2314: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type is jackpot A (S2314: Yes), the area with the earliest digestion order of the hold 1 (first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a) of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The hit / fail determination result of the reserved ball stored in) is determined to be a jackpot E (15 rounds normal jackpot: 100 electric support) (S2315). Here, the jackpot random value of the corresponding reserved ball notified by the winning command is read from the winning information storage area 223b and determined. Although not shown, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a first random number table 202a (FIG. 15A) and a jackpot type selection table 202d (FIG. 15) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. 16 (a) to (c)) are stored, and based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type counter C2 given to the winning command output from the main control device 110. The sound lamp control device 113 can determine the result of the hit / miss determination in the probability change state.

In the process of S2315, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is a determination result other than the jackpot E (S2315: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is the jackpot E (S2315: Yes), the characters "Chance zone entry" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the ending of the jackpot game. A display command to be instructed is set for the display control device 114 (S2316). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is not the jackpot E (S2315: No), as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the heaven zone (latent probability variation game state ST2) is entered at the ending of the jackpot game. A display command for displaying the characters "Entering the heaven zone !!" indicating the transition to the third symbol display device 81 is output to the display control device 114 (S2317). After that, this process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is entered, the probability variation game is likely to be continuously set until the jackpot game is executed at least twice. Therefore, the player can recognize that at least two jackpots have been promised when the characters of the heaven zone are displayed. In addition, since it is configured to be displayed at the ending, which is the end of the jackpot game, the player can play until the end of the jackpot game with the expectation of transition to the latent probability change game state ST2, improving the interest of the game. it can.

Further, even if the jackpot A is won in the normal game state ST1, if it is determined that the jackpot E is won in the latent probability variation game state ST2 in the hold 1 of the first special symbol, in the ending of the jackpot A, the time saving game state ST1h or Since the characters "Chance zone entry !!" indicating that the game is in the probabilistic game state ST3 are displayed, the player does not recognize that the jackpot game has been confirmed to occur at least twice, and the time-saving game state ST1h It is possible to recognize that the game is in the probabilistic game state ST3 and play the game. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the transition to the latent probability variation gaming state ST2 has occurred, and the disappointment of shifting to the time-saving gaming state ST1h in a short time can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the stop type command reception process (FIG. 57, S2206) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has not been received (S2305: No), it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2207). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S2207: Yes), the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command is included. The value of the number counter e (that is, the number of reserved balls for the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is extracted, and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is the voice lamp. The number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the control device 113, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d (S2208).

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640. Whenever there is a start prize, the values of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 are set to the values of the first special symbol of the main control device 110 by the processing of S2207. It can be adjusted to the values of the holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 becomes the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. Or, even if the value deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning is detected. Then, it can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

If it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received (S2209). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (S2209: Yes), the winning command processing is executed (S2210). The details of this winning command processing (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG. 58.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the winning command processing (S2210). In the winning command processing (S2210), first, the received winning command information is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S2401). Here, the winning information command is configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be distinguished, and the holding order (number of held balls) and the winning / failing determination result in the normal game state ST1 can be discriminated. ing. Furthermore, the values of various counters acquired at the time of starting winning are also composed of commands that can be discriminated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state (S2402). If it is determined in the process of S2402 that the gaming state is not the low-probability gaming state (S2402: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2405. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state (that is, the probability change is not in progress) (S2402: Yes), whether or not there is information on the probability change jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b provided in the RAM 223. (S2403). In the process of S2403, if it is determined that there is no information on the probability variation jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: No), the processes of S2403 and S2404 are not executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2405 as it is. On the contrary, when it is determined that the winning information storage area 223b has the information of the probability variation jackpot (S2403: Yes), the notification lottery process (S2404) is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2405. The notification lottery process of S2404 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. In the process of S2405, other processes are executed (S2405), and the winning command process is terminated.

Next, this notification lottery process (S2404) will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this notification lottery process (S2404). In the notification lottery process (S2405), first, the value of the effect counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 is acquired (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223j is a determination value (S2502). If it is determined in the process of S2502 that the value of the effect counter 223j is not the determination value (S2502: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j (counter in the range of 0 to 198) is a determination value (any of "0 to 50" in this embodiment) (S2502: Yes), the third A stop display mode command for displaying the characters "Stop firing !!", which notifies the symbol display device 81 to stop firing the game ball, is set for the display control device 114 (S2503), and this process is performed. To finish.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the winning information that is the probability variation jackpot, that is, the jackpot A is received in the normal game state ST1, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to notify the player to stop firing. Here, when shifting from the normal game state ST1 to the latent probability change game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set short, and the game in the second special symbol is the main game method (the second special symbol is the target of substantial fluctuation). ). However, if the jackpot A is won in the normal game state ST1 and the reserved ball for the first special symbol is stored, a lottery disadvantageous to the player is executed in the first special symbol even during the latent probability change game state ST2. Will be done. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the hold for winning the jackpot A is stored in the normal game state ST1, the notification to stop the firing of the game ball is executed by lottery, so that the player can play the game ball at an early timing. It is possible to stop the firing of the first starting port 630 and suppress the winning of the first starting port 630. In addition, the player can recognize that the jackpot A will be obtained at an early stage by being notified to suggest that the firing is stopped, and can diversify the production of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the launch stop notification of the game ball is executed by lottery, but it may be configured to always notify when the reserved ball of the jackpot A is stored.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the winning command process (FIG. 58, S2210), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (S2211). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S2211: Yes), the status command reception process (S2212) is executed. The details of this state command reception process (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

Next, the state command reception process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the state command reception process (S2212).

In the state command reception process (S2212), first, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the game state based on the state command received from the main control device 110 (S2601). Whether or not the game state has been changed is determined by comparing the game state information set in the slave state setting area 223k with the received game state. If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to S2602. In the process of S2602, it is determined whether or not to change the gaming state to the normal gaming state ST1 (that is, the time-saving gaming state ST1h) (S2602). When it is determined that the game state is changed to the normal game state ST1 (that is, the time-saving game state ST1h) (S2602: Yes), the main display area setting command corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is set (S2603). Here, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (“○ ×” in the present embodiment) is displayed in the second display area Dn. A display command instructing the display control device 114 is set. A display command is set for the display control device 114 to display the characters of the "lower boundary zone" indicating that the third symbol display device 81 is in the normal game state ST1 (S2604). After that, the process of S2612 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2602, when it is determined that the game state has been changed to other than the normal game state ST1 (S2602: No), the game state is changed to the latent probability change game state ST2 (game state without probability change support). It is determined (S2605). If it is determined in the process of S2605 that the gaming state has been changed to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (S2605: Yes), the main display area setting command corresponding to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 is set (S2606). Here, the display control device 114 is instructed to display the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the first display area Dm and the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the second display area Dn. The display command to be displayed is set. Further, the reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the second sub display area Dt. To.

Next, the hold 1 of the first special symbol determines from the winning information storage area 223b whether or not the hold information for which the jackpot E is determined is stored (S2607). When the hold information in which the hold 1 of the special figure 1 is other than the jackpot E is stored (S2607: No), the character indicating the heaven zone (see FIG. 62 (b)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Set the display command to be displayed (S2608). After that, the process of S2612 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is the jackpot E (S2607: Yes), a display command for displaying the character indicating the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2609). .. After that, the process of S2612 is executed. By the processing of S2607 and S2609, a jackpot E is generated immediately after shifting to the latent probability change state ST2, and when shifting to the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the display indicating the heaven zone can be prevented, so that the player can do so. It is possible to prevent (suppress) excessive disappointment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2605 that the game state has been changed to a game state other than the latent probability change game state ST2 (that is, the probability change game state ST3) (S2605: No), the probability change game state ST3 (game with probability change electric support) The main display area setting command corresponding to the state) is set for the display control device 114 (S2610). Here, the first display area Dm corresponds to the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and the second display area Dn corresponds to the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (in the present embodiment, the treasure box symbol (FIG. 9A). A display command is set to instruct the display control device 114 so that (see (b))) is displayed.

Then, a display command for displaying the characters of the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2611). After that, the process of S2612 is executed. In the process of S2612, the state of the game state indicated by the received state command is set in the slave state setting area 223k (S2612). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 54. After executing the status command reception process (S2212), it is determined whether or not the notification command has been received (S2213). In the process of S2213, when it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2213: Yes), the voice / lamp notification mode indicated by the received command is set (S2214), and the display corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the received command is set. A command is set (S2215) to end this process. By the processing of S2214, for example, based on the notification command indicating the firing abnormality set and transmitted in the above-mentioned through gate passage processing (see FIG. 42), the notification sound indicating the firing abnormality (“Please hit left!” And voice) is output. In addition, by the processing of S2215, for example, based on the notification command indicating the firing abnormality set and transmitted in the above-mentioned through gate passing processing (see FIG. 42), the display indicating the firing abnormality (“Please hit left! ”) Is output to the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined in the process of S2213 that the notification command has not been received (S2213: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2219), and this process ends.

Next, the variation display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2112). This variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is one process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of generating a display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit E), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 59, S2112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so that the process of S2705 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702).

Next, in the process of S2703, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111) is displayed in the other memory area of the RAM 223. Acquired from 223z, a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is generated (S2703). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to.

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S2703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

Along with the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S2704) in accordance with the setting of the display).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2705). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is not on (that is, off) (S2705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S2709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S2705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S2706). In the process of S2302 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2205), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Then, a variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is generated (S2707).

The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S2707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 has a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

Along with the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the second special symbol). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2708) in accordance with (the display has been set).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S2709). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i are not set on (that is, off) (S2709: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on (S2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is on. The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to off, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to off (S2710). ).

In the process of S2206 of the command determination process (FIGS. 54 and S2111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S2711). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the stop type (whether it is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot) is given to the display control device 114 based on the stop type. A special display 1 stop type command for notification is generated. If the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, whether the stop type (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) is applied to the display control device 114 based on the stop type. ) Is generated for display special figure 2 stop type command (S2712). The special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and notifies even when the determination result is incorrect. Will be done. If the determination result is out of order, the out-of-order symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114 so that both the first special symbol and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are variablely displayed at the same time. Can be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can play the game by switching the special symbol that sets a long fluctuation time with the fluctuation time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the transition of the gaming state. It is configured to control the special symbols that are possible. Then, in the latent probability variation state ST2, only the jackpot in the high probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3) is set to be drawn by the second special symbol given at the time of the jackpot. Even after the jackpot is executed, the high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3) is set again. Therefore, for the player, when shifting to the latent probability change game state ST2, the probability change state can be set until the jackpot is executed at least twice. Therefore, the player can recognize that two jackpots are guaranteed in the latent probability change game state ST2.

Further, in the present embodiment, 85% of the right-handed game balls are configured to win the second starting port 640 when the electric accessory 632 is not operated. Furthermore, in the latent probability change game state ST2, it is set to win a small hit with the second special symbol, and the lottery probability is that about 15% of the right-handed game balls are prize balls for the player. It is set with a probability that it will be paid out at. Therefore, the operation frequency of the electric accessory 632 is set low (non-electric support state), and even in the latent probability variation game, the game is performed in a state where the decrease in the number of balls held by the player is suppressed when the right-handed game is played. be able to.

Furthermore, if a big hit is made from the latent probability variation game state ST2 with the second special symbol, the probability of transition to the probability variation game state ST3 is 66%. Here, in the probability variation game state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be long and the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be short. Then, when a big hit is made with the first special symbol, either a big hit that shifts to the probabilistic gaming state ST3 again or a big hit that shifts to the normal gaming state ST1 is given by lottery. Therefore, the player can play the game in the hope that he will be able to win the big hit twice again. Further, by providing a case where the probabilistic game state ST3 is changed to the normal game state ST1, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. In the probabilistic game state ST3, the jackpot based on the first special symbol may shift to either the latent probabilistic game state ST2 or the normal game state ST1. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the probability-changing game state ST3 will shift to the latent probability-changing game state ST2, which allows the player to obtain two big hits again, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Furthermore, in the normal game state ST1, the lottery ratio of the jackpot A to which the latent probability variation game state ST2 is given is set lower than the lottery ratio of the jackpot B when the jackpot is mainly played by the first special symbol. , It is possible to increase the difficulty level of transitioning to the latent probability change game state ST2 and suppress the increase in gambling.

In the present embodiment, the game state is switched when the big hit game is executed, but the game state is not limited to this, and the game state can be switched depending on the small hit type even when the small hit game is won. It may be configured as. With this configuration, the small hits can be drawn more easily than the big hits, so that the frequency of switching the game state can be increased. Therefore, even when the gaming state is set to be disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to switch to the advantageous gaming state by winning the small hit, and the player can be expected to win the small hit. Further, even when an advantageous gaming state is set, it is possible to switch to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by making a small hit, and it is possible to suppress gambling.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 86. First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65. FIG. 64 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 65 is an enlarged view of an enlarged right side region of the gaming board 13.

In the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper right side of the front view of the game board 13 and the ball guidance path forming member 70 is provided on the right side region of the front view of the game board 13 with respect to the first embodiment. The point provided in the above, the point provided in the lower right decorative member 71 on the lower right side of the front view of the game board 13, and the second ordinary electric accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 and below the front view of the game board 13. A point provided on the side, a point where the first variable winning device 65 is attached to the lower right decorative member 71, and a normal symbol starting port (through) instead of the first normal symbol starting port 67a and the second normal symbol starting port 67b. The difference is that the gate) 670 is provided on the lower side of the front view of the game board 13 and the right first starting port 631 is deleted. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 64, in addition to the first embodiment, the game board 13 is configured by assembling a ball guiding path forming member 70, a lower right decorative member 71, and the like. The first starting port 630, the second starting port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, points added to the first embodiment with respect to the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 64.

A through gate 670 is provided on the right side of the game board 13. The through gate 670 is a gate type and is composed of a start port having a sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the through gate 670, a lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery conducted for the passing of the game ball to the through gate 670, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit.

When the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 2), and "○" and "○" and " After the symbols of "x" are alternately lit for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the ordinary symbols (symbols of "○" or "x" in this embodiment) indicating the lottery result are stopped and displayed (lit).

When it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with "○", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol was a win. When the winning symbol is displayed, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 operates for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). The second ordinary electric accessory 640a is maintained in a state of standing upward so as to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 640 in the normal state (non-operating state), while the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is maintained. By operating the object 640a, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle (40 degrees in this embodiment), and a state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second starting port 640 (special state). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of order, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with "x", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol was out of order. At this time, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is not operated, and the next variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for entering the balls into the first starting port 630 and the second starting port 640, a winning or not judgment (big hit lottery) of whether or not the game is a big hit is performed, and the type of the big hit is determined. Also do. The details of the jackpot type will be described later with reference to FIG. 74, but as the jackpot type determined here, eight types of jackpot A to jackpot H are used as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is set (see FIG. 74). These eight types of jackpots include the length of the interval time (1 second or 4 seconds), the possibility of V operation, and the presence or absence of electric support after the jackpot game ends (whether the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is easily put into a special state. Whether or not) are combined and set.

Here, the length of the interval time means that the game ball is placed at a predetermined timing (probability change switch) to the first variable winning device 65 provided with the special discharge port (specific area) 65e2 (see FIG. 6) provided with the probability change switch 65e3. It is the length of the interval time set to change whether or not it is possible to guide (whether it is easy or difficult) at the timing (timing when it can pass through 65e3).

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, but in the present embodiment, the interval time between specific rounds during the jackpot game (the round in which the second variable winning device 650 opens and closes (in the present embodiment). Timing of reaching the first variable winning device 65 by changing the interval time provided between 4R) and the round (5R in this embodiment) in which the first variable winning device 65 opens and closes. Whether or not the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 depending on the timing when the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 (easy or difficult). Is configured so that it can be set.

Whether or not the V operation is possible is whether or not the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6) provided in the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6) (easy or difficult). If V operation is possible, the game ball that won the prize in the first variable winning device 65 is set so that it can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, while V operation is not possible. In this case, the game ball that has won a prize in the first variable winning device 65 is set so that it cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (difficult). Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted. However, in the present embodiment, the operation of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6) provided in the first variable winning device 65. By controlling the above, it is possible to set whether or not V operation is possible.

In the present embodiment, the possibility of V operation is set by driving and controlling the switching member 65h, but it is sufficient as long as it is possible to set whether or not the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. A lid member that always opens and closes at regular intervals is provided on the upstream side of the passage having the probability change winning switch 65e3, and a stopper member that retains the game ball is provided further upstream of the lid member. Then, a configuration may be used in which the game ball can pass through the probability variation winning switch 65e3 only when the timing at which the stopper member is released and the timing at which the lid member is opened coincide with each other. By using such a configuration, it is possible to make the player know that the lid member is periodically opened, and the player is made to win the game ball in the first specific winning opening 65. If this is the case, it is possible to make people think that there is a possibility of passing through the probability change switch 65e3, which has the effect of increasing the motivation of the game.

In addition, the opening time (opening timing) of the lower attacker (opening / closing door) 65f1 that opens the first specific winning opening 65a is changed to make it difficult for the game ball to win in the first variable winning device 65. It may be possible to set whether or not the sphere can pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The presence / absence of electric support sets whether or not the second ordinary electric accessory 640a shifts to a state in which it is easy to operate in a special state (electric support state) after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, eight types of jackpot A to jackpot H are set as the jackpot types of the second special symbol (special figure 2) as in the case of the first special symbol (see FIG. 74).

Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged as variable winning devices that are operated in the open state during the jackpot game. The first variable winning device 65 is provided on the lower side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and in the specific round during the jackpot game (fifth round in the present embodiment), the first specific winning opening 65a is set for a predetermined period (see FIG. 64). It is operated so as to be opened until a predetermined number (10 balls in the present embodiment) of game balls (29 seconds in the present embodiment) are inserted (see FIG. 80 (b)).

On the other hand, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and is a round other than the specific round during the jackpot game (1st to 4th rounds and 6th to 7th rounds in this embodiment). In, the second specific winning opening 650a is operated so as to be opened until a predetermined period (30 seconds in the present embodiment) or a predetermined number (10 balls in the present embodiment) of game balls are inserted.

Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. On the right side of the game board 13, a ball guidance path forming member 70 for guiding a game ball launched by a right-handed game is assembled to the surface of the game board 13 with a screw. The ball guidance path forming member 70 has an opening 70a, which is an opening through which the game ball launched by the right-handed game can pass, and a plurality of guides that guide the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a to meander and flow down. A game ball in which the members (first guide member (first guide surface) 70b, second guide member (second guide surface) 70c, third guide member (third guide surface) 70d) and the third guide member 70d flow down. Is assembled and configured as one unit with the discharge unit 70e.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that the positional relationship between the position where the game ball passes (the position of the opening 70a and the discharge part 70e) and the member for guiding the game ball (each guiding member) is deviated. In addition to this, it is possible to suppress a problem that the positional relationship between the guiding members is displaced, and there is an effect that the manufacturing efficiency can be improved in the process of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10.

Below the ball guidance path forming member 70, a lower right decorative member 71 provided with a first variable winning device 65 is assembled to the surface of the game board 13 with screws. The lower right decorative member 71 includes a fourth guide member (fourth guide surface) 71a that receives a game ball that has rolled on the third guide member 70d of the ball guide path forming member 70, a first variable winning device 65, and the like. The decorative portion 71b is assembled and configured as one unit.

The decorative portion 71b is provided with a decorative lamp (light emitting means) (not shown) so that it can be emphasized that the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state during the jackpot game. Has been done. Specifically, the surface of the decorative portion 71b (the surface visible to the player) is composed of a half mirror, and when the decorative lamp is off, it becomes difficult to see the inside of the first variable winning device, and the first identification When the winning opening 65a is opened, the decorative lamp is turned on so that the inside of the first variable winning device can be visually recognized.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily make the player aware that the player is in a gaming state aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a, and also in a non-gaming state or a normal gaming state (during a big hit game). In a gaming state that is not), the structure inside the first variable winning device 65 can be made invisible (difficult), so that a fraudulent act (for example, a dedicated jig in the first specific winning opening 65a) can be made. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the switching member to be deformed by inserting the.

Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. A ball guidance path 72 is formed in the right side region of the game board 13 by the ball guidance region forming member 70 and the fourth guidance member 71a described above. The ball guidance path 72 is configured so that the game ball meanders, and a specific configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 65.

FIG. 65 is an enlarged front view of the right side region of the game board 13. Here, the flow of the game ball in the ball guidance path 72 will be described. First, the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a is received by the first guide member 70b. The first guide member 70b is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower right direction when viewed from the front of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the first guide member 70b in the lower right direction. The lower end of the flow of the first guide member 70b is assembled so as to face the second guide member 70c, and the game ball that has flowed down the first guide member 70b falls onto the second guide member 70c.

The second guide member 70c is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction in the front view of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the second guide member 70c in the lower left direction. The lower end of the flow of the second guide member 70c is assembled so as to face the third guide member 70d, and the game ball that has flowed down the second guide member 70c falls onto the third guide member 70d.

The third guide member 70d is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower right direction when viewed from the front of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the third guide member 70d in the lower right direction. The lower end of the flow of the third guide member 70d is assembled so as to face the fourth guide member 71a, and the game ball flowing down the third guide member 70d passes through the discharge portion 70e and is placed on the fourth guide member 71a. Fall.

The fourth guide member 71a is attached to the game board 13 so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction when viewed from the front of the game board, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the fourth guide member 71a in the lower left direction. ). The lower end of the flow of the fourth guide member 71a is configured to communicate with the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) of the first variable winning device 65, and the fourth guide is in a closed state when the first specific winning opening 65a is closed. The game ball that has flowed down the member 71a flows down (rolls) on the opening / closing door 65f1 and is discharged to the lower area (the area where the through gate 670 and the second starting port 640 are arranged) of the game board 13. It is composed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the game ball meanders on the ball guidance path 72, the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guidance path 72 (guide path passage time) meanders. It is possible to set it longer than when it is not set.

Further, each guiding member constituting the ball guiding path 72 is configured so that the inclination angle becomes gentler in order from the upstream side. Specifically, the first guide member 70b and the second guide member 70c are set to about 20 degrees, the third guide member 70d is set to about 10 degrees, and the fourth guide member 71a is set to about 5 degrees.

With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the flow speed of the game ball on the downstream side of the ball guiding path 72, and open / close communication with the rolling surface of the fourth guiding member 71a and eventually the fourth guiding member 71a. A plurality of game balls can be simultaneously retained (rolled) on the door 65f1.

Therefore, when the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, it is possible to win a plurality of game balls in a short period of time.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the game ball is configured to fall between the guiding members on an inclined surface inclined in a direction opposite to the flow direction, the flow speed of the game ball can be efficiently reduced. It is possible.

In the present embodiment, in order to simultaneously retain (roll) a plurality of game balls on the downstream side of the ball guidance path 72, the inclination angle of the guide member is loosened to reduce the flow speed of the game balls. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, a material having a high coefficient of friction (urethane or the like) may be attached to the rolling surface of the game ball of the guiding member to reduce the flow speed of the game ball. Further, the guiding member (fourth guiding member 71a) provided on the downstream side of the ball guiding path 72 and the game ball rolling surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 are configured to meander in the depth direction (horizontal direction) when viewed from the front of the game board 13. You may. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the fourth guide is provided so that a step does not occur between the guide surface of the fourth guide member 71a and the surface (guide surface) of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. The member 71a is provided on the lower right decorative member 71, which is formed separately from the ball guide path forming member 70. With this configuration, for example, when the ball guidance path configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is adopted for the pachinko machine 10 in which the shape of the first variable winning device 65 is slightly changed, the fourth guidance member 71a Only by changing the shape to correspond to the shape of the first variable winning device 65, the ball-guided path forming member 70 can be diverted. That is, there is an effect that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, the opening 70a of the ball guidance path 72 described above is located below the second variable winning device 650, and the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is open (the attacker 650b is open). In the operating state), the game ball is configured so as not to pass through the opening 70a (difficult).

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but in the present embodiment, the period (opening period, interval period) for closing the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 during the jackpot game. By changing the length, the game ball that has passed through the ball guidance path 72 can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 by the operation of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65, and the first variable winning device It is configured so that it is possible to control whether or not to win a prize in 65.

In the present embodiment, the two variable winning devices are arranged vertically apart from each other, and the ball guiding path 72 is provided between them (between the paths through which the game balls flow down), whereby the upper variable winning device (second variable) is provided. The time it takes for the game ball that passed without winning the winning device 650) to reach the lower variable winning device (first variable winning device 65) is delayed, but it is arranged as two variable winning devices. A configuration other than the above may be used. For example, a plurality of variable winning devices may be provided in the left-right direction, and a ball guidance path 72 may be provided between them.

Further, a plurality of variable winning devices and a ball guidance path 72 between them may be assembled and configured as one unit. With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the assembling work to the game board 13, and there is an effect that the manufacturing efficiency can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the ball guidance path 72, a configuration in which the game ball meanders in the left-right direction of the game board is used, but if the configuration is such that the time for the game ball to pass through the ball guidance path 72 is a predetermined time or longer. Other configurations may be used. For example, the path may meander in the front view depth direction (horizontal direction) of the game board 13, or the game ball may meander in three dimensions using both the left-right direction and the depth direction.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time during which the game ball passes through the right region of the game board 13 (the time during which the game ball flows down between the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65) is the distance at which the game ball flows down. Although it is realized that the game ball is extended for a predetermined time or longer by using a structure for extending the speed or a structure for slowing down the speed at which the game ball flows down, other methods may be used. For example, a regulating member that regulates the flow of the game ball is provided in the ball guiding path 72, and the regulating member is electrically driven at all times or at regular intervals to allow the game ball to pass through the ball guiding path 72. It may be configured to be longer than a predetermined time. By using the restricting member that is electrically driven in this way, it is possible to more reliably set the time for passing through the ball guidance path to a predetermined time or longer.

In the second embodiment, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the first starting port 630 during the right-handed game, but the first starting port is located in the right region of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment described above. 631 may be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a flow in which various gaming states in the present embodiment are set will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flow in which various gaming states are set. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a limit (100 times) on the number of times of giving electric support in the probabilistic game state ST3 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, and various game states are set. Are different. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transition ratio of the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability state after the jackpot game is set to the type of special symbol (two types of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and the gaming state (normal gaming state). It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a total of eight types can be set by combining ST1, the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the latent probability-changing gaming state ST2, and the probability-changing gaming state ST3). The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 74.

First, the flow in which various gaming states are set in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 66. In the normal game state ST1, first, a left-handed game is performed aiming at the first starting port 630 (see FIG. 64) provided in the lower center of the game board 13. During the normal game state ST1, the first special symbol is substantially subject to fluctuation. Specifically, in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol game is 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30,000 ms (30 seconds). The time is selected, and 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 76). With this configuration, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol start to fluctuate at the same time in the normal game state ST1, the first special symbol is before the second special symbol finishes one fluctuation. Since the symbol can be changed a plurality of times (at least 20 times in the present embodiment), the first special symbol can be substantially changed.

Then, during the normal game state ST1, when the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1) becomes a big hit, the big hit B (7R normal big hit: no electric support) and the big hit D (7R normal big hit: with electric support) ), The jackpot E (7R probability variation jackpot: with electric support) and the jackpot H (7R normal hit: without electric support) are selected.

Here, if a big hit is won in the first lottery game during the normal game state ST1, the probability of shifting to the high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3) is set to 50% after the big hit ends. The probability of transitioning to a low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time-saving game state ST1h) is set to 50%, and if the jackpots B, D, and H are won in the first lottery game, after the jackpot game is completed. , The normal game state ST1 is set again, and when the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, the probability variation game state ST3 is set after the jackpot game is completed.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the jackpot probability does not shift to a high probability unless the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game as described above in the first embodiment. Even if the jackpot E is won in the lottery game, the probability variation game state ST3 is not set unless the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, and the probability variation game state ST3 (high probability: with electric support) is a jackpot. It will shift to the time-saving gaming state ST1h (low probability: with electric support) where the probability is low.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the same jackpot type is won, the jackpot game depends on the result of the game during the jackpot game (the result of whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot game). The game states that shift after the end may differ, but when explaining the flow of setting various game states, the game states that can be shifted depending on the jackpot type (shift by playing normally). The game state) will be explained as the transition destination after the jackpot game is completed.

If the second lottery game is performed in the normal game state ST1, it is set to shift to the 100% low probability state without shifting to the high probability game state after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 74). ). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second lottery game from being illegally performed during the normal game state ST1.

Next, the probability variation game state ST3, which shifts with a probability of 50% when a big hit is won in the first lottery game, will be described during the normal game state ST1. In the probabilistic game state ST3, a right-handed game is performed aiming at the second starting port 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the game board 13. During the probabilistic game state ST3, the second special symbol is substantially subject to fluctuation. Specifically, in the probabilistic game state ST3, a fluctuation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol game. It is configured so that 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 78). By lengthening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in this way, it is possible to make the second special symbol a substantial fluctuation target. ..

Then, during the probability variation game state ST3, when a big hit is obtained in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the big hit E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and the big hit F (7R: high probability: Either (without electric support) or jackpot G (7R: low probability: with electric support) is selected.

Here, if a jackpot is won in the second lottery game during the probability variation game state ST3, the probability of shifting to the high probability gaming state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is set to 70% after the jackpot ends. The probability of transitioning to a low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time-saving game state ST1h) is set to 30%, and if the jackpot E is won in the second lottery game, the probability change game state is reached after the jackpot game ends. When ST3 is set again and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability change game state ST2 is set after the jackpot game is completed. Then, when the jackpot G is won in the second lottery game, the time saving game state ST1h is set.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the electric support ends when the total number of fluctuations of the first lottery game and the second lottery game in the probability variation game state ST3 reaches 100 times. Therefore, when the special symbol variation exceeds 100 times in the probabilistic game state ST3, the process shifts to the latent probabilistic game state ST2.

If the first lottery game is performed in the probability variation game state ST3, the rate of transition to the high probability game state after the jackpot game ends is set to 10%, and the rate of transition to the low probability state after the jackpot game ends. Is set to 90% (see FIG. 74).

Next, the latent probability variation game state ST2, which shifts at 10% when the jackpot is won in the second lottery game in the probability variation game state ST3, will be described. In the latent probability change game state ST2, a right-handed game is performed aiming at the second starting port 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the game board 13. During the latent probability changing game state ST2, the second special symbol is substantially subject to fluctuation. Specifically, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, a fluctuation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol game. , 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 78). By lengthening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in this way, it is possible to make the second special symbol a substantial fluctuation target. ..

Then, during the latent probability change game state ST2, when a big hit is obtained in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the big hit E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and the big hit F (7R: high probability) : No electric support) is selected.

Here, if a jackpot is won in the second lottery game during the probability variation game state ST3, the probability of shifting to the high probability gaming state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is set to 100% after the jackpot ends. It is set so that it does not shift to the low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time-saving game state ST1h), and if the jackpot E is won in the second lottery game, the probability change game state is reached after the jackpot game ends. When ST3 is set and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability change game state ST2 is set again after the jackpot game is completed.

Next, the time saving game state ST1h will be described. In the time-saving game state ST1h, a left-handed game is performed aiming at the first starting port 630 (see FIG. 64) provided in the center of the game board 13. During the time-saving game state ST1h, the first special symbol is substantially subject to fluctuation. Specifically, in the time-saving game state ST1h, a fluctuation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol game, and the first It is configured so that 1000 ms (1 second) to 30000 ms (30 seconds) are selected as the fluctuation time of one special symbol (see FIG. 77). By lengthening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in this way, it is possible to make the second special symbol a substantial fluctuation target. ..

Then, during the time-saving game state ST1h, when a big hit is obtained in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the big hit A (7R: low probability: no electric support) and the big hit C (7R: low probability: One of jackpot E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and jackpot F (7R: high probability: without electric support) is selected (see FIG. 75).

Here, if a big hit is won in the first lottery game during the time-saving game state ST1h, the probability of shifting to the high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3) is set to 95% after the big hit ends. The probability of transitioning to a low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time-saving game state ST1h) is set to 5%, and if the jackpots A and C are won in the first lottery game, the normal game is completed after the jackpot game is completed. If the game state ST1 is set and the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, the probability variation game state ST3 is set after the jackpot game is completed, and if the jackpot F is won in the first lottery game, after the jackpot game is completed. , The latent probability change game state ST2 is set.

Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 75, in the gaming state in which the time-saving gaming state ST1h is provided with electric support and the second ordinary electric accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 tends to be in a special state. However, as described above, the first special symbol is substantially subject to fluctuation during the time-saving gaming state ST1h, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol is a long fluctuation. Therefore, the second start port is in the time-saving gaming state ST1h. The game aiming at 640 is a very inefficient game. Further, since the second starting port 640 is set to have one prize ball for the game ball, even if a right-handed game is performed during the time-saving game state ST1h and the game ball is awarded to the second starting port 640. Since the number of balls to be played does not increase, in the time-saving game state ST1h, substantially the same game as the normal game state ST1 (left-handed game) is performed.

The flow of setting various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has been described above, but here, the main game characteristics (transition of various gaming states) of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. To do.

First, in the normal game state ST1, the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game to aim for the probability change game state ST3 (distribution 50%). Next, in the probabilistic game state ST3, while performing the second lottery game, the jackpot F is won and the latent game state ST2 is aimed at (distribution 10%). Alternatively, the player aims to shift to the latent game state ST2 by performing the special symbol game 100 times without making a big hit and ending the electric support.

In the probabilistic game state ST3, the jackpot for which the probabilistic game state ST3 is set again after the jackpot game ends accounts for 60% of the total jackpot, so the player goes to the latent probabilistic game state ST2 while acquiring the balls from the jackpot. We will aim to make the transition.

Further, this probability variation game state ST3 is configured so that a small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the second lottery game, and the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held by performing the small hit game.

Next, in the latent probability variable game state ST2, after the jackpot game is completed, the jackpot in which the latent probability variable game state ST2 is set again accounts for 90% of the total jackpot. This latent probability change game state ST2 is the game state in which the most promising ball output can be expected in the pachinko machine 10. A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, but the latent probability variation game state ST2 is configured to be able to obtain more balls than the probability variation game state ST3 by repeatedly performing the small hit game. .. That is, during the latent probability change game state ST2, it is possible to increase the number of balls to be output in the small hit game and the big hit game, and the same mode is repeated (looped) with a 90% probability after the big hit game is completed. It is configured.

Further, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the high probability game state transition rate of the second lottery game is 100%, and even if the remaining 10% is won instead of the 90% that loops the latent probability changing game state ST2, the probability change. It only shifts to the game state ST3. That is, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the jackpot can be won at least twice (ST2 → ST3, ST3 → ST1h twice) in the high probability game state.

Finally, the time-saving game state ST1h is a game state set when the state shifts (falls) from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment). ), It is a game state in which electric support is given. In this time-saving game state ST1, the rate of transition to the high-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set higher than in the normal gaming state, and if the jackpot is won in the first lottery game during the time-saving gaming state ST1, it is high. The rate of transition to the stochastic gaming state is set to 95% (70% for the probabilistic gaming state ST3 and 25% for the latent gaming state ST2). Then, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the normal game state ST1 is entered.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the game state (normal game state ST1, time-saving game state ST1h, latent probability change game state ST2, probability change game state ST3) are set. Based on this, it is configured so that a plurality of ratios of transitioning to the high-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game can be set, and further, the special symbol to be substantially changed according to the gaming state can be changed. It is possible to extremely reduce the rate of transition to the high-probability gaming state (0% in the present embodiment) when the second lottery game that is not a substantial fluctuation target is performed. With this configuration, even if an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed, it does not shift to a state advantageous for the player (high probability game state), so that the illegal game targeting the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It has the effect of being able to be suppressed.

Further, the actual variable target of the latent probability changing game state ST2, which is a high probability gaming state, is the second lottery game in which the second special symbol fluctuates, and the lottery result of the second lottery game is a big hit only during the latent probability changing game state ST2. Since the configuration is such that 100% shifts to the high-probability gaming state when the probability becomes high, in a part of the high-probability gaming state, the jackpot can be set to the high-probability gaming state at least twice. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine rich in game playability, and there is an effect that the interest of the game machine can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the flow of control of various devices during the jackpot of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a timing chart showing the flow of various devices executed from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game. Of the operation controls of various devices, the same operation control as that of the first embodiment described above will be omitted, and the details of other operation controls will be described later with reference to FIG. 80.

First, when the jackpot game is started, the main control device 110 operates various devices related to the jackpot game (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650) a predetermined number of times at a predetermined timing (see FIG. 80). Then, based on various commands output from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game on the third symbol display device 81.

First, when the jackpot game is started, the attacker (upper attacker) 650b is opened (turned on) in order to open the second specific winning opening 650b of the second variable winning device 650 after the lapse of a predetermined period t1 (opening period). ). Then, the attacker (upper attacker) 650b is closed when either the predetermined period (29 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses or the predetermined number of winnings (10 in the present embodiment) is satisfied. The period t2 in which the second specific winning opening 650b is in the open state is set as one opening period (round), and is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (7 times in this embodiment) in one jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is always open during the opening period t2, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the second specific winning opening is open and closed during the opening period. The upper attacker 650b may be operated so as to repeat the state. Even when such a configuration is used, the opening period t2 is set when either a predetermined period elapses after the second specific winning opening is first opened or a predetermined number of winnings are satisfied. It will be finished.

Then, the next round is started after a predetermined period t3 (interval period) has elapsed since the end of one round. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, a game of opening the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device is executed from the first round to the fourth round, and the fifth round. A game is executed in which the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened.

Next, the flow between the fourth and fifth rounds in which the specific winning opening that is opened during the jackpot game is switched from the second specific winning opening 650a to the first specific winning opening 65a will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a predetermined period t4, which is a specific interval period between the fourth and fifth rounds, can be changed according to the gaming state (see FIG. 80). For example, the jackpots A to D have an interval period of 1 second, and the jackpots E to H have an interval period of 4 seconds.

Here, the influence on the game by changing the specific interval period will be described. First, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball launched by the right-handed game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 passes through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state, and then the ball is guided. By passing through the route 72, it is possible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 64). The ball-guided path 72 is designed so that the ball-guided path passage time is 3 to 4 seconds.

Further, the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 operates in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 at the same time when the first specific winning opening 65a is opened (attacker 65b is on). The opening operation is controlled to be on), the mode (the state in which the V opening operation is on) is continued for a predetermined period t5 (2 seconds in this embodiment), and the game is played after the predetermined period (V opening period) t5 elapses. The sphere is controlled so as to operate (the V opening operation is turned off) in a mode in which it cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (difficult).

That is, in the jackpot game of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3, V is the sum of the specific interval period t4 and the period (2 seconds) t5 in which the V opening operation is on. The effective period t6 needs to be longer than the ball-guided route passage period (up to 4 seconds in this embodiment). Specifically, by setting the specific interval period t4 to 4 seconds, the V effective period t6, which is the sum of the specific interval period t4 (4 seconds) and the V opening period t5 (2 seconds), is set to 6 seconds, and the ball is guided. Make it longer than the route passage period (up to 4 seconds). With this configuration, after the upper attacker 650a in the fourth round is turned off (after the game ball can pass through the ball guidance path 72), the game ball that has passed through the ball guidance path 72 is V effective. It is possible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a within the period t6 and make it possible to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

On the other hand, if the V valid period t6 is set shorter than the ball guidance path passing period, it becomes possible (difficult) to make it impossible (difficult) for the game ball to win the first specific winning opening 65a within the V valid period t6. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, by changing the length of the specific interval period t4 according to the game state, the jackpot game capable of substantially passing V without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65. And V It is possible to provide a jackpot game that cannot pass (difficult). Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the main control device 110 during the jackpot game can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment described above, the operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (switching member 65h) is performed according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol). (Motion control that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 and motion control that cannot pass (difficult)) are set, and the length of the specific interval period t4 is set according to the game state when the jackpot is won. It is configured to be set.

In this embodiment, by changing the operation content of the switching member 65h as described in the first embodiment described above, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easy) operation pattern and non-passage. Although it is configured to set a possible (difficult) operation pattern, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. It may be configured to set an (easy) operation pattern and an impassable (difficult) operation pattern.

Specifically, first, when the round in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened (5 rounds in the present embodiment) is started, the switching member 65h is turned on for 2 seconds. That is, when the game ball wins at the timing when the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the switching member 65h so that the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easily). To drive. Then, the opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 is placed in the first specific winning opening 65a to open the opening / closing door opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that continuously opens for 29 seconds) and the first specific winning opening 65a. The opening / closing door opening pattern in which the game ball cannot win (difficult) (for example, an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.4 seconds is repeated 5 times from the start of 5 rounds and then continuously opened for 27 seconds) can be changed.

With this configuration, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easily) and the game ball does not pass by simply changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1 without changing the operation content of the switching member 65h. Possible (difficult) operation patterns can be set. Therefore, it is possible to substantially set a plurality of ratios of jackpot games that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, and there is an effect that various game characteristics can be provided to the player and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

Further, by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1, a game ball can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and a game ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult). When a configuration that enables setting of a different state is used, the timing at which the switching member 65 is started is not limited to the timing at which the first variable winning device 65 is started, but for example, the pachinko machine 10 The operation may be controlled so that a constant operation is always repeated at the timing when the power is turned on.

Further, by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1, the game ball can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and the game ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult). It is possible to set the period during which the switching member 65h is turned on for longer than 2 seconds by using the configuration that enables the setting of the above state. As a result, the game ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a can be more reliably passed through the probability change switch 65e3.

In the present embodiment, by changing the specific interval period t4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period, but other than that. The configuration of may be adopted. For example, the ball-guided path passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball-guided path 72, may be switched. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V opening period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game is shown. For example, in the first round, the first variable winning device 65 In the case of a jackpot game in which the first specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, the period of change according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1.

With this configuration, for example, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball-guided route transit time, the right side is accompanied by the start of the jackpot game (start of the opening period t1). The struck game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period t6 and can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance path passing time, the game ball hit right with the start of the jackpot game becomes the first within the V valid period t6. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

As a specific configuration, the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) that operates to open the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to operate a plurality of times in one round. (The first specific winning opening 65a is configured to repeat the open state and the closed state in one round), and the game ball that wins when the specific winning opening 65a is opened for the first time presses the probability change switch 65e3. It is preferable to configure it so that it can pass through. Further, the opening / closing door 65f1 that operates to open the first specific winning opening 65a is composed of a plurality of members having different predetermined movements, and the specific winning is performed only when the plurality of members perform specific movements. It may be configured so that the mouth is open.

By using the specific configuration described above, even when a jackpot game with a short opening period t1 (a jackpot game in which the game ball cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (difficult)) is set, the open state (within one round) is set. Since the game ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening (in the second open state), there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Return to FIG. 67 to continue the description. When the opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 (not shown) is turned off (end of the fifth round) and the first specific winning opening 65a is closed, the upper attacker 650b is turned on after the interval period t3 elapses (second). The specific winning opening 650a is open). After that, the operation of the upper attacker 650b is repeated until the final round (7 rounds) is completed, and after the second specific winning opening 650a of the final round (7 rounds) is closed, the ending period t7 elapses and the jackpot game is played. finish.

The third symbol display device 81 is executing the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game while the jackpot game is being performed. Specifically, in the early stage of the big hit game, a production display (directing A) is executed to congratulate the big hit game, and after that, a notification is given that the specific winning opening to be opened in the next round will be switched, and the big hit An effect display (effect B) is executed to notify (suggest) that a game is to be performed to determine whether or not to shift to the high-probability game state after the end of the game. Then, an effect display (effect C) that encourages whether or not to shift to the high probability game state is executed, and at the end of the jackpot game, the game state provided after the jackpot game ends (high or low probability of jackpot, presence / absence of electric support). The effect display (effect D) for notifying (suggesting) is executed.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which the above-mentioned effect B and effect C are switched is different (delayed) from the timing at which the upper attacker 650b is closed (the timing at which the fourth round ends). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent various processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 from being concentrated.

Further, the timing at which the effect B and the effect C are switched is between the timing when the upper attacker 650b closes (the timing when the fourth round ends) and the timing when the lower attacker 65f1 opens (the timing when the fifth round starts). Since the interval period (specific interval period t4) is set, the game ball uses the probability change switch 65e3 in this jackpot game based on the timing at which the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the jackpot can be passed, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game by grasping the result of the jackpot game at an early stage.

In addition, by preparing a plurality of timings for switching the effect display within the specific interval period t4 and providing a means for randomly setting the timing for switching the effect display, the jackpot game can be further based on the timing for switching the effect display. It can be difficult to get the result.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. Although the description on the display screen or the description thereof is omitted for the same parts as the contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 described in the first embodiment described above, the same is true in the present embodiment. It has a display.

First, in the present embodiment, the stage in which the main character is walking outdoors is displayed on the display screen during the normal game state ST1 (not shown). Then, when the jackpot is won and the game shifts to the probabilistic game state ST3, the display screen illustrated in FIG. 68A is displayed. FIG. 68A is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect in the probabilistic game state ST3.

On the display screen of FIG. 68A, the variation of the first special symbol is displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the variation of the second special symbol is displayed on the upper right of the screen. At the bottom of the screen, a game state display area is provided in which the current game mode (game state) "tower search mode (probability variation game state ST3)" and "right-handed" notifying the game method are displayed. In addition, on the right side of the screen, a status display area is provided in which an object imitating the tower currently being searched by the main character is displayed. In this status display area, "1F" which is the lowest floor of the object, "100F" which is the top floor, "rooftop" which is above the top floor, and "30F" which indicates the current number of floors are displayed. Has been done.

During the probabilistic game state ST3, the tower is climbed one floor each time the special symbol changes once, and the display is updated for each change so that the special symbol reaches the roof when it changes 100 times without winning a big hit. That is, the number of floors displayed with the cursor as the "current floor" ("30F" in this figure) is the same value as the current number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot. By displaying this status display area, the hero climbs the tower and finally rooftop in the situation where the special symbol is changed 100 times without winning a big hit during the probability change game state ST3 and the situation shifts to the latent probability change game state ST2. It is configured to be displayed as an effect to reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68 (b), the display contents when a big hit is won during the probabilistic game state ST3 will be described. FIG. 68B is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing that a jackpot was won during the probabilistic game state ST3. In FIG. 68 (b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as "555", indicating that the result of the lottery is a big hit. In addition, a forced stop display is displayed with "246" indicating that the first special symbol has come off. In the status display area, "50F" is shown as the current number of floors (the number of special symbol changes since the end of the previous jackpot).

In the probabilistic game state ST3, when a jackpot is won, a display body (elevator) for notifying that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the display screen. During the jackpot game, the elevator is boarded and the destination of the elevator is fueled (not shown). The destinations of the elevator are "outdoor" when the game state after the jackpot game is set to the normal game state ST1 or the time-saving game state ST1h, and "tower search mode (tower) when the probability change game state ST3 is set. There are three types, "1F)" and "Rooftop mode" (see Fig. 69) when the latent probability change game state is set to ST2, and each is configured so that the destination is suggested by the effect executed during the jackpot game. There is.

In the present embodiment, the game state set after the end of the jackpot is changed depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. Therefore, the jackpot game is performed before the start of the jackpot game or at the beginning of the jackpot game. The game state set after the end is not fixed.

Therefore, based on the winning jackpot types (A to H), it is determined between the gaming state that shifts when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 and the gaming state that shifts when the game ball does not pass (for example, the jackpot type is In the case of jackpot E, the gaming state that shifts after the jackpot game ends is the probabilistic game state ST3 or the time-saving game state ST1h), and the effect common to the discrimination result is used as the effect at the beginning of the jackpot game (for example, effect A in FIG. Then, it is preferable to determine whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, and set the effect at the end of the game (for example, effect D in FIG. 67) based on the determination result. With this configuration, the effect of the display screen can be displayed without discomfort with respect to the game result during the jackpot game (the result of whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3).

FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect in the latent probability variation game state ST2. On the display screen of FIG. 69, it is displayed that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and in the game state display area, right-handed display and the current game mode (game state) are displayed. A certain "rooftop mode (latent probability change game state ST2)" is displayed. Also, in the status display area, the "rooftop" display is highlighted to notify that the main character has reached the rooftop.

This "rooftop mode" is a mode for notifying (suggesting) the latent probability change game state ST2. In the pachinko machine 10, various values are set so that the gaming state in which the player is most likely to obtain a ball is the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 (a) to 80, but in the latent probability variation game state ST2 in which the actual variation target is the second special symbol, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set short. In addition, the small hit game time (of the small hit game time, the opening period and the ending time in which the game ball does not win the specific winning opening) is also set short (shorter than the probability variation game state ST3). That is, the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set to the game state in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for the longest time in the small hit game per unit time among all the game states. Furthermore, the jackpot probability is set to a high probability.

To the "rooftop mode" that suggests the latent probability change game state ST2, either win the jackpot F during the probability change game state ST3 (10% of the total jackpot), or without winning the jackpot during the probability change game state ST3. It is designed to transition by changing the special symbol 100 times.

At that time, as the effect display performed by the third symbol display device 81, for example, a big hit is won during the probabilistic game state ST3 (FIG. 68 (b)), and an effect of getting into the elevator (not shown) is started. Then, is the elevator going upstairs or downstairs during the jackpot game? After notifying (suggesting) which mode the player will shift to after the jackpot game is completed, the effect display in which the elevator reaches the rooftop is executed.

Further, in the case of shifting to the latent probability variation game state ST2 without winning the jackpot during the probability variation game state ST3, the effect shown in FIG. 68 (a) is continuously displayed until the special symbol changes 100 times, and every time. The current number of floors shown in the status display area increases by one floor for each change. Then, when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times and shifts to the "rooftop mode", the cursor displayed in the status display area shifts from "100F" to "rooftop" and shifts to "rooftop mode".

Next, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the "rooftop mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70A is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect in the latent probability variation game state ST2. FIG. 70B is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect when a small hit is won in the second special symbol in the latent probability variation game state ST2.

On the display screen of FIG. 70 (a), it is displayed that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the game status display area includes a right-handed display and the current game mode (game). The "rooftop mode (latent probability change game state ST2)" which is the state) is displayed. Also, in the status display area, the "rooftop" display is highlighted to notify that the main character has reached the rooftop.

Further, on the upper side of the display screen, "possession G (acquisition medium display)" is displayed as a value corresponding to the game ball acquired by the player. A plurality of treasure chests are displayed on the roof of the tower in the center of the display screen. This treasure chest is displayed so that it will be opened when the result of the special symbol game is a big hit or a small hit.

The acquisition medium display displayed on the upper side of the display screen is displayed corresponding to the game balls acquired in the flow of a series of games in the pachinko machine 10 (the flow from the first big hit to the transition to the normal game state ST1). It is a thing.

In the present embodiment, as the acquired medium display, a value corresponding to the total number of media acquired during the series of games is displayed. For example, it corresponds to the media acquired in the jackpot game during the series of games. The value and the value corresponding to the medium acquired in the small hit game may be displayed in a display mode in which the player can identify. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily grasp how the player has acquired the medium in a series of games. Further, when such a display is executed, if the value corresponding to the medium acquired in the small hit game satisfies a predetermined condition (the value corresponding to the medium that can be acquired in one big hit game), another value is obtained. It is preferable to display the display mode. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the medium equivalent to the big hit game has been acquired as a result of a plurality of small hit games.

On the display screen of FIG. 70 (b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at "123" indicating a small hit. Then, the first special symbol, which was changing at the same timing as the stop of the fluctuation of the second special symbol, is forcibly stopped and displayed at the wrong eye. In the center of the display screen, the selected treasure chest opens, and a treasure indicating a small hit appears from the inside.

FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect when a big hit is won in the second special symbol in the latent probability variation game state ST2. When a big hit is won in the second special symbol, one of the treasure chests displayed on the display screen of FIG. 70 (a) is opened during the fluctuation, and an effect in which a monster appears is displayed. Then, the battle with the monster starts during the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot game is notified (suggested) according to the result of the battle (not shown). For example, if you win the battle, you will reach the rooftop and shift to "rooftop mode". In addition, if you escape from the battle, you will be displayed to shift to the "tower search mode (1F)", and if you lose the battle, you will be directed to move to the "outdoor" stage (not shown).

As described above, in the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the effect that the story progresses is displayed for each mode corresponding to the game state, and the story is displayed according to the lottery result (big hit, small hit) of the special symbol. The results are configured to change. Then, since the player can grasp whether or not the current state is advantageous for the player just by looking at the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the game performance is more complicated than that of the conventional pachinko machine 10. There is an effect that the player can play the game without being confused even if he / she adopts (a game property that can acquire many game balls other than the jackpot game).

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 81. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the content of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed. The difference between the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 81. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 72A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment operates the small hit type selection table 202 g and the special electric accessory (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) with respect to the first embodiment. The difference is that the table 202h and the jackpot scenario 202i are added, and the values of the various counter values referred to in the various tables are changed, and the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. , The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first hit random number table 202a is different from the first embodiment in that the value set as the jackpot determination value is different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 (a).

The small hit random number table 202b is different from the first embodiment in that the conditions for determining small hits are changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 (b).

The second hit random number table 202c is different in that the values set as the hit determination values are different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 (c).

The jackpot type selection table 202d increases the jackpot type with respect to the first embodiment so that jackpots having different specific interval periods during the jackpot can be selected, and the jackpot type selection used in the time-saving gaming state ST1h. The difference is that the table D is newly provided. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75.

The variation pattern selection table 202e and the general map variation pattern selection table are different from the first embodiment in that the set variation time is changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79.

The small hit type selection table 202g is a table used when the small hit random number table 202b stabilizes with a small hit, and is a table in which the small hit type corresponding to each gaming state is selected. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (a).

The special electric accessory operation table 202h is a table in which the operation contents of the special electric accessory corresponding to the set jackpot type or small hit type are stored. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (b).

The jackpot scenario 202i is an area for storing a scenario selected when a jackpot is hit, and stores the timing and number of actions of the accessory during each jackpot. The jackpot scenario 202i is updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 85) and reset by the ending process 2 (S1730 in FIG. 86).

FIG. 72B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment has a small hit type selection table 202 g and a special electric accessory (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) operating table with respect to the first embodiment. The difference is that 202h is added and the values of various counter values referred to in various tables are changed, and other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. To do.

The jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is an area for setting (memorizing) the jackpot scenario updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 85), and is in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S254 in FIG. 82). , The jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set.

When the jackpot scenario is set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 in the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 87), the scenario counter 203c2 is updated by adding 1 to the ending process 2 (S1730 in FIG. 86). It is cleared at the same time as resetting the jackpot scenario.

The other memory area 203z includes other memory areas set in the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and at least the number of incoming balls counter 203j and the operation counter 203k shown in the first embodiment described above are included. , The notification counter 203m, the remaining ball timer flag 203n, and the remaining ball timer 203o are included, and are used in the same control as the first embodiment described above.

Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 73A. FIG. 73A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. The first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 199, and in a low probability gaming state, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is "7", the probability is high. In the game state, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is "7 to 9", it is determined that the first hit (big hit). That is, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability gaming state is "1/200", and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is "3/200". In both the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol used in the present embodiment, the winning determination is performed using the first random number table 202a.

The contents of the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). FIG. 73B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table 202b. In the present embodiment, the small hit is not won by the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1). On the other hand, in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the random number counter C1 per first is "10" in the low probability game state (low probability: no electric support, low probability: with electric support). If it is "~ 20", it is determined that it is a small hit, and in the high probability game state (high probability: no electric support, high probability: with electric support), the value of the random number counter C1 per first is "10 to 199". If there is, it is determined that it is a small hit. That is, the small hit probability by the first lottery game is "0/200", the small hit probability by the second lottery game in the low probability game state is "11/200", and the second lottery game in the high probability game state. The small hit probability is "190/200".

As a result, in the high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 and probability-changing gaming state ST3) in which the second lottery game is performed, the small hit game is frequently given. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (b), but the time when the second specific winning opening 650 is opened as a small hit game is the same in the latent probability variation game state ST2 and the probability variation game state ST3. The opening time and the ending time set as the small hit game are different, and the opening time and the ending time are set shorter for the small hit game in the latent probability variation game state ST2. That is, the opening time of the second specific winning opening 650 per unit time is longer in the latent probability changing game state ST2 than in the probability changing game state ST3. Therefore, the number of game balls that a player can acquire as a small hit game can be increased in the latent probability variation game state ST2 than in the probability variation game state ST3, and the player can acquire a game ball other than the jackpot game. It is possible to provide a game machine with unexpected surprises, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the first lottery game is set to 0%, but it may be set to, for example, about 10%, or the second lottery in the low probability game state. The probability of winning a small hit in a game is set to "11/200", but for example, it may be set to the same probability as the second lottery game in the high probability game state.

The contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (c). FIG. 73C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In the present embodiment, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 98" in the low probability gaming state. In the high probability gaming state, when the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is "0 to 99", it is determined that the second hit (per ordinary figure). That is, the probability of winning in the low-probability gaming state is "99/100", and the probability of winning in the high-probability gaming state is "100/100". If the player wins the prize, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a operates, and the game ball easily enters the second starting port 640 (special state). In the present embodiment, the probability of being the second hit is provided with a slight height difference between the high probability time and the low probability time, but the same probability may be used.

Next, the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 75. FIG. 74 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the jackpot type selection table A202d referred to in the normal game state ST1, and FIG. 74 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the jackpot type referred to in the probability variation game state ST3. It is a schematic diagram which shows the selection table B202d schematically. FIG. 75 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability variation game state ST2, and FIG. 75 (b) is a jackpot referenced in the time saving game state ST1h. The type selection table D202d.

The jackpot type selection table 202d is referred to when a jackpot is won as a result of lottery for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), and the type of special symbol won by the jackpot (first). Based on the 1 special symbol (special symbol 1) or the 2nd special symbol (special diagram 2)) and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the jackpot type is jackpot using the counter value acquired from the first hit type counter C2. It is selected from A to jackpot H.

The jackpot type selection table 202d used in the present embodiment has a point that the jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the time saving game state ST1h is added to the first embodiment described above, and the jackpot type to be selected is It differs in that it has increased, that the interval time of the jackpot game can be set according to the jackpot type, and that the ratio of the first hit type counter value assigned to each jackpot type has been changed, and other configurations. Are the same. The explanation of the same part will be omitted, and the difference will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the normal gaming state ST1, the ratio that the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes the high probability gaming state (high probability) is Interval time (specific interval time t4 in FIG. 67) and V operation (operation of switching member 65h) for each jackpot type so that the rate of becoming a low probability state (low probability) is 50% at 50%. , The presence or absence of electric support after the jackpot game is set. Specifically, an open pattern (V is possible) that controls the operation of the switching member 65h so that the game ball can pass (enter) the probability change switch 65e3 as a V operation according to the game state, and the game ball is the probability change switch 65e3. One of the open patterns (V not possible) that controls the operation of the switching member 65h is set so that it cannot pass (enter) the ball (difficult).

Further, if the V operation is V-enabled according to the game state as the interval time, the game ball is transferred to the first variable winning device 65 during the period during which the game ball can pass (enter) the probability change switch 65e3. "4 seconds (V possible)" that can win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and even if the V operation is V possible, the game ball is placed during the period when the game ball can pass (win) through the probability change switch 65e3. One of "1 second (V not possible)" that cannot be won (difficult) is set in the first specific winning opening 65 of the 1 variable winning device 65.

Then, it is set whether or not the electric support (100 times) is given after the jackpot game is completed. Regarding the granting of electric support, the game ball is granted regardless of whether the game ball passes (enters) or does not pass (enter) the probability change switch 65e3. For example, the electric support " When the jackpot type for which "Yes" is set is selected, when the game ball passes through (enters) the probability change switch 65e3, it shifts to the probability change game state (ST3) after the jackpot game ends, and the game ball temporarily switches the probability change switch 65e3. If it does not pass (enter the ball), it will shift to the time-saving game state (ST1h) after the jackpot game is completed.

In this way, the current jackpot type is selected from the jackpot types with different contents set according to the first hit type counter value acquired from the first hit type counter C2. For example, if a jackpot is won in Special Figure 1 during the normal game state ST1 and 50 is acquired as the first hit type counter value, the jackpot type E is selected. During the jackpot game provided by the jackpot type E, the game ball passes (enters) the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability variation game state ST3 is provided after the jackpot game is completed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot B, the jackpot D, and the jackpot H are set as the jackpot types in which the normal game state ST is selected after the jackpot game is completed. This means that regardless of whether "1 second" or "4 seconds" is selected as the interval time and "V possible" or "V not possible" is selected as the V operation, it is possible to shift to the normal game state ST1 after the jackpot game ends. It shows that there is sex. With this configuration, it becomes impossible (difficult) to grasp the game state after the jackpot game ends only by grasping the interval time and the contents of the V operation. Therefore, the player pays attention to the notification (suggestion) of the game state after the jackpot game, which is performed during the jackpot game (or the first special symbol change after the jackpot game ends), and the pachinko machine 10 is used. It has the effect of making people interested in the production display and suppressing the situation where they get bored of the game early.

Further, the distribution in which the V operation is "V possible" or "V not possible" differs only depending on the type of the special symbol, and is set so as not to be changed according to the game state. Specifically, in the first special symbol, the ratio of V operation being "V possible" is set to 90% and the ratio of being "V not possible" is set to 10%, and in the second special symbol, V operation is "V possible". The ratio of "V is not possible" is set to 0% and the ratio of "V is not possible" is set to 0%. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the V operation (operation of the switching member 65h) depending on the gaming state, so that the capacity for storing the operation instruction content for the first variable winning device 65 (switching member 65h) is reduced. Can be (can be two types). There is an effect.

Next, the selection of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (a). In the normal game state ST1, a game aiming at the first special symbol (left-handed game) is an appropriate game method that is advantageous for the player, but when an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed, the normal game state A game using the second special symbol is performed during ST1. As an inappropriate game, the RAM of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 is reset so as to shorten the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the long fluctuation (10 minutes) is set during the normal game state ST1. By receiving a lottery multiple times in a shorter time than the normally required fluctuation time, the player can shift to the latent probability change game state ST2, which is most advantageous for the player, without going through an appropriate game flow (see FIG. 66). Acts are possible. Assuming that such a game is performed, if a big hit is won by the second special symbol during the normal game state ST1, the big hit H is set to be selected. The jackpot H is a jackpot type that shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the jackpot game is completed.

Therefore, it is possible to give a penalty (penalty) to a player who plays an inappropriate game during the normal game state ST1. As for the penalty (penalty) to be executed for an inappropriate player, other than the above contents may be used. For example, during the normal game state ST1, a small hit is won with a second special symbol that is not a target of substantial fluctuation. If this is the case, the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the small hit game may be set as a special variation pattern, and at least the variation pattern in which the first special symbol is a long variation may be forcibly selected. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to continue the game substantially, and it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of an inappropriate game.

In addition, if a jackpot is won as a result of an inappropriate game, the operation content of the special electric accessory during the jackpot game is changed to the special operation content (difficult operation in which the game ball cannot be inserted into the specific winning opening). Contents) may be stored in advance in the ROM of the main control device 110.

In addition, for example, when the jackpot is won with the hold memory of the second special symbol and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the jackpot game is completed, the above-mentioned inappropriate game is performed unintentionally by the player. Since it may be broken, it may be executed only after a predetermined number of times (upper limit reserved memory number (4 pieces) of the second special symbol) after the end of the jackpot game, or the second start port 640 during the normal game state ST1. It may be executed only when the prize is won. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate (suppress) the penalty (penalty) for inappropriate games from being given to the player who is performing the normal game, and to give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Has the effect of being able to suppress.

Next, the jackpot type selection table B202d referred to in the probability variation game state ST3 will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (b). As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the probability variation game state ST3, the ratio that the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes the high probability gaming state (high probability) is At 10%, the rate of becoming a low probability state (low probability) is set to be 90%. This is because the game of special figure 1 in the probabilistic game state ST3 is an inappropriate game like the game of special figure 2 in the normal game state ST1, and therefore a penalty (penalty) is given to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in Special Figure 2, 70% of the game states are in the high-probability gaming state (high probability) after the jackpot game is completed, and 30% are in the low-probability state (low probability). It is set to be.

Next, the jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability variation game state ST2 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the latent probability variable gaming state ST2, the ratio of the gaming state after the jackpot game ends to the high probability gaming state (high probability). Is set to 30%, and the rate of becoming a low probability state (low probability) is set to 70%. This is because the game of special figure 1 in the latent probability changing game state ST2 is an inappropriate game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, and therefore a penalty (penalty) is given to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in Special Figure 2, 90% of the game states are in the high-probability gaming state (high probability) after the jackpot game is completed, and 10% are in the low-probability state (low probability). It is set to be.

Next, the jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the time saving game state ST1h will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the ratio that the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes the high probability gaming state (high probability) is At 95%, the rate of becoming a low probability state (low probability) is set to be 5%. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in Special Figure 2, the rate of the game state after the jackpot game ends is 5%, and the rate of the low probability state (low probability) is 95%. It is set to be. This is because the game of special figure 2 in the time-saving game state ST1h is an inappropriate game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, and therefore a penalty (penalty) is given to the player.

In this way, when a big hit is won in Special Figure 1 during the time-saving game state ST1h, even if the same low probability state is used, the game state after the big hit game is completed has a higher probability than the normal game state ST1. It is set so that it can shift to the game state. With this configuration, even if the player shifts to the low-probability state (falls), it is possible to provide a chance to shift to the high-probability gaming state (pullback chance) for a predetermined period. It has the effect of increasing the motivation of the player to play.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the transition ratio to the high-probability gaming state can be set according to the gaming state and the type of the special symbol, so that a wide variety of game playability can be achieved as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to provide the game, which has the effect of suppressing a situation in which the player gets bored at an early stage. It is also possible to give an appropriate penalty to a player who has performed an inappropriate game.

Next, a variation pattern selection table for selecting variation patterns in each gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time set for each fluctuation pattern is different from that of the first embodiment, and the others are the same. The same part will be omitted, and only the differences will be explained.

FIG. 76 is a schematic view showing the variation pattern selection table A referred to in the normal game state ST1. The normal game state ST1 is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In the present embodiment, as described above, a penalty can be given to an inappropriate game, so that the fluctuation time is set short.

FIG. 77 is a schematic view showing the variation pattern selection table B referred to in the time saving game state ST1h. In the time-saving game state ST1h, as in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the fluctuation time of various deviation fluctuation patterns of the special figure 1 is shortened. It differs from the first embodiment.

FIG. 78 (a) is a schematic view showing the variation pattern selection table C referred to in the latent probability variation game state ST2. In the latent probability change game state ST2, unlike the first embodiment, since the special figure 2 is the target of the actual change, the change time of the special figure 1 is changed to 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the change time of the special figure 2 is changed to 500 ms. It differs from the first embodiment described above in that it has been changed.

FIG. 78 (b) is a schematic view showing the variation pattern selection table D referred to in the probability variation game state ST3. The probabilistic gaming state ST3 is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the fluctuation time when the special figure 1 is off is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram showing a normal map variation pattern selection table for selecting the variation time of a normal symbol. This embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the number of types of ordinary symbols is one, and therefore the difference is that the number of ordinary symbols that refer to this table is one.

FIG. 80A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the small hit type selection table 202g. FIG. 80A is a small hit type selection table 202 g used when a small hit is obtained as a result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol game, so that a predetermined small hit is selected according to the game state. It is set. If the game state is a small hit during the normal game state ST1 or the time-saving game state ST1h, the small hit 1 is selected, and if the small hit is won during the probability change game state ST3, the small hit 2 is selected and the latent probability change. If a small hit is won during the game state ST2, the small hit 3 is selected. It should be noted that the small hit 1, the small hit 2, and the small hit 3 have different operating contents of the special electric accessory during the small hit game. The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (b).

Next, the operation contents of the special electric accessory (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) operated during the big hit game or the small hit game will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). FIG. 80B is a diagram schematically showing the special electric accessory operating table 202h. The operation content of the special electric accessory corresponding to the jackpot type is set by the special electric accessory operation table 202h.

First, the operation contents of the special electric accessory based on each jackpot type will be described. The same operation is set from jackpot A to jackpot E of the jackpot type, the opening time is 5 seconds, the number of rounds is 7, and the second variable winning device is from 1 round (R) to 4 rounds as the opening operation during the round. The 650 (top) opens for 29 seconds, and the first variable winning device 65 (bottom) opens for 29 seconds in the fifth round. Then, from the 6th round to the 7th round, the second variable winning device 650 (top) is set to open again for 29 seconds. The opening operation time during the round is set to 29 seconds, but the specific winning opening is set to be closed when 10 game balls win in the specific winning opening of each variable winning device during that period. Then, 2 seconds is set as the inter-round interval, 1 second is set as the inter-round specific interval (t4 in FIG. 67), and 5 seconds is set as the ending time.

The jackpot types E to H are different from the jackpots A to E described above in that the time of the specific interval between rounds is increased from 1 second to 4 seconds, and the same values are set for other items. .. By making the specific interval between rounds different in this way, as described with reference to FIG. 67, it is possible to set whether or not the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easy or difficult). There is. In this way, between specific rounds (a round in which the game ball is won in the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 and a round in which the game ball is won in the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65. By simply changing the interval time between (and), it is possible to set multiple percentages of jackpot games that can substantially pass through the probability change switch 65e3, providing players with various game characteristics and playing games. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the present embodiment, by changing the specific interval period t4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period t6 (see FIG. 67). However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, the ball-guided path passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball-guided path 72, may be switched. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V opening period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game is shown. For example, in the first round, the first variable winning device 65 1 In the case of a big hit game in which the specific winning opening 65a is open, the period of change according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1. With this configuration, for example, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball-guided route transit time, the right side is accompanied by the start of the jackpot game (start of the opening period t1). The struck game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period t6 and can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance path passing time, the game ball hit right with the start of the jackpot game becomes the first within the V valid period t6. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

In the present embodiment, the operation content of the special electric accessory set by the special electric accessory operation table 202h and the operation content of the switching member 65h corresponding to each jackpot type are set as a jackpot scenario. , Other configurations may be adopted. For example, the operation content of the switching member 65h may be set by the special electric accessory operation table 202h.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 having the probability change switch 65e3 is opened only once in the fifth round in one big hit game, but in one big hit game, the first The variable winning device 65 may be configured to be opened a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, the first variable winning device 65 may be configured to be in the open state in the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round.

With this configuration, the round before the round in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened can be changed to the round in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and during one jackpot game. It is possible to have a plurality (three) specific interval periods. Therefore, for each specific interval period, it is possible to set whether or not the game ball can reach the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 at the timing when the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. There is an effect that a person can have expectations multiple times during one big hit game.

When the above configuration is adopted, if the V operation is V-enabled (FIG. 74), that is, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, and at the same time, the switching member 65h is turned on for 2 seconds. In that case, it is determined whether the game ball is fired at a timing that allows it to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, and if the game ball is not fired at a timing that allows it to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, the player uses an appropriate game method. It is good to notify to.

Specifically, a detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided on the downstream side of the ball guidance path 72, it is determined that the passage of the game ball is detected within a specific interval period, and the third is based on the determination result. As a display for notifying the game method on the symbol display device 81, it is preferable to display contents explaining the game method such as "Don't stop right-handed hitting!" Or "If you keep firing, you have a chance to change!". By performing such a display, it is possible to support the game so that the player can play an appropriate game when the first variable winning device 65 is opened (5th round or 7th round). It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the playability.

The method for determining whether or not an appropriate game is being performed during the jackpot game is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and other methods may be used. For example, a method of determining that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball has been operated during the big hit game, or a method of detecting the amount of rotation of the handle and determining that the right-handed game is not performed is used. You may.

Further, the display content of the display for notifying (guidance) the game method may be changed based on the content of the winning jackpot. For example, if an appropriate game is performed, in the case of a big hit in which the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the display may be emphasized.

Further, a jackpot scenario in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened in consecutive rounds may be configured to be settable. By using such a configuration, even when the interval time is short, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, the variation can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible.

Next, the operation contents of the special electric accessory based on the small hit type will be described. There are small hit types 1 to 3 small hits, small hit 1 is a small hit selected when the game state is the normal game state ST1 or the time-saving game state ST1h, and small hit 2 is the probability change of the game state. This is a small hit selected in the case of the game state ST3. The small hit 3 is a small hit selected when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (see FIG. 80A).

Each small hit is set so that the opening time, the opening operation during the round, and the ending time are different. Specifically, the small hit 1 is set to have an opening time and an ending time of 7.5 seconds, and is set so that the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is repeated 6 times as the opening operation during the round. That is, the small hit 1 is set as a small hit in which high-speed opening is repeated, and the game ball rarely wins a prize in the specific winning opening during the small hit game (difficult).

Next, in the small hit 2, the opening time and the ending time are set to 7.5 seconds, which is the same as the small hit 1, but the opening operation of 1.8 seconds is performed once during the round. It is set. That is, in the small hit 2, the operation of the special electric accessory is set so that the game ball can win a prize in the specific winning opening.

Specifically, in the probability variation game state ST3 (see FIG. 80 (a)) in which the small hit 2 is selected, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit game of the small hit 2 is set. The time is set to 16.8 seconds (about 17 seconds), which is the sum of the opening time (7.5 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds), and the ending time (7.5 seconds). Assuming that the number of game balls to be won in the specific winning opening during the small hit game is 2, and the number of prize balls in the specific winning opening is 10, it is possible to obtain about 60 to 70 prize balls in one minute. It becomes.

Finally, the small hit 3 has the same opening operation as the small hit 2 during the round, but the opening time and the ending time are set to 0.3 seconds. That is, the period during which the specific winning opening is closed is set to be 10 times or more shorter than the small hit 2.

Specifically, in the latent probability variation game state ST2 (see FIG. 80 (a)) in which the small hit 3 is selected, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit of the small hit 3 is set. The game time is set to 2.4 seconds (about 2.5 seconds), which is the sum of the opening time (0.3 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds), and the ending time (0.3 seconds). If the number of game balls to be won in the specific winning opening during the small hit game is 2, and the number of prize balls in the specific winning opening is 10, it is possible to obtain about 480 prize balls in one minute. ..

That is, in the small hit 3, the operation of the special electric accessory is set so that the game ball can win a prize in the specific winning opening, and further, it is the time when the specific winning opening is not opened in the small hit game. By shortening the opening time and the ending time, it is possible to make the open state of the specific winning opening by the small hit game appear more frequently than the small hit 2. Therefore, it is possible for the player to acquire a large number of game balls, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. In addition, by adding another game property (a game property that waits for the game state to shift to the latent probability change game state ST2) to the game property that waits for the jackpot game to be executed as in the past, the player It is possible to provide a wide variety of effects, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, FIG. 81B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Since the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that an advantageous period flag 223 m and an advantageous information storage area 223 n are added, and other configurations are described. Is the same as that of the first embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The advantageous period flag 223m is a flag that is set to be on while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability gaming state, and is set to on when the gaming state becomes the high-probability gaming state, and the gaming state is changed. It is set to off when a low-probability gaming state is reached.

The advantageous information storage area 223n is an area for storing game information while the advantageous period flag 223m is set to ON (during the advantageous state). As the game information, the number of game balls acquired during the advantageous period and the number of big hits and small hits won during the advantageous period are stored. The information stored in the advantageous information storage area 223n is cleared when the advantageous period flag 223m is set to off.

By temporarily storing the number of game balls acquired by the player during the continuation of the high-probability game by using the advantageous period flag 223 m and the advantageous information storage area 223n described above, the acquired medium is displayed on the display screen during the latent probability change game state ST2. (See FIG. 70) can be displayed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86. Regarding the same processing as in the first embodiment, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted, and only the different control processing will be illustrated and described.

The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S254) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S254). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (FIG. 82, S254) is different from the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S204) in the first embodiment in that the process of S651 is added. .. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S609, the process of S651 is executed after the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is executed. In the process of S651, the jackpot scenario 202i (determined by the special electric accessory operation table) defined for the operation of the jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot type is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2. (S651).

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (FIG. 83, S257) is different in that the process of S1051 is added to the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 36, S207) in the first embodiment. .. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1009, the process of S1051 is executed after the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is executed. In the process of S1051, the jackpot scenario 202i defined for the operation of the jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot type is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 (S651).

Here, in the jackpot scenario, the operation for each time in the jackpot game is set. When the start of the jackpot game is set, the specific winning opening set in the jackpot scenario is opened and set after the opening period set in the jackpot scenario has elapsed. After that, when the closing condition (for example, until 10 balls are won or the opening time of 30 seconds elapses) is satisfied, the specific winning opening is closed, and after that, after the interval period set in the jackpot scenario elapses, the next The jackpot round is started, and the opening of the specific winning opening is set.

In the second embodiment, the jackpot scenarios are stored in the ROM 202 corresponding to the game state and the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and the corresponding jackpot scenario is selected. Here, even if the jackpot type is set with an open pattern that allows the game ball to enter the probability change switch 65e3, the game ball can be set to the probability change switch 65e3 by changing the opening period and the interval period. It can be set as a jackpot that can be entered and a jackpot that cannot be entered. As a result, depending on the jackpot game state, the jackpot type that can enter the probability change switch 65e3 can be regulated by the opening time or the interval time, so that the probability change ratio for each game state can be variably set.

In the normal game state ST1 in which the normal game method is set to allow the game ball to flow down the left flow path PA1 and the game ball to enter the first start port 630 to play the game, the right flow path PA2 When the game is played by letting the game ball flow down, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is easily opened. Therefore, when the game ball is flowed down to the left flow path PA1 and the game is played, the first starting port 630 is used. The game ball can be easily entered into the second starting port 640 rather than the game ball. It is advantageous for the player to play the game by letting the game ball flow down to the right flow path PA2 even in the normal game state because more chances of lottery in the second special symbol can be obtained. However, in the second embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the normal gaming state with the second special symbol, even if it is a big hit type that is opened in an open pattern that allows the ball to enter the probability change switch 65e3, it is set in the big hit scenario. Since the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a ends before the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 due to the interval period, it is possible to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3. It cannot be done, and the probability variation is not given to the player, that is, the probability variation ratio of the second special symbol is set to 0%. Therefore, even if the game is performed by letting the game ball flow down to the right flow path PA2 in the normal game state ST1, the disadvantage on the game store side can be suppressed.

Similarly, in each game state, even if the flow paths (left flow path PA1, right flow path PA2) for playing the game are set by design, the probability variation rate at the winning openings for entering balls in different flow paths is disadvantageous to the player. It can be set according to the jackpot scenario.

Next, the normal symbol variation process 2 (S156) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 2 (S156). The ordinary symbol variation processing 2 (S156) is different from the ordinary symbol variation processing (FIGS. 41 and S106) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1214 to S1215 are deleted. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Since the processes S1214 to S1215 in the first embodiment have been deleted, in the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of the second ordinary electric accessory 640a are twice per second regardless of the gaming state. An open pattern is set. Therefore, the opening pattern is always in a support state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 640, and it is configured so that the second starting port 640 can be easily set to win a prize when it is opened.

As a result, in the game state (time saving game state ST1h, latent probability change game state ST2, probability change game state ST3) in which the game ball is allowed to flow down the right flow path PA2, the game ball is moved to the second start port 640. You can get a lot of prizes. In the present embodiment, when the game ball is allowed to flow down the right flow path PA2, it is more difficult to win a prize at the first starting port 630 than when the game ball is caused to flow down the left flow path PA1. Therefore, it is possible to give priority to the second special symbol and change it to play the game, and it is possible to easily set the jackpot to be given to the player with the second special symbol.

Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1720) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1720). The jackpot control process 2 (S1720) differs from the jackpot control process (FIGS. 46 and S1604) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1621 to S1623 are changed to the processes S1721 to S1724. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

In the process of S1721, it is determined whether the jackpot scenario is set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 (S1721). When it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1721: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter d2 and updated (S1722). After that, the process of S1723 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1721 that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1721: No), this process is terminated. In the jackpot scenario, data corresponding to the scenario counter is set respectively, and the operation data corresponding to the current scenario counter is read and controlled.

In the process of S1723, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the current scenario counter is the data indicating the start of the opening (S1723). If the data indicates the start of the opening (S1723: Yes), the opening command is set (S1724). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1723, if it is determined that the opening is not started (S1723: No), the process of S1624 is executed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, since the start of the opening and the start timing of a new round can be determined by the jackpot scenario, the opening time and the interval time can be easily changed for each jackpot type. Can be controlled.

Next, the ending process 2 (S1730) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 2 (S1730). The ending process 2 (FIG. 86, S1730) is different from the ending process (FIG. 48, S1630) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1656 to S1657 are changed to the processes of S1731 to S1733. In the second embodiment, even if the jackpot is given the probability variation game state, the jackpot type in which the upper limit of the number of times that the normal symbol is in the time saving state is set is set, so that the processing of S1731 (time saving counter 203t) is set. The timing of the process of setting 100 to 100) has been changed and set. Further, in the final process of the ending process 2 (S1730) for setting the process of ending the jackpot, the jackpot scenario set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is cleared to 0 and reset. Thereby, whether or not the jackpot game is in progress can be determined from the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2.

As described above, according to the second embodiment, the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the game state (normal game state ST1, time-saving game state ST1h, latent probability change game state). Since it is configured so that a plurality of ratios for transitioning to the high probability game state after the end of the jackpot game can be set based on ST2 and the probability change game state ST3), when the second lottery game that is not a substantial fluctuation target is performed in the normal game state ST1. It is possible to extremely reduce the rate of transition to the high-probability gaming state (0% in this embodiment). With this configuration, even if an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed, it does not shift to a state advantageous for the player (high probability game state), so that the illegal game targeting the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It has the effect of being able to be suppressed.

In the second embodiment, the jackpot type selection table 202d is used to select the jackpot type based on the type of the special symbol and the game state. For example, the jackpot type is selected based on the type of the special symbol. And the selection of the interval time based on the gaming state may be performed using another table. Specifically, in the jackpot type selection table 202d, the jackpot type is selected based on the type of the special symbol, and an interval time corresponding to the gaming state is used by using a different table (for example, the interval time type selection table). Select. Then, the jackpot control may be performed using the selected jackpot type and the interval time. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the types of jackpot types, and there is an effect that the capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the above-mentioned interval time type selection table, the gaming state and the interval time are associated with each other (in the case of a specific gaming state, a specific interval time is always selected), but a predetermined counter (for example, an interval) It may be configured so that a plurality of interval times can be selected based on the counter value of the time type counter). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the game playability more complicated, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the second embodiment has been described using a pachinko machine (simultaneous fluctuation type) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time, but it is adopted for other types of gaming machines. You may. Other types of gaming machines include, for example, a type of gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol change in the order in which they win a prize at the starting port, and a change in one special symbol causes the other special symbol. There are types of game machines, etc. that are executed with priority over fluctuations in.

Further, when the game ball wins a prize at the first starting opening, a winning lottery is performed, and when the lottery result is the first result, the first winning opening is operated so as to be able to win. During the first award game, the second award game that activates the second winning opening in a winning state when the lottery result is the second result, and the second award game, the second prize game Used for a game machine (1 type 2 type mixer) equipped with a third privilege game that operates the first winning opening in a state where a winning can be performed by passing a game ball through a specific area provided in the winning opening. You may.

The second embodiment is configured such that the game ball passes through the ball guidance path 72 only when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state, but is in the case where the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state. Also, the game ball that has passed through a specific path may be configured to pass through the ball guidance path 72. With such a configuration, the ball flow of the game ball on the game board 13 can be complicated, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

Further, the game ball that has passed through a specific route other than the ball guidance route 72 may be configured to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65. With such a configuration, the ball flow of the game ball on the game board 13 can be complicated, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

According to the second embodiment, two specific winning openings are provided in the flow path of the game ball, and the gaming ball passing through the specified winning opening on the upper side (upstream side) in the closed state is specified on the lower side (downstream side). A game in which the winning opening is reachable, and a delay guidance path is provided between the specific winning opening on the upper side (upstream side) and the specific winning opening on the lower side (downstream side) to delay the flow time of the game ball. In the machine, the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific winning opening on the downstream side is changed by changing the length of the specific interval period t4 (see FIG. 67) according to the game state (usually, probability change, latency, time reduction). Configure to be possible.

With this configuration, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball that has won the specific winning opening on the downstream side passes through the specific area (probability change switch 65e3) provided in the specific winning opening. It is configured so that the mode of the game state that shifts (sets) after the end of the jackpot game can be changed. It is possible to provide a jackpot game that can substantially pass through V and a jackpot game that cannot (difficultly) pass through V without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the main control device 110 during the jackpot game can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment described above, the operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (switching member 65h) is performed according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol). (Motion control that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 and motion control that cannot pass (difficult)) are set, and the length of the specific interval period t4 is set according to the game state when the jackpot is won. Since it is configured as such, it is possible to set a plurality of ratios of jackpot games that can substantially pass through the probability change switch 65e3, provide various game characteristics to the player, and improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to.

In the present embodiment, by changing the specific interval period t4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period, but other than that. The configuration of may be adopted. For example, the ball-guided path passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball-guided path 72, may be switched. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V opening period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game is shown. For example, in the first round, the first variable winning device 65 1 In the case of a big hit game in which the specific winning opening 65a is open, the period of change according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1. With this configuration, for example, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball-guided route transit time, the right side is accompanied by the start of the jackpot game (start of the opening period t1). The struck game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period t6 and can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance path passing time, the game ball hit right with the start of the jackpot game becomes the first within the V valid period t6. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

Further, when different times can be set as the specific interval time, the time of the predetermined interval period after the specific interval period is set so as to cancel the difference of the specific interval time during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game is performed. It is preferable to configure the sum of the interval times in the above to match. With this configuration, for example, the time used for each process performed using the interval period when the amount of information processing is small during the big hit game can be unified, and stable processing can be executed. It has the effect of becoming.

In the present embodiment, the ball guidance path 72 (delayed guidance path) is provided so that the ball guidance path passage time becomes (delays) a predetermined time, but the inlet (opening 70a) and the exit (discharge section 70e) of this path are provided. ), A detection means (sensor) for detecting the passage of the game ball may be provided, and a means for determining (monitoring) whether the game ball is passing within a predetermined time may be provided. By using such a configuration, it is possible to easily detect a ball clogging that occurs in the ball guiding path 72 and a fraudulent act that intentionally causes the game ball to stay in the guiding path using a magnet or a ball with a thread. It has the effect of being possible.

The first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the ball guidance path 72 (see FIG. 65) used in the second embodiment may be used in the following game machines. .. That is, the number of rounds of the jackpot game has a first round number (for example, 12 rounds) and a second round number (for example, 15 rounds), and the first to twelfth rounds are variable prizes provided on the upper side of the game board 13. The device (second variable winning device 650) is opened, and from the 13th round to the 15th round, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65) provided on the lower side of the game board 13 is opened. It may be used for a game machine.

By using the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the ball guidance path 72 used in the second embodiment for such a game machine, the launched game ball is wasted. It is possible to entertain the production during the jackpot game by using a specific interval time between specific rounds (between the 12th and 13th rounds).

Specifically, at the end of the 12th round, the second variable winning device 650 is closed, and the game ball flows down to the ball guidance path 72. Since the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guidance path 72 is set to 3 to 4 seconds (see FIG. 65), the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a of the ball guidance path 72 is the first variable winning device. It takes at least 3 seconds to reach 65.

Using the time (arrival time) required for the game ball to reach the first variable winning device 65, a production between rounds (a production that fuels whether this jackpot game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot) By doing this, even if you continue the right-handed game, you can eliminate (reduce) useless game balls (game balls that do not win in the specific winning opening of the variable winning device even though you are hitting the jackpot). is there.

That is, if the above-mentioned effect during the jackpot game is executed by a game machine having one variable winning device, the variable winning device is passed during the specific interval time (the specific winning opening of the variable winning device is closed). The game ball cannot win a prize in the specific winning opening even during the big hit game, and becomes a useless game ball. In addition, if the specific interval time is shortened in order to reduce unnecessary game balls, the production that is executed between specific rounds (the production that fuels whether this jackpot game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot). There is a problem that the effect is weakened.

On the other hand, when the above-mentioned effect during the jackpot game is executed by the game machine using the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball guidance path 72 that allows the game ball to flow down when the second variable winning device 650 is closed is provided. Since the effect during the specific interval time using the time (3 to 4 seconds) when the game ball flows down is performed, it is possible to suppress the wasted ball generated during the big hit and the effect executed between the specific rounds (this big hit). There is an effect that the effect of (directing to incite whether the game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot) can be strengthened.

If the interval time between specific rounds is set shorter than the time during which the game ball flows down the ball guidance path 72, the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 reaches the first variable winning device 65. Since the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state, it is possible to prevent unnecessary game balls from being generated.

As an effect in this case, it is conceivable to divert the display data displayed in the ending period of the 12-round jackpot and display it at the specific interval time of the 15-round jackpot. By adopting such an effect, it is possible to reduce the amount of display data and make the player think that it is a 12-round jackpot, and when the 13th round is started, the player can be made to think. It has the effect of being able to provide surprise and joy.

In addition, a detection means for detecting a game ball flowing down in the ball guidance path 72 is provided, and when the detection means detects a game ball during a specific interval period, this jackpot is a 15-round jackpot (the jackpot is still). (Continued) may be notified. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the act of stopping the firing of the game ball during the interval period during the jackpot game can be suppressed.

Further, the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined as follows. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged in parallel, and the game ball meanders horizontally from the second variable winning device 650 toward the first variable winning device 65. A configuration provided with a guidance path for guiding the player may be used for the following game machines. That is, a variable winning device (for example, 12 rounds) and a second round (for example, 15 rounds) are provided as the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the first to twelfth rounds are provided on the upstream side. The second variable winning device 650) is opened, and from the 13th round to the 15th round, the variable winning device (1st variable winning device 65) provided on the downstream side is opened, and the jackpot game is executed. May be good.

In this configuration, when the variable winning device provided on the upstream side is closed, the game ball rolls on the guidance path and is guided to the variable winning device on the downstream side. This guidance path is configured to meander in the horizontal direction so that a predetermined time (time equal to or longer than the interval period, for example, 3 seconds) is required for the game ball to pass. A plurality of opening patterns are set for the upstream variable winning device and the downstream variable winning device so that they are opened in a predetermined order during one jackpot game, and the opening patterns are set according to the type of jackpot. Is set.

Then, the opening / closing status of each variable winning device can be displayed by the display means. That is, the player can grasp the situation in which the variable winning device is closed by checking the display means. However, it is displayed so that it cannot be determined whether the closing status is the interval period (during the jackpot) or the ending period (end of the jackpot).

By using such a configuration, for example, it is shown that the variable winning device is closed to the display means in the interval period when the variable winning device on the upstream side is closed and then the variable winning device on the downstream side is opened. By displaying the effect (closed effect) by the display means, the player plays the game while expecting whether the jackpot game is over or still to be continued. Then, when the interval period ends and the variable winning device on the downstream side is opened, at the same time, an effect (opening effect) indicating that the variable winning device is opened is displayed on the display means. At the timing when this opening effect is displayed on the display means, the game ball rolling on the guidance path has not reached the variable winning device on the downstream side (the time required to pass through the guidance path rather than the interval time). (Because it is longer), while the closing effect is being executed (while the variable winning device on the upstream side is closed), the game ball that rolls the guidance path is surely won in the variable winning device on the downstream side. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the waste of the game ball while executing the effect indicating the closure of the variable winning device in the big hit game. When using such a configuration, it is advisable to prepare a plurality of types of opening patterns for each variable winning device in the jackpot game.

A modification 1 of the second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 87.

<Modification 1 of the second embodiment>
In the first modification, the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from that of the second embodiment described above, and gameability different from that of the second embodiment described above is provided. Specifically, as will be described later, in this modified example, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state ST1 and the game shifts to the probability variation game state ST3, the value is high only for a predetermined period (during 100 rotations) after the jackpot game ends. It has a game property (so-called two-time loop) in which a jackpot is won at least twice while maintaining a stochastic game state.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flow in which various gaming states in this modified example are set. In this modification 1, the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from that of the second embodiment described above. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, since the distribution is the same as in the second embodiment described above during the normal game state ST1, the description thereof will be omitted. Next, the distribution of jackpots in the probabilistic gaming state ST3 will be described.

During the probability change game state ST3, the actual fluctuation target is set in the special figure 2, and if the big hit is won in the special figure 2, there is a 100% probability of the high probability game state (probability change game state ST3 or latent probability change game state ST2). Move to. In addition, this probabilistic game state ST3 does not win the jackpot, and if the fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric support ends and the game shifts to the latent probabilistic game state ST2. While staying in the probability fluctuation game state ST3 (until the end of the electric support), the person will play the game while paying attention to win the next big hit.

Next, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the distribution is set so that the pullback jackpot that shifts to the probability variation game state ST3 is 34%, and the jackpot that shifts to the time saving game state ST1h (falls) is 66%.

Next, in the time-saving game state ST1h, the distribution is set so that the pullback jackpot that shifts to the probability variation game state ST3 is 75% and the jackpot that shifts to the normal game state ST1 (falls) is 25%. At this time, in the short game state ST1h, if the special symbol fluctuates more than 100 times without winning the jackpot, the electric support ends and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. By winning the jackpot during this period, the distribution is set so that the ratio of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state ST3, which is the high-probability gaming state, is higher than that of the normal gaming state ST1 which is the same low-probability state.

As described above, in the present modification 1, once the low probability state (normal game state ST1) is changed to the high probability game state (probability change game state ST3), the special symbol fluctuation 100 after a predetermined period (after the big hit). Only up to 2 times), then 2 big hits are guaranteed while maintaining the high probability game state. Therefore, the player is not satisfied only with the transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability game state, and then has the purpose of winning a big hit within a predetermined period in the special symbol game performed in the high-probability game state. The game can be continued. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A modified example 2 of the second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 88.

<Modification 2 of the second embodiment>
In the second modification, the upper limit number (110 times) is set for the number of games (variation number) in the high-probability gaming state, and the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from the second embodiment described above. , The game property different from that of the second embodiment described above is provided. Specifically, as will be described later, in this modified example, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state ST1 and the game shifts to the probability variation game state ST3, a specific period (high probability game) after a predetermined period has passed after the jackpot game is completed. Only during the latent probability change game state ST2 in which the electric support is completed), the game property (so-called two-time loop) in which the jackpot is won at least twice while maintaining the high-probability game state. It is equipped. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flow in which various gaming states are set in this modified example. In this modification 2, the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from that of the second embodiment described above. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, since the distribution is the same as in the second embodiment described above during the normal game state ST1, the description thereof will be omitted. Next, the distribution of jackpots in the probabilistic gaming state ST3 will be described.

In this modification 2, the high-probability gaming state is set to shift (fall) to the low-probability state when the special symbol fluctuates 110 times without winning the jackpot. In this probability variation game state ST3, the actual fluctuation target is set in the special figure 2, and if the big hit is won in the special figure 2, the probability variation game state ST3 is set again with a probability of 70% and is low with a probability of 30%. Move to the stochastic state. This probabilistic game state ST3 shifts to the latent probabilistic game state ST2 when the electric support ends when the fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot.

Next, in the latent probability change game state ST2, after the jackpot ends, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starts from the 101st rotation, and the high probability game state shifts (falls) to the low probability state until the 110th rotation. It is a game state executed in. If a big hit is won during this latent probability changing game state ST2, there is a 100% probability of shifting to a high probability gaming state (probability changing gaming state ST3 or latent probability changing gaming state ST2).

Next, in the time-saving game state ST1h, the distribution is set so that the pullback jackpot that shifts to the probability variation game state ST3 is 90% and the jackpot that shifts to the normal game state ST1 (falls) is 10%. At this time, in the short game state ST1h, if the special symbol fluctuates more than 100 times without winning the jackpot, the electric support ends and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. By winning the jackpot during this period, the distribution is set so that the ratio of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state ST3, which is the high-probability gaming state, is higher than that of the normal gaming state ST1 which is the same low-probability state.

As described above, in the present modification 2, the low probability state (normal game state ST1) is temporarily shifted to the high probability game state (probability change game state ST3), and then the number of fluctuations is a predetermined number of times (after the big hit). Only for a specific period (latent probability change game state ST2) after the lapse of (up to 100 special symbol fluctuations), two jackpots are guaranteed while maintaining the high probability game state. Therefore, the player is not satisfied only with the transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability gaming state, and thereafter, in the special symbol game performed in the high-probability gaming state, the player does not win within the predetermined period and after the predetermined period elapses. You can continue the game with the purpose of winning a big hit during a specific period of. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A modified example 3 of the second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 89.

<Modification 3 of the second embodiment>
In the third modification, a shortened path 75 is provided as another path in the ball guiding path 72 provided in the front view right side region of the game board 13 of the second embodiment described above, and the flowing game ball is guided by the ball. A distribution mechanism 75a that divides the shortened path 72 into a shortened path 75, a path that guides the game ball that has flowed down the shortened path 75 to the first variable winning device 65, and a path that guides the game board 13 to the area below the front view of the game board 13. It differs in that it is provided with a distribution mechanism 75b. Other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 89 is an enlarged view of a region on the right side of the front view of the game board 13 of the third modification. In this modification, the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state is alternately distributed to the ball guidance path 72 and the shortened path 75 by the distribution mechanism 75a. Here, the distribution mechanism 75a is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and the rotation range (rotation angle) is regulated by the rotation regulation member. Since the game balls distributed to the ball guidance path 72 flow down the same path as in the second embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, the shortened path 75 is configured so that the trajectory of the ball is more linear than that of the ball guiding path 72, so that at least the game ball distributed to the ball guiding path 72 first reaches the discharge unit 70e. In order to quickly discharge from the shortened path 75, the time for the game ball to pass through the shortened path is set to 2 seconds. By providing the flow paths of the game balls having different shapes in this way and distributing the game balls to any of the paths by the distribution mechanism, it is possible to intentionally change the flow order of the game balls on the game board 13. (It is possible to let the game board 13 flow down in an order different from the order in which it was fired).

By using such a configuration, for example, when the game ball that first passed through the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the shortening path 75 in the specific interval period, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. If it becomes possible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 within the period, while the game ball that first passed through the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the ball guidance path 72, the probability change switch. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to make the game ball win the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 within the period during which the game ball can pass through 65e3.

Therefore, whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 can be determined depending on which route the game ball flows down, so that the player is provided with the game property of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 by himself / herself. This has the effect of preventing the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in this modification, a distribution mechanism 75b is provided for guiding the game ball flowing down the shortened path 75 to the first variable winning device 65 and a path for guiding the game ball to the area below the front view of the game board 13. ing. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball flowing down the shortened path 75 is guided to the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the flow path of the game ball on the game board 13 can be further complicated, and the player can enjoy the flow of the game ball.

Further, even if a distribution mechanism in which the distribution destination is determined in a predetermined order is used as in this modification, a plurality of distributions are made by the time the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 having the probability change switch 65e3. Since the mechanism distributes the game to a plurality of flow paths, it is possible to make it difficult to set the state of each distribution mechanism using the launched game balls so that the distribution destinations are predetermined.

Further, when the first variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down the ball guidance path 72 flows down on the first variable winning device 65, comes into contact with the distribution mechanism 75b, and rotates the distribution mechanism 75b. While changing the state, it flows down toward the bottom of the game board. As a result, the rotational state of the distribution mechanism 75b is constantly changing.

In this modification, only the game ball that has flowed down the shortened path 75 reaches the distribution mechanism 75b, but the game ball that has flowed down the ball guidance path 72 may also reach the distribution mechanism 75b. Further, a distribution mechanism 75c (not shown) that distributes only the game balls that have flowed down the ball guidance path 72 may be separately provided. With such a configuration, the flow path of the game ball can be further complicated, the player can enjoy the flow of the game ball, and the player passes through, for example, the closed second variable winning device 650. Which route the game ball will be distributed to by using it in a pachinko machine that determines whether or not the game ball will win the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 during the period when the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to change the possibility of entering the probabilistic gaming state.

Further, since a plurality of distribution mechanisms are provided on the path through which the game ball flows down during a right-handed game other than during the jackpot game, the distribution of each distribution mechanism is performed when the game is performed by passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3. It becomes difficult to adjust the position in advance, and it becomes possible to make the game result random.

In this modification, a distribution mechanism for distributing the game ball in two directions is used, but a distribution mechanism for distributing the game ball in three or more directions may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the ball flow of the game ball more complicated, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

Further, in this modification, a mechanism for physically distributing the game ball is used as the distribution mechanism, but other configurations may be used. For example, a lottery is performed based on passing through a predetermined area, and the lottery result is obtained. A means for determining the distribution direction may be provided.

Further, in this modification, the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state reaches the distribution mechanism 75a, but is located upstream of the second variable winning device 650 (the game ball is the second). The area before reaching the variable winning device 650) may be configured to reach the sorting device 75a. In this case, the game balls sorted in a predetermined direction by the sorting device 75a are the second variable winning device. A game ball that has flowed down toward a device and has been distributed in a direction other than a predetermined direction separately passes through a specific flow path (for example, a shortened path 75 or a ball guidance path 72), and a game ball that has passed through the specific flow path. The distribution mechanism 75b may be configured to distribute the game ball route to reach the first variable winning device and other routes. With this configuration, it is possible to make the game balls distributed by the distribution mechanism 75a in directions other than the second variable winning device 650 direction reach the first variable winning device 65 side by the distribution mechanism 75b. ..

With this configuration, the game ball that has not won the second variable winning device 650 in the open state may be distributed to the first variable winning device 65 in the open state so that the player can win the prize. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness.

By configuring the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 so as not to notify the player of the timing when the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is opened during the jackpot game, the player moves the game ball on the game board. There is an effect that the game can be enjoyed while observing the opening / closing status of each variable winning device.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured in whole or in combination thereof.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Feature A group> (Twice loop configuration)
A state setting means capable of setting at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and a privilege advantageous to the player are given based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In a gaming machine having at least a privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. If the first privilege game is executed in this state, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and if the second privilege game is executed, the first privilege game is executed. The second advantageous state is set after the execution of the second privilege game, and when the first privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the first privilege is set. The gaming machine A1 characterized in that the first advantageous state is set after the execution of the game.

At least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, at least the first privilege game that gives the player an advantageous privilege and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game are executed by the privilege game execution means. When the first privilege game is executed while the first advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege is set. When the game is executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed while the second advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the first privilege game. As a result, even after the first privilege game is executed in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set, so that the advantageous state for the player can be continuously set. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of privilege games are executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the game machine A1, the privilege game execution means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means is the first advantageous state. It is possible to set a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, and when the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the third privilege game is executed. The gaming machine A2, characterized in that the specific state is set after the execution of the third privilege game.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means. When the third privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the third privilege game. As a result, in the second advantageous state, a specific gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player is set when the third gaming state is executed, so that the continuous state of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the gambling of the game becomes too high.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that the first advantageous state is a game state that is more favorable to the player than the second advantageous state.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more favorable to the player than the second advantageous state, so that the advantage given to the player is excessive. It has the effect of suppressing becoming.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the improvement that facilitates the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means. A game machine A4 characterized by having means.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the privilege game is improved by the privilege game execution means. This makes it easier to execute, so that there is an effect that the player can be expected to execute the privilege game.

In either the game machine A1 or A4, the starting condition determining means capable of determining the establishment of the first starting condition and the second starting condition different from the first starting condition, and the starting condition determining means thereof. , The lottery means for executing a lottery based on the determination that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, and the privilege game execution means is a specific lottery by the lottery means. The gaming machine A5, characterized in that the privileged game is executed based on the determination that the result has been established.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of either the game machine A1 or A4, the following effect is played. That is, the establishment of the first starting condition and the second starting condition different from the first starting condition is determined by the starting condition determining means. The lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the determination that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied by the start condition determination means. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the determination that the specific lottery result is established by the lottery means. As a result, it is possible to expect the player to satisfy the first starting condition and the second starting condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the gaming machine A3 or A4 has a regulating means for restricting the establishment of the second starting condition when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3 or A4, when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means, the establishment of the second starting condition is regulated by the regulation means, so that the player can use it. There is an effect that a disadvantageous state can be easily set.

In any of the game machines A3 to A5, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the first starting condition and the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the second starting condition are shown. Each of the two identification information has a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display means can dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information at the same time. A game machine A6 characterized by being configured.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A3 to A5, the following effect is played. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the second start condition are displayed by the dynamic display means, respectively. Dynamically displayed in the means. The first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means at the same time. As a result, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be efficiently executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

The game machine A7 is characterized in that the game machine A5 or A6 has a release means for releasing the regulation by the regulation means based on the setting of the specific advantageous state by the setting means.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A5 or A6, the regulation by the regulation means is released by the release means based on the setting of a specific advantageous state by the setting means. There is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific advantageous state will be set.

A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game execution means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means are set. And the control means for facilitating the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means even when the privilege game is executed next based on the setting means for setting the advantageous state. A game machine A8 characterized by having.

According to the game machine A8, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game execution means is set by the setting means. Based on the fact that the advantageous state is set by the setting means, even when the privilege game is executed next time, the advantageous state is easily set by the control means by the setting means, so that the advantageous state can be combined into a plurality of privilege games. It can be set continuously across. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic B group> (Switch between advantage and disadvantage and prevent disadvantage side)
The first lottery game is played based on the first entrance where the game ball can enter, the second entrance which is different from the first entrance, and the first entrance. A lottery game execution means for executing and executing a second lottery game based on entering the ball into the second entrance, and a second lottery game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first lottery game. A switching means for switching between one state and a second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game based on a predetermined opportunity, and a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by having a suppressing means for suppressing the execution of the game.

According to the game machine B1, the first lottery game is executed by the lottery game execution means based on the fact that the ball has entered the first ball entrance. Further, the second lottery game is executed by the lottery game execution means based on the fact that the ball is entered into the second ball entrance different from the first ball entrance. The first state in which the second lottery game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first lottery game and the second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game are switched based on a predetermined opportunity by the switching means. Be done. The restraining means suppresses the execution of the lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means. As a result, the execution of the lottery game on the disadvantage side is suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the player can easily execute the advantageous lottery game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that gives a significant disadvantage to the player.

In the game machine B1, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means, and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means. It has a dynamic display means and a dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic period determining means has a longer dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that has been disadvantageously switched by the switching means than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that has been advantageously switched. A game machine B2 characterized in that it facilitates determination of a dynamic display period.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. Further, the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. The dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that is disadvantageously switched by the switching means is dynamically displayed as the dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that is advantageously switched. It is easy to determine by means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the unfavorably switched game from being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can determine the game that is set advantageously.

The game machine B1 or B2 has a launching means capable of launching the game ball into the game area, and an adjusting means for adjusting the launching force of the game ball launched by the launching means based on the operation of the player. The first entrance and the second entrance are arranged at positions where the game ball launched from the launching means can enter while the player performs the same operation on the adjusting means. A game machine B3 characterized by being a machine.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effect is played. That is, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means. The firing force of the game ball launched by the launching means is adjusted by the adjusting means based on the operation of the player. The first entrance and the second entrance are arranged at positions where the game ball launched from the launching means can enter while the player performs the same operation on the adjusting means. As a result, the player can execute the lottery game that is advantageous to the player without changing the operation of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be made easier.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, the player has a privilege giving means for giving a privilege to the player. The privilege granting means is set to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game than in the first lottery game. A game machine B4 characterized by.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects played by the game machines B1 to B3, the following effects are played. That is, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, the player is given a privilege by the privilege giving means. When a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game than in the first lottery game, the rate of granting benefits that is advantageous to the player is set higher. As a result, when the game in the second lottery game is set in favor of the player, a state more advantageous to the player can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

In the game machine B4, the privilege granting means is either the first privilege or the second privilege which is more advantageous than the first privilege as the privilege when the specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that one of them is given, and the switching means switches to the second state based on the fact that the second privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4, the following effects are played. That is, when a specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game, either the first privilege or the second privilege which is more advantageous than the first privilege is given as a privilege by the privilege giving means. Based on the fact that the second privilege has been granted by the privilege granting means, the switching means switches to the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be changed.

In the game machine B4 or B5, the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means includes the first lottery game or the second lottery game until a specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the ratio of the setting privileges set so as to facilitate a specific lottery result is set higher than the privilege for the first lottery game.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4 or B5, the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege giving means includes the first lottery game or the first lottery game until a specific condition is satisfied. Since the ratio of the setting privilege set so that the second lottery game is likely to be the specific lottery result is set higher than the privilege for the first lottery game, the second lottery game is executed. This has the effect of improving the expectations of the player.

The game machine B6 is characterized in that the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege giving means is configured to at least give the set privilege. B7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B6, at least the set privilege is given to the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege giving means. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation that the second lottery game is executed can be raised.

In any of the game machines B1 to B7, the first flow path through which the game ball can flow, the second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first entry port are the first flow path. The gaming machine B8, which is arranged in each of the second flow paths, and the second entry port is arranged in the second flow path.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B7, the first entry port is arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively, and the second entry port is the first. Since it is arranged in two flow paths, there is an effect that it is possible to set a state in which only the first lottery game is executed.

In any of the game machines B1 to B8, when the lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, the suppressing means notifies the notification information indicating that the lottery game that is disadvantageous is being executed. A game machine B9 characterized by this.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B8, the suppressing means means that the disadvantageous lottery game is executed when the lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed. Since the notification information to be shown is notified, there is an effect that the player can play the game more easily.

A game machine B10 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B1 to B9, the lottery game execution means is configured to be able to execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game at the same time.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B9, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are simultaneously executed by the lottery game execution means, so that the game can be efficiently performed. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic C group> (Electric chew configuration)
The first lottery is executed based on the first entry port where the game ball can enter, the second entry opening different from the first entry opening, and the entry into the first entry opening. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, the lottery means for executing the second lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, and the first entrance. A variable means that can be changed between a first state that regulates ball entry and a second state that makes ball entry easier than the first state, a judgment means that executes a judgment based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a judgment thereof. When a specific determination result is determined by the means, the variable control means for changing the variable means from the first state to the second state, and the second entry port based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The gaming machine C1 is characterized by having a regulating means for regulating entry of a ball or regulating the execution of the second lottery.

According to the game machine C1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the ball has entered the first entrance. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, the second lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, is executed by the lottery means. It is variable by the variable means to a first state that regulates the entry of the ball into the first entry port and a second state that makes it easier to enter the ball than the first state. When a specific determination result is determined by the determination means that executes the determination based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the variable means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable control means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, the regulation means regulates the entry of the ball into the second entrance or the execution of the second lottery. Thereby, the advantageous state and the unfavorable state for the player can be set by the regulatory means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be given a change in the interest and the interest can be improved.

In the game machine C1, the second entry port is arranged below the first entry port, and when the variable means is in the second state, the second entry port is entered by the variable means. The regulation means is arranged so as to prevent the flow of the game ball flowing down the ball flow path, and the regulating means is set so that the variable means can be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, whereby the second entry ball. A game machine C2 characterized in that it regulates entry into the mouth.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, the second entrance is arranged below the first entrance. When the variable means is in the second state, the variable means is arranged so as to prevent the flow of the game ball flowing down the flow path entering the second entry port. By setting the variable means to be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, the ball entering the second ball entry port is regulated by the regulating means. As a result, it is possible to regulate the entry of the ball into the second entry port with a simple configuration. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the configuration of the game machine from becoming complicated.

The game machine C1 or C2 has a first flow path through which the game ball can flow down and a second flow path different from the first flow path thereof, and the first ball entry port is the first flow path. The gaming machine C3 is arranged in each of the second flow path and the second flow path, and the variable means is arranged in the first entry port arranged in the second flow path.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the first ball entry port is arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively. Since the variable means is arranged at the first entry port arranged in the second flow path, there is an effect that the game ball flowing down the second flow path can be easily entered into the first entry port.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery, and the dynamic display thereof. The first identification information dynamically displayed by the means and the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information are provided, and the regulating means operates on the second identification information. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the execution of the second lottery is regulated by facilitating the determination of a long dynamic display period as the target display period by the dynamic display period determining means.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, the following effect is played. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. By facilitating the determination of a long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period for the second identification information by the dynamic display period determining means, the execution of the second lottery is regulated by the regulating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution can be restricted to the second lottery with a simple configuration.

<Feature D group> (Continuous up configuration)
Based on the first entry port where the game ball can enter, the second entry port different from the first entry opening, and the game ball entering the first entry opening, the first A lottery means for executing a lottery and executing a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, and the first lottery. A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result on the display means and dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery on the display means, respectively. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means, and the second identification information by the dynamic display determining means. As the dynamic display period, a long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined and a short state in which a dynamic display period shorter than the long state is easily determined are set. A setting means capable of this, and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode. As a privilege given to the player by the privilege giving means, at least the first privilege and the second privilege given less than the first privilege based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery. When either the privilege determining means for determining either the privilege and the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, the other identification information is dynamically displayed. If it is displayed, the first stop display means for displaying the dynamic display in a stop display mode different from the specific stop display mode, and the first when the long state is set by the setting means. The gaming machine D1 having a setting means for facilitating the determination of the second privilege by the privilege determining means in a lottery.

According to the game machine D1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, the second lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, is executed by the lottery means. The first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. A long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined as a dynamic display period of the second identification information by the dynamic display period determining means, and a dynamic state shorter than the long state. A short state in which the display period is easily determined is set by the setting means. When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given to the player by the privilege giving means. As the privilege given to the player by the privilege giving means, at least the first privilege and the second privilege which is given less than the first privilege based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery. Either one is determined by the privilege determination means. If either the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, and the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is changed to the specific stop display mode. A stop display mode different from the above is stopped and displayed by the stop display means. When the long state is set by the setting means, the second privilege is easily set by the privilege determining means in the first lottery. As a result, the player can be expected to execute the second privilege with less privilege. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

The game machine D1 has a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states based on a predetermined condition, and the setting means is set with a specific game state by the game state setting means. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that, on condition that the second privilege is easily determined by the privilege determining means in the first lottery.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, one game state from a plurality of game states is set by the game state setting means based on a predetermined condition. On condition that a specific game state is set by the game state setting means, the second privilege is easily determined by the privilege determining means in the first lottery. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more expected to determine the second privilege when a specific gaming state is set.

In the game machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the setting means for setting the advantageous state in which the privilege is easily given by the privilege giving means and the setting means set the advantageous state. The gaming machine D3 is characterized by having a control means for facilitating the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means even when the privilege is next granted based on the above.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily given by the privilege giving means is set by the setting means. Based on the fact that the advantageous state is set by the setting means, even when the next privilege is given by the control means, the advantageous state can be easily set by the setting means, so that the advantageous state can be set across a plurality of benefits. It can be easily set and has the effect of further improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic E group> (Set low non-priority probability variation rate)
A first variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the second variable ball entry means arranged in, a specific area in which the game ball entered in the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the game ball passing through the specific area, the player A predetermined variable pattern of the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition and a privilege-giving means for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player. The variable pattern determined by the determination means includes a variable control means that is variable by the above and a determination means that determines the variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. An advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means when the 1 variable ball entry means is in the closed state can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine E1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine E1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on the operation of the player, a first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball launched from the launching means, and the first ball entering means thereof. A second ball entry means different from the above, a ball entry assisting means that enables the game ball to enter the second ball entry means more easily than the first ball entry means, and the first ball entry means. A first determination means that executes the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball, and a second determination means that executes the second determination based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. And the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second identification information showing the second discrimination result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means are dynamically dynamic at the same time. When the display means that can be displayed and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result are displayed, the privilege game The privilege game execution means for executing the above, the first state set by allowing the game ball to be inserted into the second entry means to perform the game, and the game ball to be inserted into the second entry means. A game state setting means for setting one of a second state set so as not to allow the ball to play a game, a case where the first state is set by the game state setting means, and the second state. It is characterized in that it has a ratio variable means for changing the ratio at which the advantageous pattern is set by the determination means when the state is set and when the specific second determination result is obtained. Game machine E2 to play.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E1, an advantageous pattern is set depending on whether the first state is set by the game state setting means or the second state is set. Since the ratio is changed by the ratio variable means, when the second state is set, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set low, the ball is entered into the second ball entry means in the second state and the game is played. There is an effect that the damage can be reduced even if the fraud is done.

In the game machine E1 or E2, the ratio variable means sets the ratio of the second probability lower than that in the first state in the second state.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, there is an effect that the damage can be reduced even when the fraud in the second state is performed.

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the first flow path that allows the game ball to enter the first ball entry means more easily than the second ball entry means, and the first ball entry means than the first ball entry means. The game machine E4 is characterized by having a second flow path that allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E3, the ball entry rate between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is variable depending on the flow path, so that the game ball flows down. The game can be changed depending on the flow path to be played, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In any of the game machines E1 to E4, between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, a game ball that did not enter the first variable ball entry means is inserted into the second variable ball entry means. A guiding means for guiding the variable ball-entry means over a predetermined period or longer is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is such that after the first variable ball-entry means is changed to the closed state, the period is shorter than the predetermined period. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state after being changed to the open state.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E5, in the disadvantageous pattern, it can be performed with easy control so that it becomes difficult to enter the ball into the second variable ball entry means. It has the effect of reducing the control load.

<Characteristic F group> (Advantageous symbols and disadvantageous symbols are changed during the opening period)
A first variable means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can pass and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to pass than the open state, and the first variable means arranged on the downstream side of the first variable means. A second variable entry means in which a game ball that has passed through one variable means can enter, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the second variable entry means can enter, and a game ball in the specific area. The first variable means and the second variable ball entry as a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the passage and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition. It has a variable control means for varying the means with a predetermined variable pattern, and a determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns, and is determined by the determination means. The variable pattern includes an advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has entered the first ball-entry means can enter the specific region when the first variable means is in the open state, and the advantageous pattern is more than the advantageous pattern. A game machine F1 characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter a specific area is set.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine F1, since the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable means and the second variable ball entry means, the player can be interested in the variable pattern. , It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine F1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entry means capable of launching a game ball launched from the launching means, and a first ball entry means thereof. Is different, the first discriminating means that executes the first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. The second discrimination means that executes the second discrimination based on the sphere, the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means by the second discrimination means. A display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the determination and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. When the second identification information indicating the second identification information to be shown is displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game and the privilege game are executed by the privilege game execution means. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a ratio in which the advantageous pattern is set corresponding to the game state set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine F2 is characterized by having a ratio setting means for variably setting the ratio and the ratio at which the disadvantage pattern is set.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the ratio of the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern is set according to the game state set by the game state setting means, so that the ratio of the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern is changed depending on the game state. There is an effect that the player's interest can be improved by changing the degree of expectation for the privilege given to the player.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means is based on the first probability and the first probability thereof. The probability setting means for setting at least a high second probability and the privilege given by the privilege giving means are characterized in that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. Game machine F3 to play.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F1 or F2, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the game ball is in the specific area even while the privilege game is being executed. By making people interested in whether or not they can pass through, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble of getting tired of the game.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern are set so that at least the period from the start of the privilege game to the opening state of the first variable means is different. The game machine F4 characterized by being.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F3, the player determines the start of the privilege game at the timing when the first variable means is opened, so that there are advantageous patterns and disadvantageous patterns. Can be difficult for the player to identify, and even if it is a disadvantageous pattern, it is possible to expect the ball to enter a specific area.

The game machine F4 has a guiding means for guiding a game ball that has passed through the first variable ball-entry means to the second variable ball-entry means for a predetermined period or longer, and the disadvantageous pattern is that the first variable ball-entry means said. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is at least set so as to be variable from the open state to the closed state within the predetermined period after the open state.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F4, there is an effect that the game ball can be more reliably suppressed from passing through the specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

<Characteristic G group> (Advantageous symbols can be changed in interval period)
A first variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the second variable ball entry means arranged in, a specific area in which the game ball entered in the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the game ball passing through the specific area, the player A predetermined variable pattern of the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition and a privilege-giving means for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player. The variable pattern determined by the determination means includes a variable control means that is variable by the above and a determination means that determines the variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. An advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means when the 1 variable ball entry means is in the closed state can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine G1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine G1, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern have at least a period from when the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state to when the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state. The gaming machine G2, which is characterized by being set differently.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G1, there is an effect that an advantageous pattern and a disadvantageous pattern can be set by easy control.

In the game machine G1 or G2, between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, a game ball that did not enter the first variable ball entry means is inserted into the second variable ball entry means. A guiding means for guiding the means over a predetermined period of time is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is the second variable in a period shorter than the predetermined period after the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the ball entry means is changed to the open state and then changed to the closed state.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area in a more reliable pattern.

In any of the game machines G1 to G3, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entry means capable of launching a game ball launched from the launching means, and a first ball entry means thereof. A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry means. The second discrimination means for executing the second discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball, the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination. A display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination by the means, and the first identification information or the specific identification information indicating the specific first determination result. When the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game and the privilege game executing means execute the privilege game when the second identification information indicating the second determination result is displayed on the display means. , The ratio of the advantageous pattern to the disadvantageous pattern is changed according to the game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states and the game state set by the game state setting means. A game machine G4 having a variable ratio setting means for setting.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G4, the ratio of the advantageous pattern to the disadvantage pattern is variably set according to the game state, so that the game state to be set is set. This has the effect of increasing the degree of expectation that the game ball will enter a specific area and improving the interest of the game.

In the game machines G1 to G4, the first probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means, and a first probability higher than the first probability thereof. It has a probability setting means capable of setting either one of the two probabilities, and the privilege given by the privilege giving means is such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. A game machine G5 characterized by this.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G4, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the specific area is set even while the privilege game is being executed. By making people interested in whether or not they can pass the game ball, there is an effect that the problem of getting tired of the game can be suppressed.

<Characteristic H group> (New Zero Attacker)
Based on the condition determination means for determining the establishment of a specific condition and the determination of the establishment of the specific condition by the condition determination means, an open state in which the game ball can enter from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter. The first variable ball entry means, the second variable ball entry means arranged in parallel with the first variable ball entry means, and the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. The first variable entry means and the second variable based on the privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the ball entering the ball and the determination that the specific condition is satisfied. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game in which the ball entry means are changed in a predetermined order until a predetermined condition is satisfied in the open state, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. With, when the first variable ball entry means is in the closed state, there is a guiding means for setting the period until the game ball reaches the second variable ball entry means to a predetermined period or longer. The gaming machine H1 characterized by being.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and the flow path of the game ball is not formed by using the two variable winning devices, and further games are played. There was a need to improve the interests of. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine H1, even when the first variable ball entry means is closed, the period until reaching the second variable ball entry means by the guiding means is set to a predetermined period or longer, so that the second variable There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball flows down without entering the second variable ball entry means and the interest of the game is lowered by the time the ball entry means is opened.

In the game machine H1, the effect executing means includes an open effect indicating that the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means is in the open state and the first variable. It has an effect executing means for at least executing a closing effect indicating that the ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are in the closed state when they are in the closed state, and the closing effect is within the predetermined period. A game machine H2 characterized in that it is executed in.

According to the game machine H2, in the closing effect, it is possible to notify that the closed state is used for a predetermined period of time, so that there is an effect that the player can easily understand the effect.

In the game machine H1 or H2, when the privilege game 1 is executed by the privilege game execution means, the order in which the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are changed to the open state, respectively. The gaming machine H3 is characterized by having an opening pattern determining means for determining an opening pattern in which is set from a plurality of opening patterns.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H1 or H2, since it is determined from a plurality of open patterns, there is an effect that the open patterns can be randomized and the game can be varied in various ways.

In the game machine H3, the timing for changing the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state is preset in the opening pattern determined by the opening pattern determining means. A game machine H4 characterized by being the one that has been used.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, the timing of changing from the closed state to the open state is set in advance in the open pattern, so that the first variable ball entry means and the second variable entry means are set according to the open pattern. There is an effect that the number of game balls entering the ball means can be stabilized and the profit given to the player can be set based on the design value.

<Characteristic I group> (Loops twice only for a predetermined period after the big hit)
A state setting means capable of setting at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and a privilege advantageous to the player are given based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In a gaming machine having at least a privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. If the first privilege game is executed in this state, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and if the second privilege game is executed, the first privilege game is executed. The second advantageous state is set after the execution of the second privilege game, and when the first privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the first privilege is set. After the game is executed, the first advantageous state is set, and after the first advantageous state is set, the specific condition is set without executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game by the privilege game executing means. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that the second advantageous state is set when it is established.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the start port provided on the surface of the game board, a big hit lottery with a special symbol is performed, and the probability of winning a big hit is based on the result of the lottery. Some give high-probability games with high probability. In such a configuration, a gaming machine in which a high-probability game is continued until the jackpot is won twice has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-57583). In such a game machine, once the high-probability game is started, it is promised to win the jackpot twice while continuing the high-probability game. Therefore, after the high-probability game is started, the player There was a problem that he got tired of the game. The game machine I1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the game machine I1 is to provide a game machine capable of alleviating the player's boredom.

According to the game machine I1, at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, at least the first privilege game that gives the player an advantageous privilege and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game are executed by the privilege game execution means. When the first privilege game is executed while the first advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege is set. When the game is executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed while the second advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the first privilege game. After the first advantageous state is set, if a specific condition is satisfied without executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game by the privilege game executing means, the first advantageous state is changed to the second advantageous state. Set. As a result, if the first privilege game is executed before the specific condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state, then the second advantageous state is set, so that the advantageous state for the player is continuously set. be able to. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of privilege games are executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the game machine I1, the privilege game execution means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means is the first advantageous state. It is possible to set a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than any of the second advantageous states, and when the third privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set. , A game machine I2 characterized in that the specific state is set after the execution of the third privilege game.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I1, the following effects are played. That is, a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means. When the third privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the third privilege game. As a result, in the second advantageous state, a specific gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player is set when the third gaming state is executed, so that the continuous state of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the gambling of the game becomes too high.

The game machine I1 or I2 has a discrimination means for executing the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. A game machine I3 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the discriminant result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminant result. Since the above condition is satisfied, the player can play the game with an interest in the discrimination result by the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

A game machine I4, wherein in any of the game machines I1 to I3, the specific condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I4, the specific condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times, so that the player can satisfy the determination condition a predetermined number of times before the determination condition is satisfied. The game will be played while expecting that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Probability setting means for setting at least one of a first probability that is determined to be the specific determination result by the determination means and a second probability that is higher than the first probability in either the game machine I3 or I4. The gaming machine I5, wherein the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are those in which the second probability is set by the probability setting means.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine I3 or I4, the following effects are played. That is, at least one of the first probability that is determined to be a specific determination result by the discrimination means and the second probability that is higher than the first probability is set by the probability setting means. In the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the second probability is set by the probability setting means. Thereby, in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific judgment result in a short period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic J group> (Attacca prize distribution configuration)
Based on the condition determination means for determining the establishment of a specific condition and the determination of the establishment of the specific condition by the condition determination means, an open state in which the game ball can enter from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter. To the first variable ball entry means, the second variable ball entry means arranged on the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means, and the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. The first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means based on the privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering, and the determination that the specific condition is satisfied. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game in which the variable ball entry means is changed in a predetermined order until a predetermined condition is satisfied in the open state, the first variable ball entry means, and the first variable entry means. A first distribution means for distributing at least a game ball to the downstream side of the ball means, and a game ball distributed to the downstream side of the first variable entry means by the first distribution means with the second variable entry means. The gaming machine J1 is characterized by having at least a second sorting means for sorting to the downstream side of the second variable ball entering means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a big hit lottery with a special symbol is performed, and when the result of the lottery is a big hit, the game is played. There is one that provides a jackpot game in which a game ball is inserted into a jackpot provided on the board. In such a configuration, a game machine in which two large winning openings are provided on the surface of the game board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, there is a problem that the game ball that did not enter one of the big prize openings does not enter the other big prize opening, and the flow of the game ball on the game board surface is poor. .. The game machine J1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the game machine J1 is to provide a game machine capable of realizing a ball flow of a game ball that makes a player expect.

According to the game machine J1, the establishment of a specific condition is determined by the condition determination means, and based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, the game ball can be opened from the closed state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter. The first variable ball entry means is changed to the state. The second variable ball entry means is arranged on the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, the privilege granting means grants a privilege advantageous to the player. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, the privilege game executing means opens the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means in a predetermined order until the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Perform a variable bonus game. At least the game balls are distributed to the first variable ball entry means and the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means by the first distribution means, and the game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means are second. At least the second variable ball entry means and the downstream side of the second variable ball entry means are distributed by the distribution means. As a result, the game ball distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means can be made to enter the second variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of realizing a ball flow of a game ball that makes the player have expectations, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine J1, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are a rotating portion that can rotate in the first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction, and a rotating portion thereof. The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that it has at least each of the regulating means for regulating the rotation range of the above at a predetermined angle.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are moved to the first direction and the second direction opposite to the first direction by the rotating portion. Since it can be rotated and the rotation range of the rotating portion is regulated at a predetermined angle by the regulating means, it is possible to execute an appropriate distribution operation, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. ..

In the game machine J2, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are configured to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by a flowing game ball. The game machine J3.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J2, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are configured so as to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by the flowing game ball. Therefore, it is possible to execute a more appropriate distribution operation.

In the game machine J1 or J2, when the first variable entry means is in the closed state, the guiding means for guiding the game ball to the second variable entry means and the guiding means cause the game ball to be the first. When the second variable ball entry means is closed when the ball is guided to the two variable ball entry means, it has a taxiway for guiding the guided game ball to the second distribution means. A game machine J4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1 or the game machine J2, the following effects are played. That is, when the first variable ball entry means is in the closed state, the game ball is guided to the second variable ball entry means by the guiding means. When the game ball is guided to the second variable ball entry means by the guiding means, and the second variable ball entry means is in the closed state, the guided game ball is guided to the second sorting means. It has a taxiway. As a result, the rotational state of the second sorting means can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to complicate the distribution of the game ball by the distribution member, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic K group> (Regulate the probability variation rate of one symbol at normal times by a variation method other than simultaneous variation)
A first variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the second variable ball entry means arranged in, a specific area in which the game ball entered in the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the game ball passing through the specific area, the player A predetermined variable pattern of the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means as a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition and a privilege-giving means for imparting a privilege advantageous to the player. The variable pattern determined by the determination means includes a variable control means that is variable by the above and a determination means that determines the variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. An advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means when the 1 variable ball entry means is in the closed state can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern. The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine K1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine K1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on the operation of the player, a first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball launched from the launching means, and the first ball entering means thereof. A second ball entry means different from the above, a ball entry assisting means that enables the game ball to enter the second ball entry means more easily than the first ball entry means, and the first ball entry means. A first determination means that executes the first determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball, and a second determination means that executes the second determination based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. And the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second identification information showing the second discrimination result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means are displayed respectively. The display means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying either the first identification information or the second identification information on the display means based on a predetermined priority order, and the specific first identification information. When the first identification information indicating the determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game and the second ball entry means The first state, which is set to allow the game ball to enter and play the game, and the first state, which is set so as not to allow the game ball to enter the second ball-entry means to play the game. The specific second determination between the game state setting means for setting one of the two states and the case where the first state is set and the case where the second state is set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine K2 is characterized by having a ratio variable means for varying the ratio at which the advantageous pattern is set by the determination means when a result is obtained.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine K1, an advantageous pattern is set depending on whether the first state is set by the game state setting means or the second state is set. Since the ratio is changed by the ratio variable means, when the second state is set, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set low, the ball is entered into the second ball entry means in the second state and the game is played. There is an effect that the damage can be reduced even if the fraud is done.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the ratio variable means sets the ratio of the second probability lower than that in the first state in the second state.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine K1 or K2, there is an effect that damage can be reduced even when fraud is performed in the second state.

In any of the game machines K1 to K3, a first flow path that allows a game ball to easily enter the first ball entry means rather than the second ball entry means, and the first ball entry means than the first ball entry means. The game machine K4 is characterized by having a second flow path that allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entry means.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K1 to K3, the ball entry rate between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is variable depending on the flow path, so that the game ball flows down. The game can be changed depending on the flow path to be played, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In any of the game machines K1 to K4, between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means is inserted into the second variable ball entry means. A guiding means for guiding the variable ball-entry means over a predetermined period or longer is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is such that after the first variable ball-entry means is changed to the closed state, the period is shorter than the predetermined period. The gaming machine K5 is characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state and then changed to the closed state.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K1 to K5, in the disadvantageous pattern, it can be performed with easy control so that it becomes difficult to enter the ball into the second variable ball entry means. It has the effect of reducing the control load.

<Characteristic L group> (The probability variation rate is changed by the opening and interval in configurations other than simultaneous fluctuation)
A first variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the second variable ball entry means arranged in, a specific area in which the game ball entered in the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the game ball passing through the specific area, the player A predetermined variable pattern of the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition The variable pattern determined by the determination means includes a variable control means that is variable by the above and a determination means that determines the variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. An advantageous pattern in which a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means when the 1 variable ball entry means is in the closed state can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a game machine, only the control of switching the entry port opened as a privilege game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine L1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine L1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entry means capable of launching a game ball launched from the launching means, and a first ball entry means thereof. Is different, the first discriminating means that executes the first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. The second discrimination means that executes the second discrimination based on the sphere, the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means by the second discrimination means. A display means capable of displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the determination, and either the first identification information or the second identification information are placed in a predetermined priority order. Based on this, the dynamic display means that is dynamically displayed on the display means and the first identification information that indicates the specific first determination result or the second identification information that indicates the specific second determination result are transmitted to the display means. When displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game and the game state setting for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. It is characterized by having a means and a ratio variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern according to the game state set by the game state setting means. Game machine L2.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L1, the ratio of the advantageous pattern to the disadvantage pattern is variably set according to the game state, so that the game is played in a specific area depending on the set game state. There is an effect that the degree of expectation that the ball enters can be changed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine L1 or L2, the first probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means, and a first probability higher than the first probability thereof. It has a probability setting means capable of setting either one of the two probabilities, and the privilege given by the privilege giving means is such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. A game machine L3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine L1 or L2, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the game ball is in the specific area even while the privilege game is being executed. By making people interested in whether or not they can pass through, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble of getting tired of the game.

In any of the game machines L1 to L3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern are such that the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state and then the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state. The gaming machine L4, characterized in that the period until is set to be at least different.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines L1 to L3, there is an effect that an advantageous pattern and a disadvantageous pattern can be set by easy control.

In any of the game machines L1 to L4, between the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means, a game ball that has not entered the first variable entry means is inserted into the second variable entry means. A guiding means for guiding the variable ball entering means over a predetermined period or longer is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is such that after the first variable ball entering means is changed to the closed state, the period is shorter than the predetermined period. The gaming machine L5, characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state after being changed to the open state.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effect played by the game machines L1 to L4, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area in a more reliable pattern.

A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any of the game machines Z1, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any of the game machines Z2, the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the stop It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5 In any of these, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the above, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is successful, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed.
Further, as a privilege game, a game machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765).
By the way, the above-mentioned game machine only controls to switch the entrance of the ball that is opened as a privilege game, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required.
The purpose of the present technical idea is to provide a game machine having further improved the interest of the game in the above-mentioned game machine.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the game machine of the technical idea 1 is the first variable that can be changed into an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the open state. A ball entry means, a second variable entry means arranged on the downstream side of the first variable entry means, a specific area where a game ball entered into the second variable entry means can enter, and a specific area where the game ball can enter. The first variable input as a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the specific condition. It has a variable control means for varying the ball means and the second variable ball entry means in a predetermined variable pattern, and a determination means for determining the variable pattern to be changed by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. Then, in the variable pattern determined by the determination means, the game ball that did not enter the first variable entry means when the first variable entry means is in the closed state is placed in the specific region. At least an advantageous pattern that enables the ball to enter and a disadvantage pattern that makes it more difficult to enter the specific region than the advantageous pattern are set.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are the second variable input after the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state. The period until the ball means is changed to the open state is set to be at least different.
The game machine of the technical idea 3 is the game machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, and the first variable ball entry means is used between the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means. A guiding means for guiding the game ball that has not entered the ball to the second variable ball entry means over a predetermined period or longer is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is that the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state. Therefore, the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state and then changed to the closed state in a period shorter than the predetermined period.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on the operation of the player in the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, and a game launched from the launching means. The first determination is based on the first ball entering means capable of entering the ball, the second entering means different from the first entering means, and the game ball entering the first entering means. The first determination means for executing the second determination, the second determination means for executing the second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, and the first determination by the first determination means. A display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result and the second identification information indicating the second discrimination result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means at the same time, and a specific display means. When the first identification information indicating the first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game and the privilege game execution means. Corresponding to the game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states and the game state set by the game state setting means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. It has a ratio variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern.
<Effect>
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the first variable ball entry means that can be changed into an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the open state. , A second variable ball entry means arranged on the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means, a specific area where a game ball entered into the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the specific area. The first variable ball entry means and the above-mentioned first variable ball entry means and the above-mentioned first variable ball-entry means and the above-mentioned first variable ball entry means and the above-mentioned first variable ball entry means and the said The determination means having a variable control means for varying the second variable ball entry means in a predetermined variable pattern, and a determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. In the variable pattern determined by the means, when the first variable ball entry means is in the closed state, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means can enter the specific area. An advantageous pattern and a disadvantage pattern that makes it more difficult to enter the specific region than the advantageous pattern are set. As a result, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player can be interested in the variable pattern, and the game can be played. It has the effect of improving the interest of.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern are such that the period from when the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state to when the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state is at least different. It is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2. That is, between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means is transferred to the second variable ball entry means for a predetermined period of time. The guidance means for guiding over the above is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is that the second variable ball entry means is introduced in a period shorter than the predetermined period after the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state. After changing to the open state, it is changed to the closed state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines described in Technical Thoughts 1 to 3. That is, the launching means capable of launching the game ball based on the operation of the player, the first ball entering means capable of launching the game ball launched from the launching means, and the first ball entering means different from the first ball entering means. (2) The first discriminating means for executing the first discrimination based on the ball entering the first ball entering means and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. Based on the above, the second discrimination means for executing the second discrimination, the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination by the second discrimination means. 2 A display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the discrimination result at the same time, and the first identification information indicating the specific first discrimination result or the second identification information showing the specific second discrimination result. When the second identification information is displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, one from a plurality of different game states. The game state setting means for setting the game state of the above, and the rate variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern according to the game state set by the game state setting means. To have. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
65 1st variable winning device ( 2nd variable winning means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of display means)
630 1st starting port (1st ball entry means )
640 Second starting port (second ball entry means )
65 0 second variable winning device (first variable ball entrance means)
S305 part of some S1680 privilege granting means of the first determination hand stage S705 the second determination hand stage S1655 gaming state setting means

Claims (4)

The first variable ball entry means that can be changed between the open state in which the game ball can enter and the closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the open state.
The second variable ball entry means arranged on the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means,
A specific area where a game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and
A privilege granting means that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area.
A variable control means that changes the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means in a predetermined variable pattern as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition.
It has a determination means for determining the variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns.
In the variable pattern determined by the determination means, a game ball that did not enter the first variable entry means when the first variable entry means is in the closed state enters the specific region. A gaming machine characterized in that at least an advantageous pattern that is possible and a disadvantage pattern that makes it more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern are set. The advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern are set so that the period from when the first variable ball-entry means is changed to the closed state to when the second variable ball-entry means is changed to the open state is at least different. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by being Between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means is applied to the second variable ball entry means for a predetermined period or longer. Guidance means are arranged to guide
The disadvantage pattern is that after the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state, the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state in a period shorter than the predetermined period, and then the closed state is set. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine is variable. A launching means that can launch a game ball based on the operation of the player,
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball launched from the launch means, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the first determination means for executing the first determination and
A second determination means that executes a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entry means.
The first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second identification information showing the second discrimination result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means are dynamically displayed at the same time. Display means that can be used
The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game when the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the display means. When,
When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states, and a game state setting means.
Claim 1 is characterized in that it has a ratio variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern in accordance with the game state set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine described in any of 3 to 3.

Images